^w' wa, u^ 4 v<»'i < 
 
(Hmull mmvmitg ^ilratg 
 
 THE GIFT OF 
 
 ..^i:, S. 
 
 A l°\.?\OAa.^ ^^^■\<r(... 
 
 4534 
 
Cornell University Library 
 
 olin,anx 
 
 3 1924 031 196 177 
 
Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of tliis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924031196177 
 
PREPARATORY LATIN 
 COMPOSITION 
 
 ..BY ' ' ^f 
 
 F. P. MOULTON, A.M. 
 
 Teacher in the Hartford' High School 
 
 WITH REVISION AND EDITORIAL ASSISTANCE 
 BY 
 
 WILLIAM C COLLAR, A.M. 
 
 Head-Master in the Roxbury Latin School 
 
 BOSTON, U.S.A. 
 
 GINN & COMPANY, PUBLISHERS 
 
 Cbe ^t|)en«tttn ^tta 
 
 1904 
 
Copyright, 1896, 1904, by 
 F. P. MOULTON 
 
 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 
 
PREFACE 
 
 This book has grown out of the author's own experience, 
 and has been prepared in accordance with the most advanced 
 methods of teaching Latin composition. 
 
 The exercises are designed and graded to accompany the 
 daily work of translation, and contain ample material for the 
 fullest preparatory course. The book contains connected 
 passages based on each chapter of the first four books of 
 Caesar and on six orations of Cicero ; there are also supple- 
 mentary exercises for sight tests. 
 
 The great aim in Latin composition is so to fix in the 
 mind of the pupil the idioms, constructions, and style of the 
 Latin that he can translate more rapidly, correctly, and 
 intelligently. Therefore the exercises to be written in Latin 
 should contain the idioms, constructions, and style of the 
 Latin which the pupil is reading at the time. But it is 
 to be further remembered that all knowledge comes from 
 observation and comparison. And all exercises for practice 
 in schools should be so prepared as to require observation 
 and comparison on the part of pupils. 
 
 Therefore, while the words, idioms, and constructions 
 required in translating these exercises into Latin are to be 
 found in the text, the author has endeavored to avoid the 
 mistake of merely putting together parts of different sen- 
 tences taken from the text unchanged, which the pupil may 
 hunt up and put together without knowing the construction 
 of the sentence. The aim has been at similarity, not iden- 
 tity. The thoughts and sentences have been so recast and 
 
IV PREFACE 
 
 recombiiled as to force the pupil to observe the relation of 
 one part of the sentence to another, which makes certain 
 forms and constructions necessary. If, for instance, in a 
 chapter of the text there is an ablative absolute, a gerundive, 
 infinitive, and subjunctive, an exercise has been prepared in 
 which all these must be used ; but perhaps where the text 
 has the subjunctive, the infinitive will be required, or the 
 reverse. 
 
 Numerous passages which in the text are in indirect dis- 
 course have been given in the direct form. In these pas- 
 sages no changes have been made except what are due to 
 the change from the indirect to the direct form. For, while 
 pupils are learning the changes due to the principles of 
 indirect discourse, they should have no other changes to 
 think about. 
 
 In Latin the logical connection between sentences is 
 much closer than in English. And great care has been 
 taken in preparing these exercises to lead the pupil to 
 observe, appreciate, and use the proper conjunctions and 
 pronouns which mark the transitions from one sentence to 
 another in Latin. In other words, these exercises are not 
 mere groups of sentences based on the text, but they have 
 been carefully constructed so as to preserve the narrative, 
 style, and spirit of the original. This may be seen by read- 
 ing connectedly such exercises, for instance, as the longer 
 ones based on Caesar, Book I, chapters 15-29, or those on 
 Book IV, chapters 20-38, or the Archias of Cicero. 
 
 It has been the constant aim of the author to lead the 
 pupil to acquire a working knowledge of grammar, so that 
 he may rely more upon himself and less upon the teacher. 
 Instead of telling the pupil, for instance, whether to use 
 the subjunctive or infinitive, reference has been made to the 
 grammar to the principle involved ; and in every case the 
 word to which the reference applies is marked, so that 
 
PREFACE V 
 
 the pupil learns his grammar as he needs it and applies it 
 as he learns it. 
 
 The plan has been adopted of giving numerous cross 
 references, to foster the habit of comparing various passages 
 in which a given construction or idiom occurs, — a practice 
 invaluable to the student at every stage of his progress. 
 It is important that teachers encourage this habit and that 
 they assist their pupils also in carrying out such suggestions 
 as are given in Caesar, 1 : 6 : 2, I : 16 : i, II : 15 : i and 3, 
 III : 26: I. References have been given to the grammars 
 of Allen and Greenough, Hale and Buck, Harkness, Gilder- 
 sleeve, and Bennett. Naturally the references are most 
 numerous in the first part of Caesar and Cicero. 
 
 The very few words and phrases not used in the text, and 
 a few words rarely used, or used with a peculiar meaning, 
 are supplied as they are needed, so that no vocabulary is 
 necessary. All references and notes are given when needed 
 and in immediate connection with the exercises, in order that 
 they may be as handy as possible. 
 
 As some teachers wish to read the second book of Caesar 
 first, the exercises on the first two books have been made 
 equally simple, and the grammatical references are elemen- 
 tary and independent, so that either book may be taken first. 
 A second set'of exercises, a little harder, has been prepared 
 on the first book, designed only for classes that have previously 
 read the second book. It may be that even those teachers 
 whose classes have read the second book will find the first 
 set of exercises sufficiently difficult. In that case the second 
 set will be found well suited for review. 
 
 The chapters in the text of the fourth book of Caesar are 
 so short that a connected passage on each chapter makes 
 more composition work than most classes can be expected 
 to prepare while reading the text. But, since classes in dif- 
 ferent schools do not all read the same parts of the last three 
 
VI PREFACE 
 
 or four books of Caesar, it was thought best, instead of pre- 
 paring exercises on portions of all these books, to prepare 
 an exercise on each chapter of the fourth book, to furnish 
 practice while classes are reading in the fourth and subse- 
 quent books. In all other cases the exercises are limited in 
 amount and adapted in style to accompany the daily work 
 in translation. 
 
 The exercises for sight tests are taken from Caesar and 
 Cicero. A few of the latest Harvard and Yale examination 
 papers are added at the end. In some cases the passages 
 from Caesar and Cicero are merely based upon the text, 
 others are condensed from a page or more but not materially 
 changed, and some are exact translations. So pupils may 
 be asked to write the passage in Latin, and then be shown 
 the place in the text where the passage occurs. The correc- 
 tions can thus be made with less burden to the teacher and 
 with great effect to the pupil. In these exercises pupils of 
 course cannot be expected in all cases to reproduce exactly 
 the Latin text ; and great encouragement should be given if 
 they violate no principles of construction, position, and style. 
 
 If teachers wish some exercises for practice while their 
 classes are reading Virgil, a part of these exercises" may be 
 used for that purpose. The exercises on the fourth book 
 of Caesar are also well suited for practice in any part of 
 the course. 
 
 All the exercises and notes have passed under the careful 
 editorial supervision of Mr. William C. Collar, head-master 
 of the Roxbury Latin School, to whom thanks are due for 
 many helpful criticisms and valuable suggestions. 
 
 F. P. MOULTON, 
 Perkins Island, Maine, Hartford High School. 
 
 August i8, i8g6. 
 
INTRODUCTION 
 
 The last two decades have witnessed the beginning of 
 two important changes in this country in the objects and 
 methods of classical instruction, and with the progress of 
 time these changes are coming more and more to be 
 acknowledged as distinct improvements. With reference 
 to the first of these new departures, an increasingly large 
 number of the most intelligent teachers — schoolmasters 
 and college professors — have a clear and positive convic- 
 tion that one of the principal aims in the study of Latin in 
 the schools should be ability to read Latin authors without 
 discouragingly slow and painful effort. No theory of pur- 
 pose and method can stand or ought to stand, the practical 
 outcome of which is to leave the student at the period of 
 entrance to college, after he has been studying Latin from 
 three to six years, helpless at the threshold of the language, 
 that is, unable to read a page without incessant resort to 
 the aid of a dictionary. 
 
 Accordingly, reading at sight, as it is called, has been 
 invented as a method of instruction and study, has been 
 practiced more or less tentatively and timidly by many and 
 confidently by a few, and, as a test of power and knowledge 
 of Latin and of fitness for more advanced study, has found 
 a place in the entrance requirements of not a few colleges. 
 All signs point to a larger recognition of its usefulness. 
 The interest which it adds to the study of Latin and the 
 confidence and sense of power which it begets in the 
 learner are manifest to those teachers who have most 
 
Vlll INTRODUCTION 
 
 diligently pursued it with their pupils and most carefully 
 watched its tendencies and effects. 
 
 But to every good some evil is linked ; some loss attends 
 every gain. While our boys learn by this method to divine 
 the meaning of a Latin author, — a method before which the 
 barriers of modern languages speedily give way, — while at 
 the same time they are getting a fruitful mental discipline, 
 strikingly in contrast with the barren yield of the old syn- 
 tactical drill, they are exposed to the lapses and pitfalls that 
 come from a too exclusive attention to the thought and a 
 comparative neglect of form. In other words, the learner is 
 in danger of relying too much upon insight unguarded and 
 unchecked by positive knowledge, and therefore of under- 
 valuing accuracy. But it must not be forgotten that train- 
 ing in habits of- accuracy is one of the chief functions of 
 education, and the study of language ought to serve as a 
 most effective instrument. 
 
 Incessant drill in syntax unquestionably had the effect of 
 making the student attentive to forms and constructions ; 
 and if for that drill reading at sight is largely substituted, 
 what means shall be found for imposing upon the learner 
 the necessity for close and careful observation while he 
 is reading and is bent mainly on divining the thought? 
 Perhaps the words "close and careful observation" imply 
 too exclusively the conscious action of the mind. This is 
 indeed needful, but how also train your student so that 
 while the voluntary and self-determined attention is occu- 
 pied with the thought, the unconscious or subconscious 
 attention shall be busy with the forms of expression ? The 
 answer is not far to seek. An incentive must be ■supplied 
 which shall act, as it were, automatically. An exercise 
 must be devised which shall turn to use whatever the 
 learner has got through conscious observation, or has 
 absorbed unconsciously in his reading. He must reproduce 
 
INTRODUCTION IX 
 
 words, forms, constructions, not isolated nor detached, but 
 in their relations and connections : that is, he must practice 
 writing Latin as the complement of reading (in the proper 
 sense) and translating into the vernacular ; and the first 
 steps should be simply retranslation, followed more and more 
 by exercises requiring, besides memory, imitation, induction, 
 and a true Sprachgefuhl. 
 
 The basis, then, of the student's work on this side must 
 be the Latin texts that he has read. This is the second of 
 the two great changes referred to in the opening sentence 
 of this Introduction as having characterized our classical 
 instruction within the last twenty years. It is, in fact, less 
 than ten years since the almost universal practice was to 
 train learners in writing Latin by the use of manuals con- 
 structed on a principle " in a diameter opposite," as Claren- 
 don says, to that which I have just stated. Briefly stated, 
 writing Latin was absolutely divorced from reading. The 
 plan was to state rules of syntax, often unaccompanied by 
 illustrations, and then give English exercises for translation 
 into Latin such as to involve the application of the rules. 
 Would it be possible to invent a more mechanical method ? 
 How could you more effectively insure a perfectly artificial 
 product ? If the history of education did not show how 
 slow progress has been; if all experience did not illustrate 
 how often more cumbrous and roundabout ways are lighted 
 upon in place of the more obvious, simple, and direct, we 
 should wonder that a method of studying Latin so opposed 
 to common sense, so intrinsically wooden, and so pitiful in 
 results, could have long prevailed. 
 
 The welcome with which two text-books were received 
 that illustrated the opposite principle of wedding writing to 
 reading, — books published independently, but almost simul- 
 taneously, — and the consequent rapid decline and disap- 
 pearance from use of manuals of the old sort, show that 
 
X INTRODUCTION 
 
 the time was ripe for the change, and that those publications 
 expressed in their essential principle only what was brood- 
 ing in many minds and was ready to take on form and 
 substance. 
 
 In the first of the two books referred to the controlling 
 principles were these : continuity, as distinguished from 
 detached and unrelated sentences in the exercises for trans- 
 lation into Latin, partly for the purpose of avoiding the 
 woodenness that characterizes most text-books of the sort, 
 and the limitation of Latin text on which practice is based 
 to an amount that can be practically committed to memory 
 and repeatedly reviewed during the ordinary high-school 
 course. In reference to the first principle, to quote from 
 the preface to the "Practical Latin Composition": 
 
 "It will be seen that the controlling principle of the 
 exercises is that of continuity. The importance, or rather 
 necessity, of this principle, obvious though it is, seems to 
 have been hitherto overlooked, at least in exercises of a 
 very elementary character. How can ' a true choice and 
 placing of wordes and a right ordering of sentences,' the 
 things that Ascham first names, be either taught or learned 
 by any amount of practice in 'making of latines,' — that is, 
 constructing sentences detached aiid unrelated. It is as 
 marked a feature of Latin to interlock sentences grammat- 
 ically and logically by relative words and by expressive 
 adjustments of order, as it is of modern English to leave 
 such relations unaccentuated, often merely to suggest them 
 through juxtaposition." 
 
 Mr. Moulton has thoroughly and ingeniously maintained 
 unbroken continuity, not merely in separate chapters, but 
 throughout the narrative of a whole book and the argument 
 of a speech. This gives his book two notable merits, inci- 
 dental to his main purpose. The first is that it is interest- 
 ing ; the second, that the successive chapters constitute a 
 
INTRODUCTION XI 
 
 brief and lucid rhumt of the substance of the history or 
 argument that the pupil is working over. By a rapid glance 
 through the exercises the learner can at once recall where 
 he is, and so with the greatest convenience use his " Com- 
 position " book as . a vade mecum while reading, both for 
 keeping the thread of the story, or the reasoning, and for 
 getting a notion of the piece of literature as a whole. The 
 plan necessitated, as the exercises on each part are brief, 
 the use of several books of Caesar and as many as six 
 speeches of Cicero. 
 
 Opinions will differ on the question whether greater good 
 is to be derived from the intensive study of a moderate 
 amount of Latin text or from the more discursive practice 
 on a large area. For myself I still hold confidently to the 
 former principle, if one must choose, but I will admit that 
 a combination of both methods at different stages of the 
 learner's progress may be preferable to the exclusive pursuit 
 of either course. It is certain that many teachers find it a 
 convenience to have at hand carefully prepared themes for 
 writing Latin on whatever the daily reading lesson may be. 
 But there will not be two opinions on the need and value of 
 a thorough knowledge of the essentials of Latin grammar, 
 such as this book plans for and enforces. 
 
 The author has seen what many teachers are slow to 
 discover, that instruction in Latin syntax, to be effective, 
 must be almost wholly connected with writing. It is need- 
 less, it is almost a waste of time, to question the learner 
 on the syntax of the Latin that he translates accurately. 
 A little knowledge of syntax will go a great way in reading 
 any language. In reading, that is, discovering the mean- 
 ing of an author, the slow processes of conscious induction 
 cannot serve as the chief reliance. The faculty of insight, 
 of divination, must be cultivated and practiced. But in 
 writing consciousness of construction is forced upon the 
 
Xll INTRODUCTION 
 
 learner, and he finds that ignorance of grammatical struc- 
 ture bars his. way at every step. Here there is no place for 
 guessing ; positive arid accurate knowledge is demanded. 
 Hence it is that reading and writing must go hand in hand. 
 Hence it is that Latin composition is at once the proper 
 corrective and complement of reading at sight. 
 
 Schoolmasters see that the power to read Latin and write 
 Latin should be the aim of school instruction, for the two 
 processes imply and resume all that is best in the mental 
 discipline that is to be got from Latin. When will college 
 authorities, recognizing the same power as the best evidence 
 of fitness for more advanced work, unite in powerfully promot- 
 ing true aims and right methods in the schools by stripping 
 Latin entrance requirements of all other and inferior tests ? 
 
 WM. C. COLLAR. 
 Nantucket, 
 August 17, 1896. 
 
HINTS TO PUPILS 
 
 Before beginning to write any exercise a careful study of the 
 whole chapter in the text should be made, for frequently a word 
 or construction required in the first part of the exercise will be 
 found in the last part of the chapter, and the words of one part 
 of a chapter must often be adapted to constructions found in 
 another part. A thorough study of the text and the grammatical 
 references will solve all the difficulties of the exercises. 
 
 The notations cf . 7 : 3 and II: 5 : 7 mean respectively compare 
 chapter 7, note 3, and Book II, chapter j, note 7. In Cicero the 
 I means the first oration. The references are to the grammars of 
 Allen and Greenough, Hale and Buck, Harkness, Gildersleeve, and 
 Bennett. No abbreviation is used for Allen and Greenough, as 
 that invariably comes first. In Cicero, Cat., Arch., Manil. stand 
 respectively for Catiline, Archias, Manilian Law. 
 
PART I 
 
CAESAR'S GALLIC WAR 
 
 BOOK FIRST 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 1 
 
 1 . The Belgae were a third part ' of Gaul. 
 
 2. These differ from the rest of the Gauls in culture." 
 
 3. But Caesar said they were ' the bravest of all the Gauls. 
 
 4. The Aquitani were nearest to Spain, from which they 
 were separated by the Pyrenees mountains.'' 
 
 2 
 I. When Caesar came into Gaul, he learned that the 
 Belgae differed in bravery" and civilization from the remain- 
 ing tribes that inhabited this country. 2. The Helvetii 
 also were very brave, because they were almost constantly 
 waging war with the Germans whom they wished to keep 
 from their territories. 
 
 1. 284; H. & B. 319, II; H. 393; 3. 459; H. & B. 589; H. 613; G. 
 G. 32s; B. 168. 527; B. 331, I. 
 
 2. 418 ; H. & B. 441 ; H. 480 ; G. 4. 409 ; H. & B. 423 ; H. 476 ; G. 
 397; B. 226. 401 ; B. 218. 
 
 CHAPTER II 
 1 
 
 1. The Helvetii were very brave,' but were hemmed in 
 by too" narrow limits. 
 
 2. On one side the Rhine divided them from the Ger- 
 mans ; on the other. Mount Jura from the Sequani. 
 
 I 
 
2 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 3. On which account, influenced by Orgetorix,' they went 
 from their own territories to make* war upon their neighbors/ 
 
 4. This they did that they might get* control* of all Gaul., 
 
 2 
 1. Orgetorix, a very rich nobleman, induced the Helvetii 
 to seek* wider territory for the sake of getting control of all 
 Gaul. 2. Thisthey'' were easily persuaded to do.' 3. For, 
 though^ fond of war, they could not easily make war upon 
 their neighbors, because they were hemmed in by too^ 
 narrow limits. 
 
 1. 291, b; H. &B. 241,3; H.498; 5. 370; H. &B. 376J H. 429; G. 
 B. 240, 2. 347 ; B. 187, III. 
 
 2. 291, a; H.&B. 241,2; H. 498; 6. 410; H. & B. 429; H. 477; G. 
 B. 240, I. ' 407; B. 218, I. 
 
 3. 405; H. & B. 406, I ; H. 468 ; G. 7. 372 ; H. & B. 364, 2 ; H. 426, 
 401; B. 216. 3i G. 346, rem. i; B. 187, 
 
 4. 531; H.&B. 502, 2; H. 568; G. II, b. 
 545, I J B. 282, I. 8. Omit. 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 
 1. The Helvetii were getting together as great a supply 
 of grain as possible.-' 
 
 2. This they were going to take^ with them on the march. 
 
 3. They selected Orgetorix to establish ° friendship with 
 the Sequani and the Haedui. 
 
 4. And there is no* doubt that through Casticus and 
 Dumnorix he accomplished' this purpose.' 
 
 I. While the Helvetii were getting ready those things 
 which they were going to take ^ with them on the journey, 
 Orgetorix persuaded them to establish ' peace with their 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK I 3 
 
 neighbors, saying' that he would go to the neighboring 
 states to accomplish this purpose. 2. And there is no^ 
 doubt but that, after establishing friendship with Casticus 
 the Sequanian and Dumnorix the Haeduan, he induced^ 
 them to seize " the royal power in their own states. 
 
 1. 291,0; H.&B. 241, 4; H. 498; 5. 558, a, and 484, a ; H.& 3.521, 
 G. 303; B. 240, 3. 3, b, and 476 iH. 595, 1, and 545, 
 
 2. porto. 499, 2; H. & B. 600, 2; I; G. 555, 2, and 510; B. 298 
 H. 236; G. 129; B. 115. and 267, 2, 3. 
 
 3. 533, a, and 484, b ; H. & B. 502, 6. res. 
 
 A and 476; H. 568 and 545, II; 7. Omit. 580, a; H. & B. 534, i, 
 G. 630 and 510; B. 282, 2, and a; H. 642, i ; G. 649, 2 ; B. 
 
 267, z. 314, 2. 
 
 4. neque. 328, a; H. & B. 307, 3 ; 
 H. 656, 4; G. 480; B. 341, d. 
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 
 1. There was no doubt that Orgetorix was forming a 
 conspiracy. 
 
 2. But the Helvetii appointed a day on which ^ he might ^ 
 plead his cause. 
 
 3. On the day appointed, however, by the help of his 
 servants, Orgetorix ' escaped, for fear that ' he might be 
 burned to death by the excited populace. 
 
 4. And the Helvetii thought he committed suicide. 
 
 I. When there was no doubt that Orgetorix was forming 
 a conspiracy to get possession of all Gaul, the Helvetii 
 appointed a day on which ^ the case was to be argued.* 
 2. But Orgetorix escaped by the help of his household, 
 whom he had brought to the trial. 3. Thereupon the 
 
4 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 officers pursued with^ arms, and he committed suicide to 
 escape being* burned to death by the excited populace. 
 
 1. 423 ; H. & B. 439; H. 486; G. 4. cf. II : 20 : i. 
 
 393; B. 230. 5. cum. Why not cum in the 
 
 2. cf. 3 : 3. text .' 
 
 3. for fear that = that not. 531; 6. to escape being = that he might 
 H. & B. 502, 2 ; H. 568 ; G. 545, not be. 
 
 3 ; B. 282. 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 1 . The Helvetii none ■^ the less, as soon as " they were 
 ready, set out from home.* 
 
 2. They took with * them ^ each for himself * three months' 
 provisions. 
 
 3. And they set fire to everything which they were not 
 intending to take with them, that they might remove the 
 hope of returning. 
 
 4. The neighboring states, having done ' the same thing, 
 
 started with them. 
 
 2 
 
 I. The Helvetii nevertheless, as soon as^ they were 
 ready to start, after setting ' fire each to his own * dwelling, 
 that there might be no* hope of returning home, went from 
 their own territories, prepared to undergo all dangers. 
 2. And the neighboring states, led on by their influence, 
 adopted^ the same plan. 
 
 1. 414; H. &B. 424; H. 479; G. 5. 299; H. & B. 262, I; H. 503; 
 403; B. 223. G. 309, I ; B. 244, I. 
 
 2. 543 ; H. & B. 557 ; H. 602 ; G. 6. cf. II : 11: 2. 
 
 561 ; B. 287. 7. 493, 2 ; H. & B. 602, 1 ; H. 640, 
 
 3. 427, I ; H. & B. 451, a ; H. 462, 4 ; G. 410, rem. i ; B. 356, 2, b. 
 4; G. 390, 2; B. 229, 1, b. 8. nequaspes. 310, a; H. & B. 276, 
 
 4. I43,f; H. & B.4i8,a; H. 175, i; H. 186; G. 315; B.91, 5. 
 7 ; G. 413, I ; B. 142, 4. 9. adopted = utor. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK I 5 
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 
 1 
 
 1. Between the mountain and the river they could 
 scarcely draw their carts one at a time.^ 
 
 2. It seemed to be easier to cross the Rhone. 
 
 3. And they thought the AUobroges, because they were" 
 not well disposed' towards the Romans, would allow* them 
 to go through their territory. 
 
 I. The Helvetii could scarcely draw their carts in single 
 file^ along the narrow and difficult road * between the moun- 
 tain and the river. 2. And so they decided to cross the 
 Rhone into the territory of the AUobroges, who, they thought, 
 because they were not well disposed towards the Romans, 
 would allow* them to pass through their territory. 3. They 
 all met on the banks of the Rhone, March 28.° 
 
 1. 136; H. &B. 133 ; H. 164, i; G. 3. ofgoodmind. 415; H.&B.443; 
 97 ; B. 78, c. H. 473, 2 ; G. 400 ; B. 224. ' 
 
 2. 540, I, 2, b; H. & B. 535, 2, a; 4. cf. i : 3. 
 
 H. 643; G. 541; B. 314. Also 5. 429, a;H. &B.426; H. 476; G. 
 study the use of the moods after 401 ; B. 218, 9. 
 
 quod in the text of chapters I, 6. 631; H. & B. 664, 665 ; H. 754; 
 III, VI, VII. G. page 491 ; B. 371. 
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 
 1 
 
 1. Caesar was informed that the Helvetii were marching 
 towards the river. 
 
 2. He thought that men of hostile intent would do as 
 great harm as possible. 
 
 3. And he hurried towards Geneva to pull down the bridge 
 and to make requisition ^ upon the province for an army. 
 
6 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 4. Nevertheless, when they asked ^ that they^ might go^ 
 by his consent, he took time to think the matter over.' 
 
 2 
 I. When Caesar was informed that the Helvetii were 
 intending to cross the river, he hurried towards Geneva. 
 2. For he thought he must pull down the bridge as quickly 
 as possible, so that men of hostile disposition could not cross 
 into the province. 3. Yet, when they said they wished to go 
 by his consent without any harm, he asked that he might 
 take time to think the matter over.' 4. He in truth wanted 
 to use up the time till the province should send the soldiers. 
 
 1. make requisition =impero. 369; 368, i ; H. & B. 362; H. 424; 
 H.&B.364,4; H.424; G. 345 ; G. 346 ; B. 187. 
 
 B. 187, II, a. 4. 454 ; H. & B. 585; H. 607; G. 
 
 2. pluperf. subj. 546; H. & B. 524; 422 ; B. 327, i. 
 
 H. 600, II ; G. 585 ; B. 288, B. 5. for deliberating. 506; H. & B. 
 
 3. that it be allowed them to go. 612,3; H.628; G.432; B. 338,3. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 
 1 
 
 1. Meanwhile Caesar ran a wall and ditch from the lake 
 to the mountains, that the Helvetii might not ^ pass. 
 
 2. And they were disappointed because he did not give 
 them a right of way. 
 
 3. Yet some without his consent ^ crossed the river -by 
 night with rafts ° or by fords.' 
 
 4. But they could not pass the wall and ditch, and were 
 driven back. 
 
 2 
 
 1. Meanwhile Caesar ordered the soldiers to run a high 
 wall and ditch from the lake to the mountains, that no^ 
 one* might pass by this route. 2. Yet, when the deputies 
 returned and he said he could not grant them a right of 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK I "J 
 
 way, some without his consent crossed the river by night on 
 rafts * or by fords.* 3. But they could not cross the ditch , 
 and wall, which were on the other side^ of the river, and 
 ceased from the attempt utterly " disappointed. 
 
 1. that not = ne ; might = possum. 4. 310, a ; H. & B. 276, i ; H. 186 ; 
 
 2. 419, a; H. & B. 421 ; G. 409; B. G. 315; B. 252, I. 
 227, I. 5. trans. 
 
 3. 409; H. & B. 423; H. 476; G. 6. omnino. 
 401 ; B. 218. 
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 
 1. By the narrow road through the Sequani they could 
 not pass against their will.^ 
 
 2. But Dumnorix, who kept as many states as possible 
 bound to him by kindness, had very great power with the 
 Sequani and Helvetii. 
 
 3. And through his intercession ^ the Helvetii obtained 
 the request^ that they might pass through the territory of 
 the Sequani. 
 
 2 
 
 I . The only road that was left through the Sequani was so 
 narrow that they could not pass against their will. 2. But 
 Dumnorix was a man in high favor,' who, from a desire for 
 royal power, kept as many states as possible bound to him 
 by his kindly service, and was a friend both to the Sequani 
 and the Haedui. 3. And through him the Helvetii obtained 
 the request^ that they might pass through the territory of 
 the Sequani, promising* that they would do no harm. 
 
 1. cf . 8 : i. 4. Omit, and use colon. 580, a; 
 
 2. impetro = obtain a request. H. & B. 534, 1, a ; H. 642, i ; 
 
 3. gratia, 415 ; H. & B. 443; H. G. 649, 2 ; B. 314, 2. 
 473> 2; G. 400; B. 224. 
 
8 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER X 
 
 1 
 
 1. Caesar wished to keep the Helvetii from the fruitful 
 fields ' of the province. 
 
 2. And so, placing^ Labienus in command of the fortifi- 
 cations,' he started for Italy to enroll two legions. 
 
 3. From there he led all his forces through many states 
 
 into the Segusiavi. 
 
 2 
 
 I. When Caesar understood^ what was being done, put- 
 ting'^ Labienus in command of the fortifications, he started for 
 Italy to enroll two new legions. 2. From there he marched 
 with all his forces by the nearest route into further Gaul to 
 keep the Helvetii from the fertile fields of the province. 
 
 1. 400-; H. & B. 408 ; H. 461 ; G. 3. cf. 2 : 5. 
 390; B. 214,2. 4. cf. 5: 2. 
 
 2. cf. 5 : 7. 
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 
 1 
 
 1. The Helvetii, when they were crossing the territory of 
 the Haedui, laid waste their fields. 
 
 2. And they ^ asked help from Caesar ^ because they could ' 
 not help themselves. 
 
 3. The Allobroges, too, had nothing left* but the soil, 
 and came to ask* help. 
 
 4. And so Caesar did not wait till their towns should be 
 captured * and their children carried off. 
 
 2 
 I. The Haedui, when the Helvetii had now come into 
 their territory and they could not stop them from devastating 
 their fields, decided that they must ask help from Caesar. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK I 9 
 
 2. And, when the deputies came to ask help on the ground 
 that they had' nothing left* but the soil, Caesar did not wait 
 till the Helvetii should storm* their towns also. 
 
 i. 297, a; H. & B. 274, 2 ; H. 505 ; 4. 288 and 346, a; H. & B. 346, a; 
 
 G. 305; B. 246, I. H. 495, 2; G. 369; B. 237, 2, a. 
 
 2. 396; H.&B.393; H. 411; G. 5. 509; H.&B.6I8; H. 633 ; G. 
 339! B. 178. 435; B. 340. 
 
 3. 540, 2; H. & B. 535, 2, a; H. 6. 553 ; H. & B. 507, 5; H. 603, 
 588, II; G. 541 ; B. 286. 2 ; G. 572 ; B. 293, III, 2. 
 
 CHAPTER XII 
 
 1 
 
 1. The Helvetii had to construct^ rafts in order to cross 
 the Arar. 
 
 2. They did not know in what ^ direction Caesar was 
 marching.' 
 
 3. And that part which* was left on this side of the Arar, 
 when Caesar overtook it, was the first * to take to flight. ' 
 
 4. This happened to be ' the same party that had killed 
 
 Cassius. 
 
 2 
 
 I. The Helvetii had to construct^ rafts in order to cross 
 the Arar. 2. And Caesar, having overtaken one party before 
 they had crossed or knew in what ^ direction he was march- 
 ing, killed so great a number that the rest took to flight. 
 3. This party was the same one which, after killing' Cassius, 
 had sent his army under the yoke. 4. Thus by chance the 
 Helvetian state which* had killed a Roman general was the 
 first ^ to be defeated by Caesar. 
 
 1. rafts were for the Helvetians to 5. was the first to = piimus. cf. 
 be constructed, cf. II : 20 : i. the use of princeps in the text. 
 
 2. quis. Why not uter ? 290 ; H. & B. 243 ; H. 497, 3 ; 
 
 3. 573, 574; H. & B. 507, 3; H. G. 325, 5; B. 241, 2. 
 
 649, II ; G. 467 ; B. 300. 6. happened to be = was by 
 
 4. 308, d; H. &B. 284, 6; H. 399, chance. 
 3; G. 616; B. 251, 4, a. 7. cf. 5: 7. 
 
10 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER XIII 
 
 1 
 
 1. Caesar had a bridge made^ over the Arar, and followed 
 up the rest of the Helvetii. 
 
 2. And they were so alarmed because he crossed the river 
 in one day that they were willing to make peace. 
 
 3. Nevertheless they informed Caesar that they were the 
 same ones who, within the memory ''■ of men, had brought ° 
 disaster upon a Roman army. 
 
 4. For this reason, they said,* he should not forget ' the 
 death of Cassius and Piso. 
 
 2 
 I. Having made a bridge across the Arar, Caesar had the 
 army led ^ across so as to follow up that part of the Helvetian 
 troops which had already crossed. 2. But they were so 
 alarmed when they learned that Caesar had crossed in one 
 day, that they sent ambassadors to say that they were willing 
 to make peace with him ; but if he wished to contend with 
 arms, he should not forget ^ that they themselves within the 
 memory of men had brought disaster upon a Roman army. 
 
 1. 500, 4; H. & B. 605, 2; H. 638, 4. Omit. 580, a; H. & B. 534, i, 
 3 ; G. 430 ; B. 337, 7, b, ;:. a ; H. 642, i ; G. 649, 2 ; B, 
 
 2. 423; H. & B. 439; H. 486; G. 314, 2. 
 
 393; B. 231. g. oblmscot. 588, a; H. &B. 538; 
 
 3. cf. 6 : i!. H. 642, 4 ; G. 652 ; B. 316. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV 
 
 1 
 
 1. "I have the' less hesitation,"" replied Caesar, " because 
 I remember that' which you Helvetian deputies have 
 mentioned." 
 
 2, "This" I bear the^ more reluctantly the' less it has 
 happened according to the desert of the Roman people." 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK I II 
 
 3. "And, if you have done* what' you promised Dum- 
 norix, you would not have annoyed the Haedui and Allo- 
 broges." 
 
 4. " Yet, if you are ° willing to satisfy me with reference 
 to these recent wrongs, I am willing to forget the old insult." 
 
 5. "And even now, if you do* what you promise, I will 
 make peace with you." 
 
 I. "The fact that you glory so insolently in your victory, 
 and take delight in having inflicted injury so long with 
 impunity, points to the same thing. 2. For the immortal 
 gods are accustomed, in order that men may feel sorrow the 
 more keenly from a change of circumstances, to grant pros- 
 perity at times to those whom they wish to punish for their 
 wrong-doing. 3. Although this is so, yet, if hostages be 
 given me by you, so that I may understand that you will do 
 what you promise, I will make peace with you." 
 
 1. 414, a, note ; H. & B. 424, a; 4. 517 ; H. & B. 581 ; H. 579; G. 
 H. 479; G. 403 ; B. 223. 597 ; B. 304. 
 
 2. less of hesitation is given me. 5. 515 ; H. & B. 579; H. 574; G. 
 346; H. & B. 346; H. 442; G. S95; B. 302. 
 
 369 ; B. 201. 6. 516, a, c; H. & B. 579, a; H. 
 
 3. The Latin idiom requires the 574, 2 ; G. 595 ; B. 302. 
 plural pronoun referring to 
 
 ■what is said. 
 
 CHAPTER XV 
 
 1. If the Helvetii had given ^ hostages, Caesar would have 
 made peace with them. 
 
 2. But, when they moved their camp, he sent his cavalry 
 to follow them and keep them from foraging.^ 
 
12 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 2 
 
 I. If the Helvetii had been willing' to give hostages, 
 Caesar would not have made war upon. them. 2. But, when 
 they moved their camp, his cavalry followed them so eagerly 
 that they became engaged in a skirmish. 3. And in this 
 engagement the Helvetii were so elated that they boldly 
 assailed the Romans. 4. Yet Caesar, even then, did not 
 engage in battle, and merely kept the enemy from foraging.^ 
 
 1. cf. 14: 4. 236, 238, b; H. & B. 206, 
 
 2. Use the noun pabulatio. And l, 2, 6; H. 335, 334, 333; 
 compare the meaning of pabu- G. 180 and 181, i, 6; B. 147, 
 lum, pabulatOT, pabulatio. 240, i, 3, 4. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI 
 
 1. Meanwhile Caesar could not take grain from the fields 
 because it was ' not ripe. 
 
 2. Nor could he use his own grain, for the Helvetii had 
 turned away from the river. 
 
 3. But the Haedui, at whose entreaties he had undertaken 
 the war, had promised him grain. 
 
 4. So he now informed them that he could not use the 
 grain which he had brought ' up the river. 
 
 5. Yet they did not assist him even^ then; and he cen- 
 sured them severely for putting ' him off. 
 
 I. The Haedui, at whose entreaties Caesar had under- 
 taken' the war, had promised him grain. 2. And now he 
 informed them that he could not use the grain which he had 
 brought up the Arar, because the Helvetii, whom he wished 
 to follow, had turned ' away from the river. 3. But they did 
 
CAESAR:. GALLIC WAR, BOOK I I 3 
 
 not assist him at once, and he censured them severely for 
 putting' him off, especially since he could not obtain even^ 
 green fodder from the fields. 
 
 I. Observe the use of the indica- ^. 599, b; H. & B. 302; H. 656, 
 
 tive and subjunctive moods in 2 ; G. 448, 2; B. 347, i. 
 
 the causal and relative clauses 3. because they put. 592, 3 ; H. 
 
 of chapters XIV-XVI. Also & B. 535, 2, a ; H. 643 ; G. 541 ; 
 
 cf. 6: 2. B. 286, I. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII 
 
 r. Some quarrelsome and reckless men were keeping the 
 people'' from bringing^ the grain to Caesar. 
 
 2. They said that if the Romans should conquer' the 
 Helvetii, they would take away liberty from all the Gauls. 
 
 3. And, moreover,* Liscus, the magistrate himself, could 
 not restrain these men from reporting' Caesar's plans to the 
 enemy. 
 
 2 
 
 I. There were some quarrelsome and reckless persons 
 who had great influence among the Haedui. 2. These were 
 keeping the multitude from bringing^ grain to Caesar, say- 
 ing that, if the Romans should conquer ° the Helvetii, they 
 would take away liberty from the rest of the Gauls. 3. But 
 Liscus, the magistrate, was not restrained by fear or danger 
 from reporting ' to Caesar what these men were saying. 
 
 I. multitudd. 545. H, 2 ; G. 656, i, 2, and 
 
 3. 558, b; H. & B. 502, 3, b; H. 510; B..320, 267. 
 
 568 ; G. 548, 549 ; B. 295, 3. 4. Quin etiam. 
 
 3. 589, 1 , 2, and 484, b, c ; H. & B. 5. 558 ; H. & B. 502, 3, b ; H. 595, 
 
 534, I, 2, and 476 ; H. 646 and 2 ; G. 555 ; B. 295; 3, a. 
 
14 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII 
 
 1. Dumnorix was a man of the greatest boldness^ among 
 the Haedui. 
 
 2. For the sake of power ^ he kept a large number of 
 cavalry about him. 
 
 3. And he thought, if the Romans should be defeated,' 
 he would obtain the sovereignty. 
 
 4. So, when the battle was being fought by the cavalry 
 
 that had been sent by the Haedui as a help* to Caesar, he 
 
 began the flight. 
 
 2 
 
 I. Caesar learned by inquiry that Dumnorix was a man 
 of the greatest boldness^ among the Haedui. 2. For the 
 sake of power ^ he had bought up the revenues and kept 
 a large number of cavalry about him. 3. He iavored the 
 Helvetii also, because he had taken a wife from that state, 
 and thought that through their help he would obtain the 
 throne, if the Romans should be defeated.' 4. He it was who 
 commenced the flight of the unsuccessful cavalry battle that 
 was fought a few days before. 
 
 1. 415; H. & B. 443; H. 473, 2; 3. cf. 17: 3. 
 
 G. 400; B. 224. 4. 382, i; H. & B. 360; H. 433; 
 
 2. 359, b; H. & B. 339, d; H. G. 356; B. 191, 2. 
 475, 2; G. 373; B. 198, I. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX 
 1 
 
 1. Dumnorix had had^ the Helvetii led ^ through the 
 territory of the Sequani without the authority ' of the state. 
 
 2. But his brother Diviciacus was a man of remarkable 
 honor * and great attachment to the Roman people. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK I 1 5 
 
 3. And this was sufficient reason^ why Caesar should 
 confer with Diviciacus before punishing* his brother. 
 
 I. Although Dumnorix had had * the Helvetii led ^ through 
 the territory of the Sequani without the authority' of the 
 state, and commenced the flight of the cavalry, there was 
 sufficient reason why Caesar should not punish him himself. 
 
 2. For he did not wish to hurt the feelings of Diviciacus, 
 whose attachment to him and the Roman people he knew 
 to be very great. 3. And so, before taking* any measure 
 against Dumnorix, he conferred with Diviciacus. 
 
 I. euro. 5. 346; H. & B. 346; H. 442; G. 
 ^. cf. 13: 1. 369; B. 201, 2. 
 
 3. without the authority = iniussu. 6. cf. II : 12: i. 
 
 4. cf. 18: I. • 
 
 CHAPTER XX 
 
 1. "I know," said Diviciacus, "these things are true, and 
 no one,^ on this account, feels ^ more pain than I do." 
 
 2. "But do not take' any severe measure against my 
 brother." 
 
 3. "Because, if anything severe happens* to him from 
 you, the people will think that this has been done with my 
 consent." 
 
 4. Out of respect to these entreaties^ of Diviciacus, 
 Caesar pardoned his brother, but put guards over him. 
 
 2 
 
 I. Diviciacus knew that what every one had said in the 
 council about his brother was true. 2. And no one, on this 
 account, felt^ more pain than he did, because his brother 
 was diminishing his* influence. 3. Yet he was afraid that, 
 
l6 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 if Caesar should pass any severe measure against him, the 
 people would think that this was done through his " influence. 
 4. And his good-will had so much weight with Caesar 
 that he pardoned the past, and merely put guards over 
 Dumnorix. 
 
 1. and no one = and not (nee) any 4. cf. 14 : 6. 
 
 one (quisquam). 328, n., and 311; 5. " out of respect to " is expressed 
 
 H. & B. 307, 3, a, and 276, 7; by the case. 369; H. & B. 
 
 H. 656, 4, and 513; G.480,317; 364, 4; H. 424; G. 345 ; B. 187, 
 
 B. 341, d, and 252, 4. II. a. 
 
 2. capio. 6. Use suus. 300, 2 ; H. & B. 
 
 3. 450 J H. & B. 501, 3, a, 2) ; H. 262, 2 ; H. 504; G. 521 ; B. 
 561, I ; G. 271, 2; B. 276, 1-. 244, II. 
 
 CHAPTER XXI 
 
 1. Meanwhile the Helvetii encamped at the foot of the 
 hill, about eight miles from Caesar's camp. 
 
 2. So Caesar sent Labienus to ascend the hill in a 
 circuit. 
 
 3. Then, after sending forward ^ scouts, he started towards 
 the enemy. 
 
 2 
 
 I. Meantime the Helvetii had encamped about eight 
 miles from the camp of Caesar, at the foot of^ a hill. 
 2. Having ascertained^ that this hill had an easy ascent 
 in a circuit, Caesar sent Labienus to seize the highest 
 ridge. 3. Then, sending forward^ scouts and cavalry, he 
 started himself in'' the same direction. 
 
 '■■ cf. 5 : 7. and in? 220, c ; H. & B. 381, 
 
 2. What case must follow sub a; H. 490, 3; G. 418 ; B. 143. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK I 17 
 
 CHAPTER XXII 
 
 1 
 
 1. At daybreak,^ Considius thought he saw the Gallic 
 arms and insignia on top^ of the hill. 
 
 2. And so with horse at full speed ^ he ran to inform 
 Caesar. 
 
 3. Late ^ in the day, however, Caesar learned that Labienus 
 held the mountain, as he ° had been ordered to do.^ 
 
 4. The Helvetii, in fact,* did not know of Caesar's arrival, 
 and were marching with the same speed ^ as usual.' 
 
 2 
 I. At daybreak,' Considius, alarmed by the Gallic arms 
 and insignia, which he thought he saw on top' of the hill, 
 ran with horse at full speed '■' to inform Caesar. 2. Late ' in 
 the day, however, Caesar, while he held his men drawn up 
 in line of battle, learned that Labienus held the mountain 
 as he ' had been ordered to do,^ and that the Helvetii had 
 known neither his own arrival nor that of Labienus, and 
 were marching on with the same speed' as usual.' 
 
 1. 293; H. & B. 244; H. 497, 4; 4. vero. 599, b; H. & B. 310, 
 
 G. 291, rem. 2 ; B. 241. 5; H. 659, 2; G. 487; B. 
 
 ^. 419; H. & B. 421 ; H. 489; G. 343, g. 
 
 409; B. 227, I. S- celeritas. ' 412; H. & B. 445; 
 3. Omit "to do." 372; H. & B. H. 473, 3; G. 399; B. 220, i. 
 
 364, 2; H. 426, 3; G. 217; B. 6. by which they were accus- 
 
 187, II, b. tomed. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII 
 1 
 
 1. The following day, Caesar started for Bibracte ' to 
 provide for a supply of grain. 
 
 2. And the Helvetii, thinking^ he had changed his course 
 from fear,' attacked him in the rear.* 
 
1 8 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 2 
 
 I. When on the following day Caesar left the Helvetii 
 to provide for a supply of grain, they, either thinking^ that 
 Caesar had changed his course from fear,' — the more so 
 because he abstained from battle the day before, although 
 the mountain was held by Labienus, — or wishing to cut 
 him off from supplies, assailed him in the rear.* 
 X. 427; H. & B. 450; H. 418 ; G. H. 588, II, i ; G. 541, 3; B. 
 
 337; B. 182, I, a. 286, I, a. 
 
 2. because they thought. 592, 3, 3. dismayed by fright. 
 
 note; H. & B. S3S. 2, b, note; 4. 429, b ; H. & B. 406, 2; H. 
 
 485, 4; G. 390, note 6; B. 228. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV 
 1 
 
 1. Caesar, as soon as^ he had ordered the cavalry to 
 withstand the enemy's attack, had the whole army stationed'' 
 in battle array. 
 
 2. Meanwhile the Helvetii formed a phalanx near ' Caesar's 
 first line. 
 
 3. This they did the* more boldly because they had 
 driven back Caesar's cavalry. 
 
 2 
 I. Caesar at once had his baggage put^ in one spot and 
 the whole army stationed in line of battle, each legion in its 
 proper '' place. 2. Meanwhile the Helvetii, after they noticed 
 what Caesar was doing, formed a phalanx near ° the first line 
 of the Romans, the * more boldly because they had repulsed 
 the cavalry which had been sent to meet their first attack. 
 
 i. cf. 5:2. 5. 302, b; H. & B. 264, 3; H. 
 
 2. cf. 13 ; I. 503, 4; G. 318, 3; B. 244, 4, a. 
 
 3. cf. 21 : 2. Also cf. II: II : 2. 
 
 4. cf. 14: I. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK I 1 9 
 
 CHAPTER XXV 
 
 1 
 
 1. It was an advantage^ to the Romans that^ they were 
 on the higher ground. 
 
 2. The enemy, on the other hand,' could not defend 
 themselves very well because their shields were easily 
 pierced by the heavy javelins. 
 
 3. At last they fell back to a hill that was near by. 
 
 4. But, when they saw the Boii and Tulingi coming to 
 their assistance,'' they renewed the battle. 
 
 I. Since all hope of flight was removed, the Romans 
 fought fiercely, and, as they were on higher ground, could 
 easily pierce the enemy's shields with their heavy javelins 
 2. The enemy, on the other hand,' were greatly hampered 
 because their shields were pinned together with the javelins 
 which bent over when they pierced them. 3. But, when 
 they had fallen back exhausted, the Boii and Tulingi, seeing 
 that they were retreating, came to their assistance,^ and the 
 battle was renewed. 
 
 I. cf. 18 
 
 : 4. 
 
 3. autem. 599, b; H. & B. 624, 
 
 2. quod. 
 
 
 8, b; H. 677; G. 484, rem.; B. 
 343. c- 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI 
 
 1 
 
 1. After long and fierce fighting^ the Romans drove the 
 Helvetii back to the mountain. 
 
 2. But the Boii and Tulingi, late at night, after the 
 Romans got possession of their baggage and camp,' started 
 for the territory of the Lingones. 
 
20 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 3. Caesar waited to bury ^ the slain, but sent a dispatch 
 to the Lingones. 
 
 4. "Do not assist' the Boii and Tulingi with grain or* 
 other means." 
 
 5. "If you do assist^ them, I shall regard you in the 
 same light as I do the Helvetii." 
 
 I. So the Romans had to fight in two divisions. 2. But 
 after a long, sharp contest^ they drove the Helvetii back 
 to the mountain ; and with the Boii and Tulingi, who had 
 gathered about their baggage trains and wagons, they fought 
 till ^ they got possession both of the baggage and the camp. 
 3. Those who survived marched without stopping into the 
 territories of the Lingones. 4. Caesar, while he was wait- 
 ing to bury^ the slain, sent a dispatch to the Lingones. 
 5. " Do not assist ^ the Boii and Tulingi with grain or * other 
 means; if you do assist^ them, I shall regard you in the 
 same light as I do the Helvetii." 
 
 1. 208, d; H. & B. 287; H. 302, 4. neve. 450, note 5; H. & B. 
 6; G. 208, 2; B. 138, IV. 464; H. 561, 4; G. 444, 2; B. 
 
 2. sepelio, ire, ivi, sepultus. 282, d. 
 
 3. cf . 20 : 3. 5. cf . 1 4 : 6. 
 
 6. Use dum with the indicative. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVII 
 
 1. The Helvetii now humbly begged peace of Caesar.' 
 
 2. But he demanded from them ' hostages and their arms. 
 
 3. And in the night about six thousand men from fear" 
 of punishment iled ° from the camp. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK I 21 
 
 2 
 
 I. Deputies were now sent by the Helvetii, who in tears 
 begged peace of Caesar.^ 2. But in the night about six 
 thousand men, because he had demanded their arms, either 
 from fear ^ of punishment or a hope of safety, ran away.' 
 
 I. cf. II : 2, and see 396, a; H. & 2. cf. 23 : 3. 
 
 B. 393, c; H. 411, 4; G. 339, 3. Use the verb related to fuga. 
 I ; B. 178, a. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVIII 
 
 1. Caesar sent a dispatch requesting* that the fugitives 
 be brought back " to him, saying "^ that he would accept the 
 surrender of all the rest if they should give up' their arms. 
 
 2. He ordered^ the Helvetii to return to their own lands 
 so that the Germans might not seize * them. 
 
 3. And he required' the Allobroges to assist them with 
 
 grain. 
 
 2 
 
 I. But Caesar said that those through whose territories 
 they had gone he should regard as enemies unless they 
 brought back to him all those who had fled to them ; that 
 all the rest must give up their arms if they wished to be 
 friends. 2. Then, that no lands might be vacant for the 
 Germans to seize, he ordered ^ the Helvetii to return to 
 their homes ; and because the crops were lost he required' 
 the Allobroges to assist them with grain and other means. 
 
 i. cf . 9 : 4. Also compare this 3. accept the surrender of = would 
 
 whole sentence with the similar receive in surrender. 
 
 sentence in the text of the last 4. cf. 17: 3. 
 
 part of chapter XXVI. 5. iubeo. 
 
 2. 588, a; H. & B. 534, 2 ; H. 6. occupo. 
 
 642,4; G. 652; B. 316. 7. impero. See from the text what 
 
 mood follows iuheo and impero. 
 
22 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER XXIX 
 
 1. From* a list of the enemy, discovered after the battle, 
 it was found that 368,060 had left home. 
 
 2. Caesar says that only" 110,000 returned. 
 
 I. After this battle the Romans found'' a list of the 
 enemy, made out name by name. 2. This list showed 
 that the number of individuals " who started for this war 
 was about 368,000. 3. Caesar found by taking a census' 
 that only^ 110,000 returned home. 
 
 1. Use ex. 4. Use either the ablative absolute 
 
 2. modo, postpositive. or cum with the subj. 
 
 3. caput. 
 
 CHAPTER XXX 
 
 1. After the war with the Helvetii* was ended nearly all 
 the states of Gaul sent deputies to congratulate ^ Caesar. 
 
 2. They said the Helvetii had left home with the design 
 of obtaining ' control of all Gaul. 
 
 3. But that no one' might know what they should say,^ 
 they asked permission ° to hold a council in secret.' 
 
 r. Deputies from nearly all GauP congratulated Caesar 
 after the war with the Helvetii * was ended, saying that he 
 had done them all a favor ' in conquering the Helvetii, 
 who had wished to get control of all the Gallic states. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK I 23 
 
 2. With Caesar's approval they appointed a council in a 
 secret place, that no one ' might know what they should say.^ 
 
 1. The genitive is often required II, i, 2; G. jio; B. 267. Also 
 where the English requires some observe the tense of iudicassent 
 other preposition than " of." and mandatum est, and find in 
 
 2. to Caesar to congratulate him. chapter XXXI other verbs used 
 cf. 11: 5. in the same tense for the same 
 
 3. Use either the gerundive or uti reason. What tense did these 
 with the subjunctive. verbs have in the direct state- 
 
 4. tl^at no one = that not any one. ment? 
 
 310, a ; H. & B. 276, i ; H. 186 ; 6. cf. 7 : 3 and 4. 
 G. 315; B. 252, I. 7. secreto. 
 
 5. 484, b, c ; H. & B. 476 J H. 545, 8. to them all a favor (gratnm). 
 
 CHAPTER XXXI 
 
 1 
 
 1. The Haedui and Sequani contended many years for the 
 supremacy of Gaul. 
 
 2. At last the Sequani sent for the Germans, and they* 
 crossed the Rhine, and together with the Sequani crushed " 
 the Haedui. 
 
 3. Diviciacus alone refused to give^ hostages, and fled to 
 the senate at Rome * to ask help. 
 
 4. For Ariovistus, king of the Germans, having seized the 
 best part of Gaul, was now ruling cruelly. 
 
 5. And all the Gauls were afraid they would have to seek" 
 other dwelling-places. 
 
 6. So they secretly begged Caesar to defend them from the 
 
 cruelty of Ariovistus. 
 
 2 
 
 I. The Haedui held the leadership of one faction in 
 Gaul;* the Averni, of the other. 2. After these two fac- 
 tions had struggled many years for the supremacy, the 
 Averni and Sequani sent for the Germans. 3. These came 
 
24 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 and the Haedui were defeated ; then the Sequani compelled 
 the conquered Haedui to take an oath that they would be 
 under their perpetual sway. 4. Diviciacus alone refused to 
 take ^ the oath, and fled to the senate at Rome * to ask help. 
 5. But Ariovistus, king of the Germans, after he had settled 
 in Gaul, drove away many of the victorious Sequani even 
 from the best part of their territory, and was ruling with a 
 high hand. 6. And now all the Gauls were afraid they 
 would have to move ° away from their settlements unless 
 Caesar with his army should keep a greater horde of Germans 
 from crossing ' the Rhine. 
 
 1. and they = qui. 5. lest other dwelling-places would 
 
 2. frango. ' be for them to be sought, cf. 
 
 3. 558, b ; H. & B. 502, 3, b ; H. II : 20 : i . Use sedes for 
 568, 8 ; G. 549 ; B. 295, 3. " dwelling-places." 
 
 4. 428, j ; n. & B. 450, c; H. 418, 6. cf. 30: i. 
 }; G. 337, 6; B. 182, 2, b. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXII 
 
 1. The Sequani, who had received Ariovistus within their 
 territories, could not make the same ' complaint ^ as ° the rest. 
 
 2. And so they had to endure his cruelty, for there was 
 
 no chance of escape.* 
 
 2 
 
 I. The Sequani, whose fate was very grievous, yet did 
 not dare to make the same ^ complaint ^ as ° the rest, for the 
 reason that they themselves had received Ariovistus within 
 their territories. 2. And so they now had to endure the 
 cruelty of Ariovistus, whereas^ to the rest an opportunity of 
 flight was afforded. 
 
 1. 390, c ; H. & B. 396, 2 ; H. 409, 3. quod. 308, 8 ; G. 642, 1. 
 i; G. 333; B. 176, 2, b. 4. fuga. 
 
 2. make complaint = queror. 5. whereas — vero. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK I 25 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIII 
 1 
 
 1. Having learned these facts, Caesar promised that he 
 would look into the matter. 
 
 2. There were many reasons why he should not wish the 
 Germans to come into Gaul. 
 
 3. Moreover, Ariovistus had not refrained personally^ 
 from assuming'' great arrogance. 
 
 4. This Caesar thought was not to be tolerated. ° 
 
 I. On learning these facts, Caesar thought he must dis- 
 miss the council and take up the cause of his friends, who 
 were held in servitude by the Germans. 2. Especially since 
 the Germans, who were uncivilized foreigners, were getting 
 accustomed to cross the Rhine. 3. Moreover, Ariovistus 
 had not refrained personally' from assuming^ great arrogance 
 after he had received hostages from the Haedui. 
 
 I. personally = ipse. 298, c; H. 2. 558; H. & B. 502, 3, b ; H. 595, 
 & B jro; H. 509; G. 311 ; B. 2; G. 554; B. 295, 3, a. 
 
 24' ^. to be tolerated = feifendus. 
 
 3. to be tolerated = feifendus. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIV 
 
 1 
 
 1 . Therefore Caesar thought it best to hold ' a conference ' 
 with Ariovistus. 
 
 2. But Ariovistus did not have the will or the courage^ to 
 come to a conference. 
 
 3. And the* more so* because he thought that neither 
 Caesar nor the Roman people in general had any * business 
 
 in Gaul. 
 
26 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 2 
 I. But, when Caesar asked permission to hold a conference 
 with Ariovistus, he made a haughty reply. 2. "If I needed 
 anything from you, I would have come to you ; if you wish 
 anything from me, you ought to come to me. 3. But neither 
 you nor the Roman people, anyway, have any° business in 
 that part of Gaul which I have conquered in war." 
 
 1. Use the verb only, related to 4. more so = magis. 
 colloquium. 5. 311 ; H. & B. 276, 7; H. 513 ; 
 
 2. neither wished nor dared. G. 317 ; B. 252, 4. 
 
 3. cf. 14: I. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXV 
 
 1 
 
 1. Ariovistus, though^ invited, refused to confer with 
 Caesar about the common interest. 
 
 2. Therefore Caesar made the following ^ demands of him. 
 
 3. " Do not lead ^ any more Germans across the Rhine." 
 
 4. " Return the hostages you have from the Haedui, and 
 do not make war upon them nor* upon their allies." 
 
 5. "If you do so, I and the Roman people will have last- 
 ing friendship with you." 
 
 2 
 
 I. Since Ariovistus was reluctant to confer with Caesar, 
 he demanded of him that he should keep a greater body of 
 Germans from crossing the Rhine, and should not* prevent 
 the Sequani from returning^ the hostages which they had 
 wrongfully received from the Haedui, intimating ' that, if he 
 did not obtain his request, he would bring war upon the 
 Germans in behalf of the Haedui. 
 
 1. Use no word for " though." a consonant changed to neu. 
 
 2. haec. cf. 32 : i. cf. 26 : 4. 
 
 3. cf. 20 : 3. 5. cf. 33 : 2. 
 
 4. For "and not" or "nor" in 6. cf . 9 : 4. 
 prohibitions use neve, before 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK I 2/ 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVI 
 1 
 
 1. To^ Caesar's demands^ Ariovistus made a haughty 
 reply.' 
 
 2. "The Roman people rule those whom they conquer as 
 they wish." 
 
 3. " Therefore they * ought not to dictate how I shall rule ° 
 the Haedui, who are tributary to me by right of war." 
 
 4. " But, if ° you meet us-, you will understand what power 
 the Germans have^ in valor." 
 
 I. To^ Caesar's demands^ Ariovistus haughtily replied 
 that he was ruling the Haedui, who were tributary to him by 
 the right of war, to suit' his own will; that Caesar^ ought 
 not to dictate how he should rule ^ those whom the Germans 
 had defeated in battle. 2. But, if* he should meet the 
 Germans in arms, he would contend at* his own peril. 
 
 1. to = in reply to = ad. H. & B. 537, b; H. 649, II; 
 
 2. Use the noun related to postulo. G. 467 ; B. 300. 
 
 3. replied haughtily (insolenter). ' 6. but if = quod si. 
 
 4. eos oportet. 388, c ; H. & B. 7. to suit = ad. 
 
 585, 2; H. 414; G. 535, 2; B. 8. at, accompanied by = cum. of. 
 330. quanto cum peiiculo, in the text 
 
 5. have power = possum. 574 ; of chapter XVII. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVII 
 1 
 
 1. Meanwhile Caesar learned that the German Harudes 
 were laying waste the lands of the Haedui. 
 
 2. The Suevi, moreover, who had recently encamped near 
 the Rhine, were trying to cross the river to join with Ariovistus. 
 
 3. And these new forces^ could not^ easily be resisted. 
 
28 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 4. Therefore Caesar thought he must push on towards them 
 
 with all possible speed. 
 
 2 
 
 I. Meanwhile it was reported that the German Harudes 
 
 were laying waste the lands of the Haedui, and that the 
 
 Suevi were trying to cross the Rhine near the borders of 
 
 the Treveri. 2. Therefore Caesar pushed on towards them 
 
 with the utmost speed, because he knew that, if these new 
 
 forces should cross the river, the old troops of Ariovistus 
 
 would join them, and they^ could not^ be easily resisted. 
 
 1. 372 ; H. & B. 290, a, I; H. 426, 2. 328, a; H. & B. 307, 3, a; H. 
 3; G. 217; B. 187, II, b. 656, 4; G. 480; B. 341, d. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVIII 
 
 1 
 
 1. Vesontio, a large town of the Sequani, was encircled 
 by a river and a hill of great height.^ 
 
 2. Besides, it contained a great supply of things which 
 were of use ^ for war. 
 
 3. Therefore Caesar took great precaution that Ariovistus 
 might not seize this town. 
 
 4. For he feared ' that if he should do so the war would 
 
 be prolonged. 
 
 2 
 
 I. Caesar took great precaution that Ariovistus might 
 not seize Vesontio, a large town of the Sequani. 2. For he 
 feared that, if the large store of military supplies ■* which 
 this town contained should fall into his hands,^ the war 
 would be prolonged, the' more so because the town was 
 encircled by a river and a hill of great height. 
 
 1. cf. 18: I. 4. things which were of use for 
 
 2. cf. 18 : 4. war. 
 
 3. 564 ; H. & B. 502, 4 ; H. 567 ; 5. come into his power (potestas). 
 G. ssc 2 ; B. 296, 2. 6. cf. 34 : 3 and 4. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK I 29 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIX 
 
 1 
 
 1 . Caesar had to delay a few days near Vesontio for ^ 
 grain. 
 
 2. While ^ the traders were setting forth the great size 
 and valor of the Germans, the feelings of the soldiers were 
 exceedingly disturbed. 
 
 3. Some even asked permission to go^ home; others 
 lamented their fate and sealed their wills. 
 
 4. But, that they might not appear to fear the enemy, one 
 assigned one reason, another another.* 
 
 2 
 
 I. The traders, from whom Caesar was buying grain near 
 Vesontio, declared that the Germans were of so great size 
 and valor that they had not been able to bear even the 
 fierce expression* of their eyes. 2. And these remarks ° so 
 wrought upon the feelings of the soldiers that some even 
 asked permission to go home. 3. While ^ others were 
 lamenting their fate and sealing their wills, all were gradu- 
 ally getting disturbed. 4. Some said they feared one thing, 
 and others another.* 
 
 1. causa, cf. 18 : 2. 4. 315, c; H. & B. 265 ; H. 516, 
 
 2. 556; H. & B. 559; H. 533, 4; i ; G. 319; B. 253, ■^. 
 
 G. 229, rem. ; B. 293. 5. fierce expression = acies. 
 
 3. cf . 7 : 3 and 4. 6. and these remarks = quae voces. 
 
 cf. II: 15: 3. 
 
 CHAPTER XL 
 1 
 
 1. Caesar, noticing the f right ^ of the soldiers, made a 
 vigorous accusation against the centurions. 
 
 2. " I at least am convinced that Ariovistus does not wish 
 nor dare to meet us." 
 
30 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 3. " But if, impelled by a rash frenzy, he should bring 
 on ^ war, why pray should you fear ? " 
 
 4. " If you have firmness, you will easily conquer this army, 
 and deserve no less praise than your ancestors, who quelled ^ 
 the insurrection of slaves." * 
 
 .5. " Do not be alarmed ^ by the unsuccessful battle of the 
 Gauls, for Ariovistus cannot capture our army by the device 
 with which* he defeated them." 
 
 6. " But, that I may know as soon as possible whether ' 
 you fear the narrow roads or the enemy, I will order the 
 camp to be moved." 
 
 2 
 
 I. But Caesar was convinced that Ariovistus did not dare 
 to meet him in arms. 2. And he censured the centurions 
 for thinking that they must fear the enemy when he himself 
 was in command of the army. 3. He exhorted them to be 
 no less brave than their ancestors, who had suppressed the 
 insurrection of slaves ; and not * to be alarmed by the unsuc- 
 cessful battle of the Gauls, saying that if they had firmness 
 Ariovistus could not capture his army by the device with 
 which ° he defeated them after they had given up expecta- 
 tion of fighting. 4. But, that he might know whether '' the 
 soldiers would bear the standards when he gave the order, 
 or hesitate from fear,' he would order the camp to be 
 moved. 
 
 i. Use the noun related to per- 5. cf. 20 : 3. 
 
 turbo. 6. cf. 12 : 4. 
 
 2. 516, b, c; H.& B. 580; H. 576, 7. 335, d; H. & B. 2345 H. 380; 
 I ; G. 596, I ; B. 303. G. 458 ; B. 300, 4. 
 
 3. sedo, are, etc. 8. cf. 35 : 4. 
 
 4. Use adjective. 343, a; H. & B. 9. from fear = propter timorem or 
 208, 2; H. 348; G. 189, 17; B. timore perterritus. cf. 23: 3. 
 354, 4- 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK I 3 1 
 
 CHAPTER XLI 
 
 1. In his speech Caesar had expressed a very compli- 
 mentary opinion of the tenth legion. 
 
 2. And the other legions now apologized to Caesar 
 because they had seemed to fear. 
 
 3. By this apology they showed Caesar that a sense of 
 
 honor and duty^ belonged not alone to the tenth legion^ 
 
 but to them' also. 
 
 2 
 
 I . After the speech of Caesar, in which he had expressed 
 a very excellent opinion of the tenth legion, the other legions 
 wished to show Caesar that the eagerness for carrying on 
 the war belonged no less to them" than to the tenth legion.^ 
 2. So they apologized to him for having seemed to lose con- 
 fidence in* his judgment. 3. He accepted their apology and 
 started again after Ariovistus by the route which Diviciacus 
 had examined. 
 
 1. a sense of honor and duty =: 3. suus. 302, a ; H. & B. 339, a ; 
 pudor atque officium. H. 439, 4 ; G. 366, 3 ; B. 86, i. 
 
 2. belonged to = was of. 343, b ; 4. to lose confidence in = de . . . 
 H. & B. 340; H. 439; G. 366; despeio. 
 
 B. 198, 3. 
 
 CHAPTER XLII 
 1 
 
 1. Ariovistus learned that Caesar was approaching, and 
 now asked permission^ to confer with him without any^ 
 infantry. 
 
 2. But, that there might be no' danger, Caesar wished to 
 have with him cavalry that * he could rely on in case of any ' 
 necessity. 
 
32 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 3. And so he put his tenth legion on horses, which he 
 took from the Gauls, so that there was no* danger of an 
 ambuscade. 
 
 2 
 
 I. Ariovistus, learning that Caesar was approaching, now 
 promised of his own accord to come to a conference, if each 
 should be permitted, by the other's consent, to bring his 
 cavalry without any^ infantry, that there might be no^ risk 
 of treachery. 2. And so Caesar, wishing to have with him 
 cavalry in whom,^ in case of any' necessity, he might put 
 the utmost confidence, took the horses from the Gauls and 
 placed thereon the soldiers of the tenth legion, so that there 
 was no° danger. 
 
 1. that it be allowed (licet) him. 4. 367 ; H. & B. 362 ; H. 426 ; G. 
 cf . 7 : 3 and 4. 346, 2 ; B. 187, II, a. 
 
 2. cf. 34 : 5. 5. 538 ; H. & B. 521, 2 ; H. 570 ; 
 
 3. cf. 30 : 4. G.' 543, 4 ; B. 284. 
 
 CHAPTER XLIII 
 
 1 
 
 1. In the conference, Caesar first mentioned the many 
 favors of himself ' and the Roman people towards Ariovistus.'' 
 
 2. Then he explained that the Haedui, who were the 
 friends of the Roman people, had held the leadership of 
 Gaul before Ariovistus crossed the Rhine. 
 
 3. Therefore, he continued,' what the allies of the Roman 
 
 people had had before, this he could not allow to be taken 
 
 from them.* 
 
 2 
 
 I. It was the habit of Caesar to wish that his enemies 
 
 should see clearly the justice of his demands. 2. But what 
 
 he had demanded, this he allowed no one to disregard. 
 
 3. And so in the conference, before he made the demand 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK 1 33 
 
 that Ariovistus should not lead any more Germans across 
 the Rhine, he showed how generously gifts had been bestowed 
 upon him by his own and the senate's kindness. 4. He also 
 thought the Haedui, who had been friends of the Roman 
 people, even before the Germans came there, had just ground 
 for claiming his friendship now. 
 
 1. cf. 41 : 3. stniction of the sentence that 
 
 2. 348, c ; H. & B. 354, a ; H. 440, it is a continuation of the indi- 
 2, note I ; G. 363, 2, rem. i ; rect discourse, cf. 13 : 4. 
 
 B. 200, I. 4. 381 ; H. & B. 371 ; H. 427 ; G. 
 
 3. Do not use a word for "con- 345; B. 188, d. 
 tinued," but show by the con- 
 
 CHAPTER XLIV 
 
 1. To the demands of Caesar, Ariovistus replied that he 
 had not come into Gaul before he was sent for. 
 
 2. And he complained because the friendship of the 
 Roman people, which he had sought for the purpose of 
 strengthening himself, was an injury^ to him. 
 
 3. And so he was willing to break off this friendship, 
 unless they ceased ^ to interfere in his right on a pretense 
 of friendship.' 
 
 4. Besides, he thought if he should kill Caesar in battle 
 he would procure the favor of the chief men at Rome. 
 
 I. Ariovistus had sought the friendship of the Roman 
 people because he thought it would be an honor ^ and a help 
 to him. 2. But, when he saw that through their influence 
 the taxes were being kept back, and that Caesar objected 
 
34 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 to his bringing* Germans into Gaul, he rejected Caesar's 
 friendship, saying" that he did not bring the Germans into 
 Gaul before they asked him to come there. 3. Therefore,* 
 he was most unjust in coming into his possessions on a pre- 
 tense of friendship,^ and, unless he ceased^ to interfere in 
 his right, he could not treat him as a friend. 
 
 1. cf. 18: 4. 4. cf. 31: 3. 
 
 2. desists. 5. cf. 43 : 3. 
 
 3. 419; H. &B. 421; H. 489; G. 
 410; B. 227. 
 
 CHAPTER XLV 
 
 1 
 
 1. Caesar thought Gaul belonged to him^ rather than to 
 Ariovistus,-' and that he ^ was the one ^ who was acting unj ustly. 
 
 2. And so he did not cease from his demand,^ because 
 Gaul, which the Roman senate had allowed to enjoy its own 
 laws, deserved * to be free. 
 
 I. Caesar did not cease from his demand,' because he 
 thought ° Gaul, having been conquered in war, belonged to 
 him^ rather than to Ariovistus.^ 2. But, if either^ was act- 
 ing unjustly, Ariovistus was the one,^ because Gaul, upon 
 which the Roman people did not lay tribute, ought* not to 
 be tributary to Ariovistus. 
 
 1. cf. 41 : 2 and 3. 4. Show by the mood that Caesar 
 
 2. For " he," in emphatic contrast mentioned this fact when talk- 
 to Caesar, use ille ; for " the ing with Ariovistus. cf. 6 : 2. 
 one," as the antecedent to the 5. cf. 23 : ■^. 
 
 following relative, use is. cf. 6. alteruter. 
 
 Ill : 22 : 2. 7. Use ille, as the one referred to 
 
 3. 402; H. & B. 408, 3; H. 462; with emphasis, cf. Ill: 22: 4. 
 G. 390, 2 ; B. 214, 2. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK I 35 
 
 CHAPTER XLVI 
 
 1. Meanwhile the cavalry of Ariovistus attacked Caesar's 
 soldiers with stones and javelins. 
 
 2. And this action brought upon the whole army great 
 eagerness for a fight. ^ 
 
 3. But that no one ^ might say that Caesar attacked the 
 enemy during the conference, he restrained' his men from 
 battle. 
 
 4. And no one * hurled back upon the enemy any ° weapon 
 at all.^ 
 
 2 
 
 I. While Caesar and Ariovistus were talking together, the 
 cavalry of Ariovistus threw stones and javelins upon Caesar's 
 soldiers, and this act broke off the conference. 2. But that 
 no one might say that Caesar commenced a battle, no one 
 threw back any weapon, and no one * made any attack at all 
 upon the enemy, although the arrogance of Ariovistus had 
 inspired in the army a strong desire to fight.^ 
 
 1. 504; H. & B. 612, I ; H. 6z6; 4. cf. 20: i. 
 
 G. 428 ; B. 338, I, a. 5. cf. nllo in the text. 311 ; H. & 
 
 2. Observe the use of quod in the B. 276, 7 ; H. 513 ; G. 317 ; B. 
 text and cf. 30 : 4. 252, 4. 
 
 3. abstineo. 
 
 CHAPTER XLVII 
 
 1 
 
 1 . Two days^ later Ariovistus wished to finish those matters 
 which they had begun to treat about. 
 
 2. But Caesar did not dare to expose himself or some one 
 of his lieutenants to him a second time. 
 
36 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 3. For Ariovistus, a man of great arrogance and boldness, 
 could not be restrained from using deceit.^ 
 
 4. Even Procillus and Metius, whom Caesar sent to him as 
 messengers, he treated 'as * spies. ^ 
 
 I. Although those matters which they had begun to treat 
 about two days ' before were not finished, yet Caesar was 
 unwilling to appoint a conference a second time. 2. And 
 the more so because he thought that Ariovistus was a man of 
 such arrogance and deceit that he could not put the least con- 
 fidence^ in him. 3. And this distrust' was well grounded,' 
 for he treated as spies even the messengers whom Caesar 
 afterwards sent to him, and restrained them from speaking. 
 
 1. 414 ; H. & B. 424; H. 479 ; G. 5. Form a noun from speculandi. 
 403; B. 223. 6. Find a similar construction in 
 
 2. dolus. the text of chapter XLII. 
 
 3. habeo. 7. diffidentia. 
 
 4. pro. 8. iustus. 
 
 CHAPTER XLVIII 
 
 1. Caesar now drew up his forces, that Ariovistus might 
 have a chance to fight. 
 
 2. But Ariovistus wished to cut Caesar off from his supplies 
 without any battle. 
 
 3. In cavalry engagements one ^ footman used to accom- 
 pany ^ each ^ horseman. 
 
 2 
 
 I. After Ariovistus moved his camp, Caesar drew up his 
 forces to give him a chance to fight. 2. But Ariovistus 
 thought it safer to cut Caesar off from his supplies by a 
 cavalry skirmish. 3. In cavalry engagements the Germans 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK I 37 
 
 used to select foot-soldiers, one apiece,^ who, in case any 
 one was wounded,* would run " to his assistance. 
 
 1. 136; H. & B. 133; H. 164, i; versor. 470; H. & B. 484; H. 
 G. 97; B. 78, c. 534, 3 ; G. 231 ; B. 260, 2. 
 
 2. to accompany = to act with = 3. 518, b ; H. & B. 579 ; H. 578, i ; 
 
 G. 595 ; B. 302, 3. 
 
 CHAPTER XLIX 
 1 
 
 1. Caesar understood that he was being kept off from 
 supplies too long. 
 
 2. And so he fortified a camp less' than a mile beyond 
 the Germans. 
 
 3. While the camp was being fortified,'' the first and second 
 lines warded off the enemy. 
 
 2 
 
 I. As soon as* Caesar saw that he was being kept from 
 supplies too long, he began to intrench a camp less^ than a 
 mile beyond the Germans. 2. Meanwhile he kept the first 
 and second lines drawn up so as to ward off the Germans, who 
 were trying to keep the third line from the intrenchment. 
 
 1. 407, c; H. & B. 416, d; H. 471, 2. cf. 39: 2. 
 
 4; G. 296, 4; B. 217, 3. 3. as soon as = ubi. 
 
 CHAPTER L 
 -1 
 
 1 . The next day the enemy did not fight, although Caesar 
 gave them a chance. 
 
 2. And so Caesar did not know'^ whether" Ariovistus 
 wished to contend in battle or not. 
 
 3. But the matrons had declared by divination that the 
 Germans must not contend before the new moon. 
 
38 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 I. Since the enemy did not go forward when Caesar gave 
 them a chance to fight, he did not know ^ whether " Ariovistus 
 would contend in battle the next day or not. 2. But some 
 captives informed him that Ariovistus would not contend 
 before the new moon, for the matrons had declared that it 
 was not the divine will that he should do this. 
 
 I. nescio. 2. cf. 40 : 7. 
 
 CHAPTER LI 
 1 
 
 1 . The next day, Caesar, using the auxiliaries for ^ a show, 
 led the legionary soldiers right up to the enemy's camp. 
 
 2. And they at last, from necessity, advanced to battle by 
 tribes, because no hope was left in flight. 
 
 I. The day after this, Caesar, having placed the auxil- 
 iaries in sight of the enemy for ^ a show, personally led the 
 triple line of legionary soldiers right up to the enemy's 
 camp. 2. And when at last the enemy, from necessity, 
 advanced to battle by tribes, the women, in tears, implored 
 the men ' to keep them from being delivered into servitude. 
 I. for = to make = ad. 2. vir. Why not homo .' 
 
 CHAPTER LII 
 1 
 
 1. Caesar placed one^ lieutenant over each^ legion, and 
 gave the order to join battle. 
 
 2. Since every one had the lieutenants as witnesses of 
 his'' valor, the Romans fought fiercely. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK I 39 
 
 3. They even sprang upon the enemy's phalanx, and, 
 pulling aside the. shields, fought hand to hand. 
 
 2 
 I. After Caesar placed a."- lieutenant over each^ legion, 
 every Roman had a lieutenant, and every German the 
 women, as witnesses of his ^ valor, and the two armies 
 rushed together fiercely. 2. When the Germans had formed 
 their phalanx so as to sustain the attack, the Romans leaped 
 upon the enemy's phalanxes and inflicted wounds by a down- 
 ward stroke.^ 3. Thus the enemy's left was routed, and 
 Crassus sent the third line to beat back^ their right. 
 
 I. cf. 48: I. 
 
 3. desupei. 
 
 2. cf. II : 11: 2. 
 
 4. repello. 
 
 
 CHAPTER LIII 
 
 1 
 
 1. The Romans did not cease to fight spiritedly tilP they 
 had routed the enemy. 
 
 2. Ariovistus escaped; but Caesar, while in pursuit,^ fell in 
 with the guards who were dragging away his friend Procillus. 
 
 3. And nothing* gave Caesar more pleasure than the 
 rescue^ of his friend. 
 
 4. For he did not know whether his envoys had been put 
 to death or reserved for another time. 
 
 I. After fierce fighting the Germans were put to flight, 
 and the Roman cavalry did not cease to follow till ^ they had 
 killed nearly all of them. 2. And the flight of Ariovistus 
 took nothing from Caesar's rejoicing, because Procillus and 
 Metius, whom Ariovistus had put in chains before the battle. 
 
40 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 were restored to him. 3. And it is difficult to say° whether 
 the victory itself, which indeed ended the war, or the rescue * 
 of his envoys, brought Caesar the greater pleasure. 
 
 I. not . . till = not sooner ... 4. Use salus. 
 
 than. 5. 510; H. &B. 619; H. 635; G. 
 .4. pursuing. 436 ; B. 340, 2. 
 
 3. cf. 20: I. 
 
BOOK SECOND 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 I. Caesar came into' hither Gaul. 2. And all the Gauls 
 were afraid he would lead ^ an army against them. 3. The 
 Belgae, who" were a third part* of Gaul, were conspiring 
 against the Roman people. 4. In^ Gaul more powerful men 
 usually usurped the sovereign power. 
 
 1. 220, c; H. & B. 381, a; H. 490, 3. 306; H. & B. 326, 1 ; H. 396, 
 3 ; G. 418; B. 143. 2 ; G. 614, 3, b; B. 250, 3. 
 
 2. 564; H. & B. SQ2, 4; H. 567; 4. 284 ; H. & B. 318; H. 393; G. 
 G. 550, 2; B. 296, 2. 211 ; B. 168. 
 
 CHAPTER II 
 
 I. Caesar, when he had enrolled' two new legions, sent 
 Pedius, his lieutenant, into the interior of^ Gaul. 2. The 
 Belgae, who were neighbors to the Senones, were gathering 
 their forces into one place. 3. Caesar, having been informed 
 of this, started towards them with his army. 4. And he 
 did not* hesitate about coming^ into the territory of the 
 Belgae. 
 
 i. 546; H. & B. 524; H. 600, II; 4. And not = neque. 328, a; H. 
 G. 579, II, a; B. 288, B. & B. 307, 3, a; H. 656, 4; O. 
 
 2. 293; H. & B. 244; H. 497, 4; 480; B. 341, d. 
 
 G. 291, rem. 2; B. 241, i. 5. but that he should come. 558, 
 
 3. of = concerning = de. a; H. & B. 521, 3, b; H. 595, 
 
 I ; G. 555 ; B. 298. 
 41 
 
42 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 
 I. Caesar arrived there ^ in about fifteen days, and found 
 that the Gauls had conspired^ against him. 2. The Remi 
 intrusted themselves to Caesar's protection, and did not " join 
 with the Belgae. 3. But they had not been able to keep 
 even' their neighbors and kinsmen from aiding^ the Belgae. 
 
 ±. eo = to that place, there ; quo 3. cf. z : 4. 
 
 = to what place, where. 321, 4. not . . . ev.en = ne . . . quidem. 
 
 a; H. & B. 284, 10; H. 307, 322, f; H. & B. 302; H. 677; 
 
 4; G. 611, I ; B. 140. G. 448, 2; B. 347, I. 
 
 2. 459; H. & B. 589; H. 613; G. 5. cf. 2 : 5. 
 
 527; B- 331. I- 
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 
 I. The Belgae long ago settled in Gaul. 2. Caesar said 
 that the Belgae, who long ago settled in Gaul, were assum- 
 ing great arrogance. 3. What states among the Belgae 
 were the most ^ powerful by reason of valor ^ and number of 
 men ? 4. From the Haedui, who were friends of the Roman 
 people, Caesar learned what states were" the most powerful. 
 J. The Bellovaci, who were the most powerful among the 
 Belgae, claimed control of the whole war. 
 
 I. were able the most. 390, c; H. 2. 404 ; H. & B. 444; H. 475 ; G. 
 & B. 387, 3 ; H. 409, I ; G. 334, 408 ; B. 219. 
 
 I ; B. 176, 3, a. 3. 574; H. & B. 537, b; H. 649, 
 
 II; G. 467; B. 300. 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 I. It was Caesar's ^ interest that the forces of the Belgae 
 should not be gathered into one place. 2. So, having 
 exhorted^ Diviciacus, he shows how' the forces of the 
 Belgae may be kept apart. 3. But the Belgae, having 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK II 43 
 
 collected ^ their forces into one place, had now started in the 
 direction of Caesar. 4. Then Caesar, having learned * that 
 the forces of the Belgae were hastening toward him, led his 
 army across the Aisne. 5. Having done this, he pitched 
 his camp there. 
 
 1. 355; H. & B. 34S ; H. 449, 1 ; 3, quo modo. cf. 4: 3. 
 
 G. 381 ; B. 211, I. 4. 493, 2 ; H. & B. 602, i ; H. 640, 
 
 2. 493, I ; H. & B. 602, a ; H. 518, 4; G. 410, rem. i ; B. 356, 2, b 
 3 ; G. 220 ; B. 356, 2, a. and c. 
 
 CHAPTER VI . 
 
 I. The Belgae, having attacked Bibrax with great vio- 
 lence,-' easily cleared the wall of defenders." 2. For they 
 placed so great a number around all the fortifications ' that 
 all who were standing on the wall were dislodged.'' 3. Then 
 Iccius, who was in command of the town,' was afraid that 
 they could * not hold out longer. 4. And so a message was 
 quickly sent to Caesar, saying ° that they were withstanding 
 the siege with the greatest difficulty. 
 
 ~ - - 2; 
 
 1. 412 ; H. & B. 445, 3 ; H. 473, 3 ; 
 
 4. depello. 537; H 
 
 [. & B. 52 
 
 G. 399; B. 220, I. 
 
 H. 570 ; G. 552 ; 
 
 B. 284. 
 
 2. 401 ; H. & B. 408, 3 ; H. 462 ; 
 
 5. cf. I : 2. 
 
 
 G. 390, 2 ; B. 214, I, b. 
 
 6. cf. 1 : 9 : 4. 
 
 
 3. 370 f H.&B. 376; H. 429; G. 
 
 
 
 347 ; B. 187, III. 
 
 
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 
 I. Archers and slingers were sent by Caesar as a relief^ 
 to the Remi.^ 2. Those whom" Iccius employed as messen- 
 gers guided them to the town. 3. And on their' arrival, 
 the enemy stopped besieging* the town. 4. And, after 
 
44 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 setting fire° to the villages of the Remi, they pushed on 
 towards Caesar's camp, which was about eight miles" away. 
 
 1. 382, I ; H. & B. 360, b ; H. 433 ; 4. made an end of besieging. 503, 
 G. 356; B. 191, 2. 504; -H. & B. 610, 612 ; H. 623, 
 
 2. 410; H. & B. 429; H. 477; G. 626; G. 427, 428; B. 338, I, a, 
 407; B. 218, I. and 339, i. 
 
 3. And on iAeira.rnv3.l = on w/iose 5. cf. 5 : 4. 
 
 arrival, cf. 15: 3. 6. 425; H. & B. 387; H. 417; G. 
 
 33S; B. 181. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 
 I. Caesar refrained from battle* for a little while on 
 account of the enemy's high reputation for valor.^ 2. In a 
 few days, however, he found by skirmishes with the cavalry " 
 that his men were not inferior in courage. 3. There was 
 a hill which extended over so much ' space ^ that it was " by 
 nature suitable for marshaling an army. 4. There he formed 
 his line of battle, after digging ' a ditch on both sides of the 
 hill that his men might not be surrounded.' 
 
 1. cf. 6:2. 5. 346, 3; H. & B. 346; H. 442; 
 
 2. 348 ; H. & B. 354 ; H. 440, 2 ; G. 369 ; B. 201, 2. 
 G. 363, 2, I ; B. 200. 6. cf. 6 : 4. 
 
 3. TheLatinsometimesusesanad- 7. cf. 5: 4. 
 
 jective where we use a noun with 8. 531; H. & B. 502, 2; H. 568; 
 a preposition. 343, a ; B. 354, 4. G. 545, 3 ; B. 282. 
 
 4. cf . 7:6. 
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 
 I. Caesar had his men ready in arms so as to attack the 
 enemy if they should cross the marsh. 2. Since neither 
 dared ^ to make an attack, the enemy led their troops back 
 to the river. 3. The bridge which was over^ this river was 
 of great service ° to Caesar. 4. This the Belgae wished to 
 destroy, so that Caesar might be kept from supplies.* 
 
 1. 549; H. & B. 526 ; H. 598 ; G. 586 ; B. 286, 2. 3. cf. 7 : 1. 
 
 2. Use in. 4. cf. 6 : 2. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK II 45 
 
 CHAPTER X 
 
 I. When Caesar was informed^ of the enemy's design, 
 he quickly led his forces across the bridge. 2. And, having 
 attacked ^ the enemy while they were attempting ' to cross the 
 river, he killed so great a number that the rest gave up hope.* 
 
 3. Since grain was now failing, they decided that it was best 
 to contend in their own territories and use home supplies. 
 
 4. And the Bellovaci ^ could not be persuaded ^ to remain 
 longer, because Diviciacus was approaching their territory. 
 
 1. cf. 2 : 1 . 4. despero. cf . 6 : 4. 
 
 2. cf.,,S: 2. 5. 372 ; H. & B. 364, 2 ; H. 426, 
 
 3. 489; H. & B. 600, i; H. 640; 3; G. 346, rem. I ; B. 187, II, b. 
 G. 282 ; B. 536, 2. 
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 
 I. Every one was in such a hurry ^ to get for himself^ the 
 first place on the march that the army went out of camp 
 with great confusion. 2. When Caesar learned that the 
 enemy were going away, he sent his cavalry to pursue " them. 
 
 3. Although* they attacked the rear line and killed a great 
 number of them, the rest bravely sustained their attack. 
 
 4. But those in front,^ hearing the clamor,* and being' 
 restrained by no command, began to flee. 
 
 1. hurried so much (adeo) ; to get 3. 531, 2 ; H. & B. 502, 2; H. 568 ; 
 (peto). G. 630 ; B. 282, 2. cf. qui de- 
 
 2. When quisque and any form of duceret, in text of chapter II. 
 the reflexive (pronoun or adjec- 4. 549 ; H. & B. 526 ; H. 598 ; G. 
 tive) are used in the same clause, 586; B. 309, 3. 
 
 the reflexive is placed imme- 5. priores. 288 ; H. & B. 249 ; H. 
 diately before quisque. Seethe 494; G. 204, i; B. 236, i. 
 
 text for the use and position 6. cf. 5 : 4. 
 
 of the words. 7- ^""^ being = because they were. 
 
46 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER XII 
 
 r. While the enemy were still fleeing, Caesar pushed on 
 to Noviodunum. 2. And before' the Suessiones came to 
 the town, he had procured all those things which were of 
 use ^ for carrying on a siege.' 3. When they came on the 
 next liight and* saw the agger and the towers, they were 
 greatly alarmed. 4. And so they quickly sent ambassadors 
 about a surrender before ' the town should be captured. 
 
 1. Piiusquam, before or sooner t^an, 2. cf . 7 ; i. 
 
 is followed by the indicative 3. 506; H. & B. 612, III ; H.628; 
 
 when it merely indicates that ' G. 432 ; B. 338, 3. 
 
 one act or event takes place 4. Use que. When que connects 
 
 sooner than another ; the sub- two words, it is attached to the 
 
 junctive, when it implies pur- second ; when two clauses or 
 
 pose, prevention, preference, phrases, to the first word of the 
 
 etc. second clause or phrase. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII 
 
 I. Caesar received the foremost men of the state as' hos- 
 tages, and did not^ put to death the people. 2. Then he 
 started* for the territories of the Bellovaci, who, having 
 learned * that Caesar was coming, gathered ' in the town of 
 Bratuspantium. 3. Before he got near the town, the older" 
 men, coming ' out of the town, put * the state under his pro- 
 tection, and did not contend in arms. 4. Also the women 
 and children extended their hands from the wall, and begged 
 peace of Caesar.^ 
 
 I. Use no word for " as." 6. older men = maiores natu. 
 A cf. 2 : 4. 131, c. 
 
 3. proflciscor. 7. cf. 5 : 2. 
 
 4. cf. 5:4. 8. For word, see text, chapter III. 
 
 5. Use confers with the reflexive 9. 396, a; H.&B. 393,0; H. 411, 
 pronoun. 4; G. 339, rem. i; B. 178, a. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK II 47 
 
 CHAPTER XIV 
 
 I. The Bellovaci had been urged on by their chiefs to 
 make^ war upon the Roman people. 2. Those who were 
 the leaders in this design brought great disaster upon the 
 state. '^ 3. Diviciacus told Caesar that those who were' the 
 leaders in this design brought great disaster upon the state. 
 4. The leaders understood how great a disaster they had 
 brought* upon the state, and so they fled to Britain. 5. And 
 Caesar exercised his usual ^ clemency* toward' the Bellovaci. 
 
 1. 563; H. & B. 502, 3, a; H. 565 ; 4. cf. 4: 3. 
 
 G. 546; B. 295, I. 5. 302, b; H. & B. 264, 3; H. 503, 
 
 2. 370; H. & B. 376; H. 429; G. 4; G. 309, 2; B. 244, I. 
 347 ; B. 187, III. 6. cf. 7 : z. 
 
 3. 580 ; H. & B. 534, 2 ; H. 643 ; 7. toward = with reference to = in. 
 G. 650; B. 314, 1. 
 
 CHAPTER XV 
 
 I. At the request of Diviciacus/ who was of great influ- 
 ence ' among the Haedui, Caesar spared the Bellovaci. 
 2. And,' when he had received hostages from them,' he 
 marched* through the territory of the Ambiani without a 
 battle. 3. But the Nervii were men of great courage, because 
 they did not allow traders to bring in wine or other things 
 which weaken valor. 4. These blamed the rest of the Belgae 
 for surrendering' to Caesar, and refused* to send hostages. 
 
 1. cf. petentibus Remis, in text of at the beginning of the sentence, 
 chapter XII. cf. quorum cum, and qui cum in 
 
 2. 415; H. & B. 443; H. 473, 2; text of chapter XIII. 308, f; 
 G. 400; B. 224. H. & B. 284, 8; H.5io;G. 610, 
 
 3. Where in English "and" or 1; B. 251, 6. 
 " but " is used with a demon- 4. iter facio. 
 
 strative or personal pronoun 5. for surrendering = who had sur- 
 referring to something in the rendered. 540, c ; H. & B. 523 ; 
 
 preceding sentence, a relative is H. 592 ; G. 633 ; B. 283, 3. 
 
 generally used in Latin, placed 6. reciiso. 
 
48 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER XVI 
 
 I. Caesar was now not raore^ than ten miles ^ from the 
 
 river Sambre. 2. On the other side of this river, the Nervii, 
 
 and their neighbors who ° had been persuaded " to join* with 
 
 them, were awaiting Caesar's arrival. 3. Meanwhile they 
 
 had put the women and children in a place to which ^ an 
 
 army" had no access. 
 
 ■' 3. cf. 10: 5. 
 
 1. 407, c; H. & B. 416, d; H. 471, 4. cf. 14: i. 
 
 4; G. 296, 4; B. 217, 3. 5. quo = to which place, cf. 3 : 1. 
 
 2. 425; H. &B. 387; H. 417; G. 6. 373; H. &B. 374; H. 430; G. 
 335; B. 181. 349; B. 190. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII 
 
 I. Some of the Belgae' followed Caesar so as to learn 
 his mode of march. 2. Since a large number of baggage- 
 trains was passing between the legions, they thought they 
 could attack the legions one by one ^ without any ' difficulty. 
 
 3. And they thought that the hedges, which their ancestors 
 had made,* would obstruct Caesar's army. 4. For long ago 
 the Nervii had cut into and bent over trees, that their neigh- 
 bors' cavalry might not ^ come to them after ° plunder. 
 
 1. 346, c; H. &B. 346, e; H. 444; XI. 311 ; H. & B. 276, 7; H. 
 G. 372, 2; B. 201, I, ^. cf. 513; G. 317; B. 252, 4. 
 quidam ex Ms in text ; also unus 4. cf. 14 : 3. 
 
 ex ils in text of chapter VI. 5. cf. 1 : 8 : 1. 
 
 2. singuli. 6. causa = after. 504, b ; H. & B. 
 
 3. without any = nuUo or sine uUo. 612, i ; H. 626; G. 428, 2 ; B. 
 Find models in text of chapter 338, i, c. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII 
 
 I. Caesar had encamped on a hill which was not far ' from 
 the river Sambre. 2. The Nervii had chosen a wooded hill 
 across the river, alongside of which they had stationed ^ a few 
 pickets of cavalry. 
 
 I. longe. 2. dispond. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK U 49 
 
 CHAPTER XIX 
 
 I. Caesar now arranged the baggage-trains and legions 
 in a different way from what* the Nervii were expecting. 
 2. The cavalry, which had been sent ahead, commenced 
 battle, but did not dare to follow the enemy as they retreated 
 into the woods. 3. While the first six legions were fortifying 
 the camp, the enemy, as soon as ^ they saw the first baggage- 
 traiii, again made an attack upon the cavalry. 4. These were 
 easily routed, and, crossing the river, rushed with incredible 
 speed ° up the hill * to Caesar's camp. 
 
 1. ac. 324, c; H. & B. 307, 2, a; 3. 412; H. & B. 445; H. 473, 3; 
 H.657, I, note; G. 643; B.341, G. 399; B. 220, i. 
 
 I, c. 4. See text, and 419, a; H. & B. 
 
 2. ubi. 543; H. & B. 558; H. 602; 421; H. 489; G. 409; B. 227, i. 
 G. s6i ; B. 287, I. 
 
 CHAPTER XX 
 
 I. The approach of the enemy was so swift that Caesar 
 could not do everything that was to be done.* 2. He had 
 to recall* the soldiers from work, the line of battle had to 
 be formed,* and^ many signals were to be given.* 3. But it 
 was a relief to Caesar that the soldiers had been trained 
 in former battles. 4. And, further,* the separate* lieuten- 
 ants gave to their respective* legions such directions^ as° 
 seemed best.' 
 
 1. These must all be written alike j,. 323, b; H. & B. 305, a; H. 657, 
 in Latin after this model : some- 6; G. 481, 2; B. 341, 4. 
 
 thing is to be done, in which the 3. and further = atque. 
 
 phrase " to be done " is repre- 4. singuli : see the text, 
 
 sented by the gerundive used 5. give directions to = praescribo. 
 
 like a predicate adjective. 500, 6. such as = what (plural), cf. I: 
 374 J H. & B. 600, 3, and 373, 1 ; 14 : 3. 
 
 H. 237, 431; G. 251, 355; B. 7. seems best = videtur. 
 i8g, I. 
 
so LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER XXI 
 
 I. Caesar did not lose much time in exhorting^ his 
 soldiers. 2. For the enemy made the attack so boldly that 
 he had to begin the battle before ^ time was given even for 
 putting on ' the helmets. 3. But, whatever legion he came 
 to, this he exhorted to sustain ' the attack bravely and not ^ 
 to fear. 
 
 1. 503, 507 ; H. & B. 610 and 612, 3. cf. 12 : 3. 
 
 IV; H. 623, 629; G. 427, 433; 4. cf. 14: I. 
 
 B. 339, I, 2. 5. cf. I: 35: 4- 
 ^. cf . 1 2 : i . 
 
 CHAPTER XXII 
 
 I. Caesar had to marshal his army according to the neces- 
 sity^ of the time. 2. And so some legions resisted the 
 enemy in one place and others in another.^ 3. And, besides,^ 
 the view was obstructed by the hedges so that Caesar could 
 not attend to all the commands. 
 
 1. 404; H. & B. 414; H. 475; G. 2. 315, c; H. & B. 279, 2 ; H. 516, 
 397; B. 219. i; G. 319; B. 253, 2. 
 
 3. cf. 20 : 3. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII 
 
 I. The ninth and tenth legions fell in with the Atrebates, 
 whom they quickly put to flight. 2. The eighth and eleventh 
 legions likewise routed the Veromandui, but did not ^ cross 
 the river. 3. But now, the seventh and twelfth legions hav- 
 ing taken'' their position on the right, the camp was exposed 
 on ^ the front and left. 4. And so the Nervii rushed thither * 
 for the purpose of seizing the camp. 
 
 1. but not = neque. cf . 2 : 4. 4; G. 390, 2, 6 ; B. 229. See 
 
 2. express by a clause, cf. 5 : 4. the text also. 
 
 3. 429, b ; H. & B. 406, 2 ; H. 485, 4. thither = to that place. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK II 51 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV 
 
 1. The cavalry, who had been repulsed at the first attack, 
 were now returning to the camp. 2. And, having met the 
 enemy face to face, they, together with the camp-servants, 
 who had gone out after ^ plunder, again took to flight. 
 3. Then the Treveri, seeing all this, hurried home^ to tell 
 their people that the Romans were defeated. 
 
 1. cf. 17: 6. Also find the expres- j,. 427,2; H. &B. 450, b; H. 419, 
 sion in the text there and here. i ; G. 337 ; B. 182, i, b. 
 
 CHAPTER XXV 
 
 I. Matters were now in a critical condition on the right 
 
 wing, for nearly all the centurions there were slain. 2. And 
 
 the soldiers were so^ crowded together that they could not 
 
 fight easily, and some were withdrawing from the battle. 
 
 3. And so Caesar advanced in person" to the first line and 
 ordered the centurions each to open his own' maniples. 
 
 4. This being done, they used their swords more easily, and 
 checked the enemy's attack a little. 
 
 1. tain. 2. ipse. 3. cf. pro se quisque, and 11:2. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI 
 I. Since the seventh legion was also hard pressed, the 
 legions joined together that they might aid one another. 
 
 2. While they were now fighting more boldly, the two legions 
 which had been guarding ^ the baggage arrived ^ on ^ the 
 summit of* the hill. 3. Meanwhile Labienus, who had 
 driven the Atrebates across the river, had now got posses- 
 sion of the enemy's camp. 4. And, when from the higher 
 ground he saw that the camp of the Romans was in great 
 danger, he sent the tenth legion to their assistance.^ 
 
 1. cf. 7:1. 3. cf. I: 21 : 2. 
 
 2. pervenio. 4. cf. 2 : 2. 
 
52 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER XXVII 
 
 I. When this arrived, the spirit of the Romans was so 
 revived^ and the enemy so dismayed that the tide of battle 
 was turned.^ 2. And now even the cavalry, in order to dis- 
 play their courage, put themselves in front of the legionary 
 soldiers." 3. But the enemy were men of great resolution,* 
 and had not ^ ascended the- very high river banks in vain. 
 
 4. For, when many of them had been slain, the survivors * 
 heaped together the bodies, and continued to hurl ' weapons 
 as if from a mound. 
 
 1. redintegro. 6. 308, c ; H. & B. 284, 3 ; H. 
 
 2. a change of things was effected. 510, 6. 
 
 3. cf. 6:3. 7. Use no word for "continued." 
 4- 345; H. & B. 355; H. 440, 3; 470; H. & B. 468, 2; H. 534; 
 
 G. 365 ; B. 203, 1. G. 231 ; B. 260, 2. 
 
 5. cf. 2 : 4. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVIII 
 
 I. The Romans, whom nothing now seemed to hinder, 
 fought until ^ the Nervii were reduced almost to annihilation. 
 2. But Caesar, moved by pity, took under his protection^ 
 the few survivors. 3. And he promised ' to keep the neigh- 
 bors away from their territory. 
 
 I. 554; H. & B. 560; H. 603, II, ^. cf. text, chapter XV. 
 I ; G. 571 ; B. 293, III, 1. 3. polliceor. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIX 
 
 I. The Aduatuci, who were coming to the defense of the 
 Nervii, now returned home^ to defend their own people and 
 property.^ 2. They abandoned all their towns except* one, 
 which was protected by high cliffs. 3. And, having placed* 
 all their property in this,* they fortified the entrance with a 
 
CAESAR; GALLIC WAR, BOOK II 53 
 
 double wall about two hundred feet long. 4. These Adua- 
 tuci were descendants of the^ men whom the Cimbri and 
 Teutones many years before' had left in the province. 
 
 1. cf. 24 : z. 4. cf . 5 : 4. 
 
 2. suds suaque omnia. 288; H. & 5. cf. 15: 3. 
 
 B. 249; H. 494; G. 204,1; B. 6. is. cf. Ill: 22: i. 
 236. 7. ante. 
 
 3. piaetei. 
 
 CHAPTER XXX 
 
 I. When the Romans^ saw that the Aduatuci were fortify- 
 ing themselves in the town, they began to construct an agger 
 and a tower. 2. But the tower was being constructed so 
 great a distance ^ away ' that the enemy merely * laughed at 
 it. 3. For they felt sure that so great a machine could not 
 be moved by men of so small stature. 
 
 i. The Romans, when they, etc. 3. at), which here is an adverb. 
 
 601, a; H. & B. 626; H. 684. 4. modo, always postpositive. 
 2. 414 ; H. & B. 424 ; H. 479 ; G. 
 
 403; B. 223. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXI 
 
 I. But,' when^ the Romans moved the machines towards 
 the walls with great speed, the unusual sight startled the 
 enemy. 2. And so they decided that they must at once 
 send' envoys of* peace to Caesar. 3. These envoys begged 
 him not to deprive them of their arms.^ 4. For they were, 
 afraid that their enemies would put them to death with 
 cruelty if their arms * should be given up. 
 
 1. vero. 599, b; H. & B. 624, 8, 4. cf. 2 : 3. 
 b; H. 677 ; G. 487 ; B. 343, g. 5. cf. 6 : 2. 
 
 2. ubi. 543; H. &B. 557; H. 602; 6. 420, 4; H. & B. 421, 6; H. 489 ; 
 G. 561 ; B. 287. G. 409; B. 227, 2, b. 
 
 3. cf. 20 : I. 
 
54 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER XXXII 
 
 I. Caesar replied that the Aduatuci must give up their 
 arms before '^ he could accept any terms of peace. 2. They 
 do what ^ is demanded, and throw a great quantity of arms 
 from the town. 3. And yet about a third part they retain 
 and conceal. 
 
 1. cf. 12 : I. 2. cf. 1 : 14: 3. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIII 
 
 I . By night, while they thought the Romans were keeping 
 
 less careful watch, they suddenly caught up^the concealed 
 
 weapons. 2. But as soon as^ a rush was made' from the 
 
 town, the Romans made signals by fires, and sharp fighting 
 
 ensued.^ 3. Since the enemy had to fight * in an unfavorable 
 
 position, they were quickly driven back with great slaughter. 
 
 4. The next day Caesar broke down the gates, captured'' the 
 
 town, and sold all the inhabitants to the number of more " 
 
 than fifty thousand. 
 
 5. occupo. Use only one verb in 
 
 1. capio. this sentence. See text for a 
 
 2. cf. 31 : 2. model. Also compare last sen- 
 
 3. 208, d ; H. &B. 20i,c; H. 302, tence in text of chapter XXXII. 
 6; G. 208, 2; B. 138, IV. 6. 407, c; H. &B. 416, d; H. 471, 
 
 4. cf. 20 : I. 4 ; G. 296, 4 ; B. 217, 3. 
 
 CHAPTERS XXXIV, XXXV 
 
 I, Meanwhile Crassus had brought all the maritime states 
 under the sway of the Romans. 2. Therefore Caesar, hav- 
 ing subdued all the Belgae, brought his legions into winter 
 quarters, and started himself for Italy. 3. And such an 
 impression ^ of his victory had been carried to Rome ^ by 
 his dispatches that a fifteen days' thanksgiving was decreed. 
 
 I. opinio. 2. cf. 24 : 2. 
 
BOOK THIRD 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 I. Caesar sent Galba to open a route along the Alps. 
 
 2. The reason for fighting several battles was, that the 
 mountain tribes ^ did not wish him to pass the winter there. 
 
 3. But after sharp fighting he placed two cohorts among the 
 Nantuates for the sake ^ of passing the winter. 4. The other 
 cohorts and the Gauls were allowed " to winter in a village 
 of the Veragri. 
 
 1. The nations which dwelt among causa. 504, b ; H. & B. 612, i ; 
 the mountains. H. 626; G. 428, 2 ; B. 338, i, c. 
 
 2. Observe the difference between 3. permitto. cf. II : 10: 5. 
 causa mittendi and mittendi 
 
 CHAPTER II 
 
 I. When Galba had sent two cohorts after grain, the Gauls 
 thought they could overpower the other cohorts. 2. And 
 so they seized the heights with the design of running 
 down ^ into the valley and hurling ^ weapons upon the 
 Romans. 3. For they hated " the Romans who ° had taken 
 away their children as hostages. 4. And, besides,* they 
 feared that the Romans were seizing the Alps for the sake 
 of joining these places to the Roman province. 
 
 X. 504; H. & B. 612, I; H. 626; 3. who = because they. 540, c; 
 
 G. 428 ; B. 339, 1. H. & B. 523 ; H. 592 ; G. 633; 
 
 2. odi. 205, b; H. & B. 199 ; H. B. 283, 3. 
 
 299, 2 ; G. 175, 5 ; B. 133, 2. 4. turn etiam, or accedebat, quod. 
 
 55 
 
56 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 
 I. A large body of armed men ^ had now seized the higher 
 ground before ^ Galba had fully finished his intrenchments. 
 2. Therefore, since he had not enough supplies,* and^ reen- 
 forcements could not' be sent to him, he quickly called a 
 council. 3. And in this ^ council some said they must leave 
 the baggage and return for safety ; others," that they must 
 defend the camp. 
 
 1. 288; H. & B. 249 J H. 494; G. 4. cf. II: 2: 4. 
 204, i; B. 236, I. 5. cf. II: 15: 3. 
 
 2. cf. II: 12 : I. 6. some . . . others = alii . . . alii. 
 
 3. 346, 4; H. & B. 346; H. 443; 
 G. 367 ; B. 201, 2. 
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 
 I. These matters had scarcely been attended to, when the 
 enemy rushed down from the mountains. 2. The Romans 
 bravely tried to defend every part of the camp, but were at 
 a disadvantage in number. 3. For, when^ the enemy were 
 tired, others could take their place, but no^ Roman, tired or 
 wounded, could leave the battle. 
 
 i. Cum, in the sense of "whenever," 2. no = no one = nemo, 
 is followed by the indicative. 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 I. Galba's men had fought so' long without cessation 
 that they were growing faint.^ 2. And so the enemy were 
 pressing on the more vigorously with the hope' of tearing 
 down the wall. 3. And the matter was now brought to such 
 a turn * that Baculus and Volusenus advised Galba to try * a 
 sally from the camp. 
 
 i- tam. 4. tantus casus. 
 
 2. grow faint = languesco. g. 563; H. & B. 502, 3; H. 565; 
 
 3. speadducti. G. 546; B. 295, i. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK III 57 
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 
 I. The soldiers rushed out of the camp so suddenly that 
 they killed more than a third part of the enemy before they 
 could rally.' 2. And the rest, when they saw that they 
 could not get possession of the camp,^ were easily routed. 
 3. Galba now, on account of a lack of supplies, decided that 
 he must return to the province at once. 
 
 I. se . . . colligere. 2. 410 ; H. & B. 429 ; H. 477 ; G. 
 
 407; B. 218, I. 
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 
 I. All Gaul now seemed to be at peace, and so Caesar 
 visited lUyricum. 2. But,' while he was away,^ the Veneti, 
 to whom Crassus had sent several men after grain, suddenly 
 commenced ^ war. 
 
 I. at. 
 
 3. initium facio. 
 
 2. absum. 
 
 
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 
 I. The Veneti had so many ships that they held nearly 
 all the maritime states tributary. 2. And so, when Crassus 
 sent Silius and Velanius to them, they retained these men 
 till' they should get back their hostages. 3. Moreover, their 
 neighbors chose rather to act with them than to serve ^ the 
 Romans. 4. Therefore, through a common embassy they 
 informed Crassus that they would not give up to him the 
 Roman deputies, unless he should send back' to them* 
 their* hostages. 
 
 1. 553 ; H. & B. 507, 5 ; H. 603, 3. cf. I : 30 : 5. 
 
 II, 2 ; G. 572 ; B. 293, III, 2. 4. 300, I, 2 I H. & B. 262, 2 ; H. 
 
 2, servio. 367; H. & B. 364; H. 504; G. 521; B. 244, I and II. 
 426, i; G. 346; B. 187, II, a. 
 
58 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 
 I. Caesar was so far away that he sent lieutenants to pro- 
 cure sailors from the province for the maritime war. 2. The 
 Veneti realized that they had committed a great wrong, 
 because they detained' the Roman knights. 3. And on 
 account of the danger they resolved to join to themselves as 
 many allies as possible.^ 4. Yet they had greater hope for 
 the reason ' that the Romans had few ships, and were not ^ 
 acquainted with ^ this part of the sea. 
 
 i. 540, 2 ; H. & B. 535, ^, a; H. note; H. & B. 424, a; H. 479; 
 
 588, II; G. 541 ; B. 286, i. G. 403 ; B. 223. 
 
 2. 291, c ; H. & B. 241, 4 ; H. 159, 4. cf. II : 2 : 4. 
 
 2 ; G. 303 ; B. 240, 3. 5. cognosce. 476 ; H. & B. 487 ; 
 
 3. for the reason = hoc. 414, a, H. 299, 2; G. 175, 5; B. 262. 
 
 CHAPTER X 
 
 I. Caesar thought he must not overlook' that nation which 
 had reopened hostilities after giving hostages. 2. And so 
 he divided and scattered his army more widely, before ' 
 more states should be incited to war. 
 
 1. cf. II : 20 : I. 2. cf. II : 12 : 1. 
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 
 I. Labienus was sent to keep' the Germans from crossing ' 
 the river. 2 . In like manner lieutenants were sent into several 
 states to see ^ that the forces of the enemy be kept apart.' 
 3. Then Caesar himself, as soon as he had put Brutus in 
 command of the fleet, led the foot forces into Venetia. 
 
 i. prohibeo. 558, b, note ; H. & B. 3. 500, 4 ; H. & B. 605, 2 ; H. 622 ; 
 
 587,3; H. 614; G. 548, 2; B. G. 430; B. 337, 7, b, 2. cf. 
 
 331. pontem faciendum curat, in te.xt 
 
 2. ciiro. of 1 : 13. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK III 59 
 
 CHAPTER XII 
 
 I. The towns were so situated that at high tide infantry 
 could not approach' them, and ships could not be brought 
 up at ebb-tide. 2. Besides, if in any case'' the Romans 
 constructed ° a mole so as to shut out the sea, the inhabit- 
 ants * would quickly withdraw to another town. 3. More- 
 over,^ the tides were so high in the open sea that the Romans 
 could not easily prevent them. 
 
 1. adeo. 4- oppidanus. 
 
 2. if in any case = if ever = si 5. autem, always postpositive, cf. 
 quando. II : 31: i. 
 
 3. 518, b;H. &B. 579;H.S78, ij 
 G. 595 ; B. 302, 3. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII 
 
 I. The prows of the enemy's vessels were quite high, 
 so that they could stand the big waves. 2. For this reason 
 the Romans could less easily throw weapons upon^ them. 
 3. And, since they were made wholly'' of oak, the Roman 
 vessels, although they excelled in speed,' could not harm 
 them. 4. Besides, the Gauls did not fear at all the ebbing 
 of the tide, for* their keels were flat; nor the winds, for 
 their vessels were directed^ by sails made of leather. 
 
 L. ad. 4. enim. cf. 12: 5. 
 
 2. Use adjective. 5. 470 ; H. & B. 468, 2 ; H. 534, 
 
 3. 418; H. & B. 441 ; H. 480; G. 3; G. 231 ; B. 260, 2. 
 397 ; B. 226. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV 
 
 I. It was now evident to Caesar that he was capturing 
 their towns in vain, because they could escape' with their 
 ships. 2. But, when the fleet arrived, the Romans with 
 sharp hooks fastened to long poles seized and cut away the 
 
6o LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 ropes of the enemy's vessels. 3. This^ being done, they 
 could not control their vessels, and the rest of the struggle 
 had to be carried on by valor. 4. The Romans fought with 
 unusual bravery,' because Caesar and the whole army were 
 watching ' the fight from the higher ground. 
 
 i. For "escape," "control," and 2. cf. Quae ubi, Quibus abscisis, 
 " watch," use the verbs related and II : 15: 3. 
 
 to fuga, usus, and conspectus. 3. very bravely. 291, b ; H. & B. 
 
 241, 3 5 H. 498; B. 240, 2. 
 
 CHAPTER XV 
 
 I. Whenever^ the soldiers from two" or^ three" vessels 
 boarded their ships one at a time,' the enemy sought safety 
 in flight. 2. Yet very few ships reached land, for the 
 Romans, who used oars, were able to capture them one by 
 one' in the calm that ensued. 
 
 J., cf. 4: I. 3. 137, a; H. &B. 133; H. 164, i; 
 
 2. " or " here = ac. G. 97 j B. 78, t. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI 
 
 I. The Veneti lost so many men and ships in this battle 
 that they now had no one^ to defend^ them. 2. Upon 
 those who surrendered, Caesar inflicted the ' severer penalty, 
 because they had not observed the right of ambassadors. 
 
 1. 307, c; H. & B. 284; H. 399,4; ^- 535. a; H. & B. 521, a; H. 591, 
 
 G. 621 ; B. 251. I ; G. 631, 2 ; B. 283. 
 
 3. eo. cf. 9 : 3. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII 
 
 I. Meanwhile Viridovix had taken a position against 
 Sabinus, who had been sent among the Venelli by Caesar. 
 
 2. But so great a body of men, for the sake of plunder, had 
 joined Viridovix, that Sabinus decided he must not leave 
 
GAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK III 6l 
 
 the camp in Caesar's absence. 3. And the^ more^ so, 
 because he wished to give an impression of fear so that the 
 enemy would move nearer. 
 
 1. cf. 16 : 3. • 2. magis. cf. text, chapter XIV. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII 
 
 I. Therefore Sabinus got^ a shrewd Gaul to' go over to 
 the enemy and say that Caesar was pressed by difficulties. 
 
 2. And they were glad to believe^ this Gaul, who said that 
 it was almost certain' that Sabinus would go from the camp 
 the next night to carry aid to Caesar. 3. So they prevailed 
 upon ' Viridovix to ' allow them * to hurry to the camp before 
 Sabinus should start. 
 
 1. persuaded ut. cf. 5 : 5. far from being a fact that = it 
 
 2. gladly believed. is almost certain. 
 
 3. non longe abest quin = it is not 4. cf . 8 : 4. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX 
 
 I. The enemy hurried up the hilP with such speed that 
 they reached the camp out of breath. 2. But the Romans 
 quickly armed themselves and made a rush from the two 
 gates.'^ 3. The enemy, owing to their fatigue, even at the 
 first attack were repulsed with great slaughter.^ 4. Thus 
 those Gauls who had been so eager to undertake* the war 
 could not endure defeat and immediately surrendered. 
 
 1. cf. text, book II, chapter XIX. 3. many having been killed. 
 
 2. 429, a; H. & B. 426; H. 476; 4. 506; H. & B. 612, III; H. 628; 
 G. 389; B. 218, 9. G. 432 ; B. 339, ^. 
 
 CHAPTER XX 
 I. Crassus had ' now arrived in Aquitania, and had to 
 procure^ cavalry, in which he was least efficient. 2. He 
 took extraordinary caution, because war was to be waged 
 
62 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 in the place where a Roman army had been defeated' 
 before. 3. At first a party of Sontiates attacked him in 
 a cavalry skirmish.' 4. Afterwards the infantry, which 
 had been placed in ambush, were suddenly led out of 
 the valley. 
 
 i. Crassus, when he had now 3. Why not subjunctive, the same 
 
 (iam) . . . had to procure. as interfectus esset in the text ? 
 
 2. of. II: 20: I. 4. 409; H. & B. 423; H. 476; G. 
 
 401; B. 218, 7. 
 
 CHAPTER XXI 
 
 I. The Sontiates fought desperately, but at length the 
 brave young officer Crassus made them seek^ safety in 
 flight. 2. But, when he laid siege to their town, they again 
 made a brave rally ^ and tried to work^ a mine up to the 
 agger. 3. Although they were skillful in this,^ the Romans 
 used such watchfulness that they accomplished nothing by 
 it, and surrendered unconditionally.^ 
 
 1. 568; H. & B. 521, 3; H. 566; 4 349, a; H. & B. 354; H. 450; 
 G. 553, I ; B. 297, 1. G. 374; B. 204, i. 
 
 2. make a brave rally = fortiter 5. giving up their arms. cf. II : 
 resists. 5 : 4. 
 
 3. work ... up to = ad . . . ago. 
 
 CHAPTER XXII 
 
 I. But from another part of the town a shout was raised, 
 and the soldiers rushed to arms. 2. They found th at Adiatun- 
 nus, with those ' who had committed themselves to his^ friend- 
 ship, was trying to make a sally from the town. 3. These' 
 they repelled ; yet there was fierce fighting, because his 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK III 63 
 
 retainers were willing to bring death upon themselves that 
 he * might not be killed. 
 
 1. Is is used as the antecedent of mentioned, geiierally with em- 
 a relative or ut-claus6. phasis or contrast. 
 
 2. Is is also used to refer to a 4. lUe denotes a change of subject, 
 person or thing just mentioned, contrast, emphasis, or some- 
 without emphasis. thing more remote in thought 
 
 3. Hie refers to what has just or position. 297, a, b, d ; H. & 
 been, or is just going to be, B. 271, a; H. 505, 508; G. 365, 
 
 307, 308 ; B. 246, 247, I and 2. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII 
 
 I . The fortified town of the Sontiates had been so quickly- 
 captured that the Vocates, when Crassus came there,^ sent 
 for help from Spain. 2. The leaders who came from there,' 
 because they had fought there '^ under the leadership'-' of 
 the Roman Sertorius, had learned the art of war.' 3. But 
 Crassus, because the number of the enemy was daily 
 increasing," resolved to fight the next day. 
 
 1. Seeibi,e6,inde. 217; H.&B.144; 3. war = warfare = res militaris. 
 H. 307, 4, 5; G. no; B. 140. 4. Use either cresco or the passive 
 
 2. 419, a; H. & B. 421; H. 489; (why?) of augeo. 
 G. 409; B. 227, I. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV 
 
 I. Although at daybreak Crassus drew up a double line 
 of battle, the enemy did not fight. 2. For they thought 
 that the Romans were dispirited ' at '^ the want of grain, and 
 so they themselves would gain the victory without a battle. 
 
 3. But their delay made the soldiers rush ' upon their camp 
 even the * more eagerly.^ 
 
 1. 415; H. & B. 443; H. 473, 2; 4. cf. 16: 3. 
 
 G. 400 ; B. 224. 5. Use the adverb suggested by 
 
 2. propter. alacriores. ' 
 
 3. cf. 21 : I. 
 
64 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER XXV 
 
 I. The soldiers now attempted to drive ^ tlie defenders 
 from the wall. 2. The auxiliaries, too, in order to give the 
 appearance of fighting^ men, kept bringing' material for an 
 agger. 3. Meanwhile the cavalry, by going* around the 
 camp, discovered that the decuman gate could be more 
 easily demolished.* 
 
 1. attempted to drive = one word. 3. 470 ; H. & B. 468, 2 ; H. 534, 
 471, Cf H. & B. 484; H. 530; 3; G. 231; B. 260, 2. 
 
 G. 233; B. 260, 3. 4. 507; H. & B. 612, IV; H. 630; 
 
 2. cf. 3: I. G. 431; B. 339. 
 
 5. proruo. 
 
 CHAPTERS XXVI, XXVH 
 
 I. And so the ofificers led those ^ cohorts which were 
 guarding the camp around to the enemy's rear gate before ''■ 
 they could even be seen by them.' 2. But, when a shout 
 was raised, the Romans, excited by the hope of victory, 
 attacked the enemy with renewed energy. 3. They,* losing 
 all hope, leaped down over the fortiiications and fled over 
 the open plain.* 4. And the cavalry pursued them* till 
 they killed ' so great a number' that nearly all Aquitania 
 surrendered to Caesar. 
 
 X. cf. 22 : I. Study the pronouns 4. cf. 22 : 4. ' 
 
 in these sentences and in the 5. 429, a; H. & B. 426; H. 476; 
 text, and compare chapter G. 389; B. 218,9. 
 
 XXII, text and references. 6. cf. 14: 2, and II: 15:3. 
 
 2. cf. II : 12 : I. 7. cf. II : 28 : i, and III : 8 : i. 
 
 3. cf. 22 : 3. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVIII 
 
 1. In order to complete this war, Caesar went to the 
 Morini, who had not sought peace. 2. But they, because 
 other nations had been conquered in battle, took to the 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK III 65 
 
 woods. 3. And,^ when Caesar came there,' and ^ the soldiers 
 were intent upon fortifying ' the camp, they suddenly rushed 
 out of the woods, but were driven back with great slaughter. 
 
 i. quo. cf.II : 15: 3,andII: 3: I. 3. 506; H. & B. 612, III; H. 628 ; 
 2. que often connects two words G. 432 ; B. 339, 2. 
 
 or clauses, cf. II : 12 : 4. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIX 
 
 I. Caesar now began to cut down all the woods and pile 
 up the material in order that no one' might attack him on'' 
 either^ side. 2. But, just as' he was reaching' the animals 
 and baggage-trains, violent ^ storms came on, and * he was 
 obliged to stop' work. 3. And, when he saw that the 
 enemy had now sought the denser woods, he ravaged their 
 fields and put his army in winter-quarters. 
 
 I. that no one = that not (ne) ... 6. Avoid coordinate clauses by 
 
 any one. 310, a, and 538; H. using nt, or by using a participle 
 
 & B. 276, i; H. 186; G. 315; or cum-clause for "came on." 
 
 B. 252, I. The Latin style often requires 
 
 J,, ab. 429, b; H.&B. 406, 2; H. one verb, with a participle or 
 
 485,4; G. 390, 2 and 6; B. 229. suborditiate clause, instead of 
 
 either = alteruter. two verbs, cf. 20 : i, and II : 
 
 3. cum lam. 33 '• S- 
 
 4. adsequor. 7- by necessity stopped. , 
 
 5. violentus. 
 
BOOK FOURTH 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 I. The Suevi were so fond of war that they took from 
 their territory a hundred thousand armed men every year. 
 
 2. These were supported by those ^ who remained at home. 
 
 3. That neither agriculture nor the science of war might be 
 interrupted, those ■^ who were in arms one year remained at 
 home the next. 4. And no one ^ among them was allowed 
 to dwell in one place more than a year. 5. They spent 
 much time in hunting and brought themselves to the ' habit 
 of living ' on milk and meat, and did nothing at all ^ against 
 their wills. 6. They had no clothing except hides, and 
 bathed* in the coldest rivers. 
 
 1. cf. Ill : 22: I. 3. Use ut with the subjunctive. 
 
 2. "and no one," "and nothing at 4. 156, a; H. & B. 288, 3; H. 517; 
 all" = and not any one, and G. 219; B. 256, i. 
 
 not anything, cf . 1 : 20 : 1 . 
 
 CHAPTER II 
 
 I. The Germans wanted to have somebody ' to whom they 
 might sell what they could export, and yet they never ^ im- 
 ported much. 2. Wine they did not import at all, because it 
 enfeebles ' men so that they cannot endure hardship. 3. Nor 
 would they import even beasts of burden, but used the ani- 
 mals, however small and uncomely, which were reared among 
 them. 4. In cavalry battles they left the horses near by,* 
 
 66 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK IV 6/ 
 
 that they might be at hand^ in case' they had to retreat 
 rapidly. 5. And they never ^ used saddle-cloths. 
 
 1. cf. Ill : 16 : I. Also see 485, d ; H. & B. 482 ; 
 
 2. and . . . never = and not ... H. 549; G. 510; B. 267, 2. 
 ever (unquam). cf. 1:2. 4. propter. 
 
 3. Show by the mood that this 5. adsum. 
 was the idea of the Germans. 6. in case = if. 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 
 I. The Suevi wished no nation to dwell near^ their borders, 
 in order that it might be thought that the neighboring states 
 feared their power. 2. Their nearest neighbors on one side 
 were the Ubii, whom they had not driven away, but had 
 made tributary. 3, This nation was the most prosperous 
 and civilized of all the Germans, because it was not far 
 from'^ the Rhine and the civilization' of the Gauls. 
 
 I. prope. 2. absum. 3. Form the noun from humanus. 
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 
 I. The Usipites and Tencteri were at last driven from 
 home by the Suevi, and roamed about till ^ they came to the 
 country which was inhabited by the Menapii, who were so 
 alarmed at their arrival that they placed guards on this side 
 of the Rhine to keep the Germans from crossing.^ 2, But the 
 latter, having no ships with which to cross,' tried every expe- 
 dient * by which they might give the impression ^ that they 
 had returned to their own settlements. 3. Then they sud- 
 denly fell upon the Menapii, and seized their ships, with which 
 they crossed the river before " the guards could stop them. 
 
 1. cf. II: 28: I, and III: 8: i. 4. Express "every" by oinnia, 
 
 2. cf. Ill : II : I. a cognate accusative; try an 
 
 3. 535, a; H. & B. 521, a; H. 591, expedient = experior. 
 
 I ; G. 631, 2 ; B. 283. 5. give an impression = simalo. 
 
 6. cf. II ; 12 : I. 
 
68 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 I. Caesar feared the fickleness of the Gauls, and so he told 
 them nothing which' he might have to " repent of afterwards. 
 2. For it was the custom of travelers who went among them 
 to say things made up^ to gratify' the wishes of the crowd that 
 surrounded them in the towns. 3. These reports, though* 
 most unreliable, often moved them, nevertheless, to adopt 
 plans which, in most cases could not be followed.* 
 
 i. 354, b ; H. & B. 352 ; H. 457 ; 3. to gratify = ad. 
 
 G. 377; B. 209. 4. Use no word for " though." 
 
 2. Find in the text equivalents 5. servio. cf. Ill : i : 3. 
 
 for " he might have to " and 
 
 " things made up." 
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 
 I. Caesar found that the Germans were withdrawing from 
 the Rhine into the territory of the Condrusi. 2. Therefore, 
 in order to calm' the feelings of the Gauls, he decided that 
 he must wage war with the Germans. 3. But he became 
 involved ^ in a more serious war than he had anticipated. 
 
 I. permulceo. 2. become involved in = occurro. 
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 
 I. While Caesar was marching against the Germans, 
 deputies met him on the march, who said that, although 
 they had come from home against their will and would not 
 be the first to' bring on war, and couW be useful friends 
 to the Romans if they would allow them to hold land there, 
 they nevertheless should defend themselves if they were, 
 assailed, for the Suevi were the only ones on the earth to 
 whom they would yield. 
 
 I. be the first to = priores. cf. 2. Put this in an emphatic posi- 
 1 : 12 : 5. tion. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK IV 69 
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 
 I. "There are no fields vacant in Gaul," replied Caesar, 
 " which I can' give to those with whom I have no friendship, 
 and especially to those who do not protect their own terri- 
 tories. 2. But you may,'' if you wish, settle in the territories 
 of the Ubii, whose deputies have come to me to seek' aid." 
 
 1. cf. 4: 3. ■ 3. 509; H. & B. 618 ; H. 633 ; G. 
 
 2. Ucet. 435 ; B- 340- 
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 
 I. The deputies, because they did not gain their request,' 
 now returned home to lay these matters before their people. 
 2. Meantime Caesar moved his camp nearer to them. 3. For 
 he suspected that their horsemen, who had gone across the 
 Meuse after grain several days before, would soon ^ return. 
 
 I. gain a request = impetro. 2. mox. 
 
 CHAPTER X 
 
 I. The Rhine, which flows rapidly ' through many nations, 
 divides into several parts near the ocean. 2. The people 
 who inhabit the many large islands that are formed by these 
 mouths^ of the Rhine are savage barbarians, who live on 
 fish and birds' eggs. 
 
 I. See text for the idiom. j,. partes. 
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 
 I. When the deputies were returning, they met Caesar 
 on the march, and begged him to wait ' till ^ they could send 
 messengers to the Ubii. 2. But Caesar, knowing' why the 
 delay was interposed, and not wishing ° to give their cavalry 
 
70 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 time to return, told the deputies that he would meet them there 
 the next day. 3. Meanwhile to his officers he said : " Do 
 not attack ^ the enemy in battle ; but, if you are yourselves 
 attacked, hold out till I come nearer myself with the army." 
 
 1. Use the verb related to mora. 3. because he knew, and did not 
 
 2. cf. Ill: 8: I. wish. 
 
 4. cf. 1 : 20 : 3. 
 
 CHAPTER XII 
 
 I. But the enemy attacked the cavalry so quickly, while 
 they had no fear, because the deputies a little while before 
 had asked Caesar for a truce^ that they threw them into 
 confusion. 2. In this battle with the cavalry,* Piso, while 
 he was rescuing his brother from peril, was thrown from his 
 wounded horse and killed. 3. As soon as ^ the brother 
 noticed that he had fallen, he in turn threw himself in the 
 way of the enemy and fought valiantly till he was slain. 
 
 I. cf. II : 8 : 3. 2. nbi. 543 ; H. & B. 557; H. 602 ; 
 
 G. 561 ; B. 287. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII 
 
 I. It is the height'' of folly ^ to listen to terms from those 
 who have once used treachery. 2. Therefore Caesar decided 
 that he must not wait till time for forming plans should be 
 given to the Gauls, with whom he knew the Germans had 
 gained great influence in a single battle. 3. And, when a 
 throng' of Germans came to him in the camp* to excuse 
 themselves for having ' attacked his cavalry the day before, 
 contrary to the truce, he detained them and started himself 
 with all his forces towards the enemy's camp. 
 
 1. 293; H. & B. 244; H. 497, 4; 3. frequentes (adj.). 
 G. 291, rem. 2; B. 241. 4. cf. 1 : 31: 4. 
 
 2. 343, c; H. & B. 340; H. 447; 5. 540, 2; H. & B. 532, i, a; H. 
 G. 366, 2; B. 203, 5. 588, II ; G. 541 ; B. 286. 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK IV 7 1 
 
 CHAPTER XIV 
 
 I. When Caesar came to the enemy's camp, the Germans 
 were so alarmed at his sudden arrival that the throng of 
 women and children took to flight in every direction before 
 time was given to hold a council or ascertain whether* the 
 cavalry or* Caesar himself with all his forces had arrived. 
 
 2. And, while the cavalry were pursuing these,^ the rest of 
 the soldiers burst into the camp and quickly put to rout 
 those who had caught up arms to defend themselves. 
 
 I. 335, d ; H. & B. 234; H. 380; 2. cf. II: 15: 3. 
 G. 458 ; B. 300, 4. 
 
 CHAPTER XV 
 
 I. So many of the Germans were now being killed that 
 the rest threw down their arms in despair.* 2. And, rush- 
 ing^ out of th6 camp, they plunged^ into the river, where 
 they were overpowered by the force of the stream. 3. When 
 those Germans whom Caesar had detained before the battle 
 now said they feared ' the cruelty of the Gauls and did not 
 wish to withdraw, he granted them the privilege of remain- 
 ing with him. 
 
 I. things being despaired of. instead of two verbs, if one act 
 
 ^. Notice the use of se with the is merely preparatory or inci- 
 
 Latih verbs. dental to the other.. Cf. Ill : 
 
 3. Use participle. In Latin a par- 29 : 6. 
 ticiple and one verb are used 
 
 CHAPTER XVI 
 
 I. Caesar decided to cross the Rhine in order that the 
 Germans who had come into Gaul might fear for their own 
 interests* and so be induced to return into Germany to 
 defend their own fields. 2. But, when deputies came from 
 
72 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 Caesar to request the Sugambri to give up to him those Ger- 
 mans who were with them, they said they thought it was not 
 fair that Caesar should claim' that any ^ power or authority 
 belonged to him' across the Rhine. 3. But the Ubii asked 
 Caesar for help, thinking ^ that, after the defeat of the Ger- 
 mans and Ariovistus, merely '' the friendship of Caesar would 
 be of great service to them in the future. 
 
 1. 367, c ; H. & B. 366 ; H. 426, 3. belonged to him = was his. 
 4; G. 350, 2; B. 186. 4. cf. II : 3. 
 
 2. 311; H. & B. 276, 7; H. 513; 5. Use modo, which is postpositive. 
 G. 317; B. 252,4. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII 
 
 I. When Caesar decided that he must cross the Rhine 
 with his army, he thought that, although the river was broad 
 and deep, he must build a bridge, because it did not seem 
 quite safe or consistent with his dignity ''- to carry his army 
 over in ships,'' which the Ubii had promised. ^ 
 
 1. consistent with = of. cf. 13 : 2. 2. cf. Ill : 20 : 4. 
 CHAPTER XVIII 
 
 I. Caesar completed the whole bridge over the Rhine in 
 so short a time after he began to collect the material that 
 the Usipites and Tencteri urged the Sugambri, into whose 
 territory he was hastening, to hide in the woods. 2. Mean- 
 while, at the request of the other states,' which had sent 
 deputies to him, he promised to make peace and friendship. 
 
 I. 419; H. & B. 421 ; H. 489; G. 409; B. 227. cf. II: 15: i. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX 
 
 1. Caesar tarried' a few days in the territories of the 
 Sugambri until he could cut down their grain, then ^ went to 
 the country of the Ubii, whom he promised to free from the 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK IV 73 
 
 oppression of the Suevi. 2. Meanwhile the latter had sent 
 messengers in all directions, announcing ° that a bridge was 
 being built over the Rhine by Caesar, and urging' the women 
 and children to flee* to the woods. 3. This being done, 
 those who could bear arms had met together in the terri- 
 tory which the Suevi occupied, and were there awaiting the 
 arrival of the Romans. 4. By this it was indicated that 
 Caesar had incited fear in the Germans and accomplished 
 the objects for ^ which he had crossed the Rhine. 
 
 1. Use the participle, cf. 15: 3. 4. 588; H. & B. 534,2; H. 642 ; 
 
 2. Omit. G. 652; B. 316. 
 
 3. cf . 1 : 9 : 4. 5. causa. 
 
 CHAPTER XX 
 
 I. During nearly all the wars in GatiP aid was furnished 
 Caesar's enemies from Britain. 2. Therefore he decided to 
 go to the island personally in order to get a knowledge of 
 the race of people and the ways of access. 3. For^ traders 
 who alone' were accustomed* to go there ^ had not^ been 
 able to tell him anything" about the people who lived there' 
 or their institutions. 
 
 1. cf. II : 8 : 3. 4. 535, a; H. & B. 521, a; H. 591, 
 
 2. For . . . not = neque enim. i ; G. 631, 2 ; B. 283. 
 
 3. who were the only ones (soli) 5. cf. Ill: 23: i. 
 who. 6. cf. 16: 2. 
 
 CHAPTER XXI 
 
 I. Before^ starting personally to explore the island, Caesar 
 sent Volusenus to investigate matters. 2. While he himself 
 was gathering his fleet among the Morini, with the design 
 of ^ crossing the sea from that point, the inhabitants of Britain 
 learned' of his design through traders and sent deputies 
 to him. 3. He listened to them with pleasure, and with a 
 
74 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 generous promise sent them back home. 4. He directed 
 Commius to go with them and examine the country. 5. Volu- 
 senus had not dared to disembark among foreigners, and 
 quickly returned to the continent. 
 
 1. cf. II: 12: 1. 3. cf. 15: 3. And see 419; H. & 
 
 2. with the design of = ut, or eo B. 421; H. 489; G. 409; B. 
 consilio ut. 227. 
 
 CHAPTER XXII 
 
 I. Very opportunely for Caesar, deputies came to him 
 from the Morini also, while he was putting his ships in 
 order there for the purpose of conveying his troops across 
 the sea. 2. They said they had made war upon him on a 
 former occasion because they were unacquainted with the 
 habit of the Romans. 3. Therefore Caesar excused them 
 and promised to receive them under his protection ; but, in 
 order that he might leave no enemy behind him, he requested 
 hostages from them till ^ he should return. 4. Meanwhile 
 he gathered in this place what warships^ he had. 
 
 X. cf. Ill : 8 : I. 2. 346; H. & B. 346 ; H. 441 ; G. 
 
 369; B. 201, z. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII 
 
 I. While the cavalry were too slowly boarding the vessels 
 that Caesar had got together in the harbor, he started ahead 
 with a few ships himself for Britain. 2. When he reached 
 there,^ finding the enemy in arms ready to hurl their weapons 
 from the steep cliffs upon him as he was landing,' he de- 
 cided that he must wait at anchor for the rest of the ships. 
 3. And while they" were coming, he called* his lieutenants 
 together and warned them what to do. 4. Then he weighed 
 anchor and, with favorable wind and tide, proceeded about 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK IV 75 
 
 seven miles away, to a place better suited^ for mooring 
 ships. 
 
 I. cf. II: 3: I. 4. cf. 21: 3. And see text. 
 
 ^. 489; H. & B. 600, 1; H. 640; 5. 128; H. & B. 121; H. 159; G. 
 
 G. 282; B. 336, i!. 87, 6; B. 74, 2. 
 
 3. cf. II: 15: 3. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV 
 I. But, when the barbarians ^ learned of Caesar's plan, 
 they sent the cavalry and charioteers on ahead to prevent 
 the Romans from landing. 2. The difficulty of landing was 
 indeed very great, because the ships had to be moored in 
 deep water ; and the soldiers, standing in the waves, fought 
 with an enemy who either advanced only ^ a little way into the 
 water, or hurled weapons from the dry ground. 3. And the 
 Romans were greatly disturbed by this " mode of fighting. 
 
 1. cf. 11: 30: I. of chapter XXV. cf. 16: 5. 
 
 2. See position of modo, in text 3. cf. II : 15: 3. 
 
 CHAPTER XXV 
 
 I. The form and appearance of the Roman galleys were 
 so unfamiliar to the barbarians that, when Caesar put his 
 vessels near the exposed flank of the enemy, the latter were 
 easily routed and fell back in alarm. 2. And''- now the 
 eagle-bearer, seeing ^ that the soldiers were hesitating in the 
 deep water, exhorted ° those on board the ship not to betray 
 the eagle to the enemy, and,* declaring* in a loud voice 
 that he at any rate would discharge his duty, leaped into 
 the water with the eagle, the soldiers * from the other ships 
 following after in a body. 
 
 1. Write this sentence according 4. Omit. 
 
 to the Latin style, with only one 5. 546 ; H. & B. 524 ; H. 600, 11 ; 
 leading verb. cf. Ill : 29 : 6. G. 579, II, a ; B. 288, B. 
 
 2. cf. II: 19: 2. 6. 419; H. &B. 421; H. 489; G. 
 
 3. Use participle, cf. 15: 3. 409; B. 227. 
 
76 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI 
 
 I. The Romans were quickly thrown into great confusion 
 because the enemy, who knew all the shallow places, could 
 in large numbers attack them as they came-' off singly, one 
 from one vessel, another from another. 2. Yet they kept 
 struggling ° in the water till Caesar sent skiffs to take them 
 ashore. 3. But even then, although they put the enemy to 
 flight, they could not follow them very far,' because the 
 cavalry had been kept back by the wind from reaching* ' 
 the island. 
 
 1. cf. 23: 2. 3. cf. Ill: 14: 3. 
 
 2. cf. Ill : 25 : 3. 4. 558, b ; H. & B. 502, 3, b ; H. 
 
 568,8; G. 547; B. 295, 3. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVII 
 
 I. When the enemy after the battle came to seek peace, 
 Caesar complained because they had arrested Commius, 
 whom he had sent to Britain with instructions'^ as envoy, but^ 
 pardoned their want of discretion." 2. And they at once 
 committed themselves to Caesar's protection, and promised 
 to give the hostages which "he had demanded, as soon as ' 
 they could be sent. for from the more distant localities. 
 
 1. 413; H. & B. 418; H. 473, I ; 3. want of discretion = impruden- 
 G. 392; B. 222. tia. 367; H. &B. 364; H. 426; 
 
 2. but= que. G. 346; B. 187, II, a. 
 
 4. cum primum. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVIII 
 
 I. This battle had been fought several days^ even before 
 the ships which had taken the cavalry on board had set sail. 
 2. And besides, '^ just as' the vessels were being sighted 
 from the island, a sudden storm carried some of them back 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK IV J J 
 
 to sea, and drove others to the westward. 3. These* cast 
 anchor, but were getting filled with water, and in the face 
 of the night" had to steer for the mainland. 
 
 1. 424.fi H. & B. 387, II; H. 488, nevertheless, having cast . . . 
 I > G. 336; B. 181. since they were being filled . . . 
 
 2. cf. II > 20: 3. by necessity steered . . . cf. Ill: 
 
 3. cum iam. 29 : 6. 
 
 4. Imitate the Latin style: which, S- cf. II: 19: 4. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIX 
 
 I. Not knowing^ that the moon was to be full that night, 
 which would cause very high tides, Caesar had had the ves- 
 sels in which the army had been brought over drawn up ^ 
 on the beach. '2. The next day he found that the galleys 
 were filled with water and the transports were being dashed 
 about by the storm. 3. And, since all the vessels which had 
 not been dashed to pieces had lost their rigging, the whole . 
 army was necessarily troubled. 4. For they had no' material 
 with which to repair the damaged* vessels. 
 
 i. cf. U : 3. 3. cf . 20 : A. 
 
 2. cf. Ill: 11:3. 4. adflictatus. 
 
 CHAPTER XXX 
 
 I. When the British chiefs came to Caesar after the battle, 
 they noticed how contracted his camp was. 2. Wherefore 
 they felt confident that, since Caesar had few ships, he could 
 be cut off from a return, and that they could defeat him the ^ 
 more easily because he had scanty supplies. 3. They there- 
 fore concluded to prolong the matter till winter, so that no 
 one ^ would cross into Britain to bring him aid. 
 
 I. cf. I: 14: I. 2. cf. Ill: 29: I. 
 
78 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER XXXI 
 
 I. Since Caesar^ suspected from the fate of his ships, and 
 from the fact that ^ hostages were no longer coming to him, 
 that the enemy would reopen hostilities, he sent some of 
 his men into the fields after ° grain, and directed others to 
 repair the vessels. 2. And these worked* with so great 
 enthusiasm that by using the material of those vessels 
 which ° were most seriously damaged, they made it possible ' 
 to repair the others quite well. 
 
 1. cf. II : 30 : 1. 4. labors. 
 
 2. from this, because. 5. cf . 1 : 12 : 4. 
 
 3. Write this several ways. 6. cf. Ill : 21 : i. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXII 
 
 I. Meanwhile Caesar did not suspect the new designs 
 of the barbarians until a great cloud of dust was seen in 
 the direction in which he had sent the legion after grain. 
 2. Then, by order' of Caesar, several cohorts armed ^ them- 
 selves and started at once to the relief ^ of the legion, which 
 was now being hard pressed. 3. For,* while ^ the Romans 
 were ^ gathering grain in the only place from which the grain 
 had not been reaped, the barbarians, who were lying in wait 
 here, had suddenly attacked " them,^ and ° were throwing 
 them^ into great confusion. 
 
 1. Form the noun from iubeS. 4, cf. 25 : i. 
 
 2. 156, a; H. &B. 288,3; H- 5i7 ; S- Omit. 
 
 G. 219; B. 256, 1. 6. cf. 25: 3. 
 
 3. cf. II: 7 : I. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIII 
 
 I. In battle the charioteers were accustomed at first to 
 ride rapidly about, that the mere terror occasioned by the 
 horses'' might throw the ranks of the enemy into confusion. 
 2. Then they would leave'' the warriors' to fight on foot, 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK IV 79 
 
 and, withdrawing from the battle a little themselves, would 
 await ^ the issue of the engagement. 3. To these the former 
 withdrew^ if they were pressed too hard.^ 4. And their 
 horses were so welF trained that they could check them 
 when at full speed, and turn them instantly. 
 
 1. 343, note I ; H. & B. 344 ; H. 3. milites. 
 
 440, I ; G. 363, I i B. 199. 4. vehementer. 291, a; H. & B. 
 
 2. 470; H. & B. 484; H. 534, 3; 241, 2; H. 498; B. 240, I. 
 G. 231 ; B. 260, 2. 5. so well = adeo. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIV 
 
 I. Our men were so much disturbed by the novel kind 
 of fighting that they did not recover from their fright till ^ 
 Caesar arrived. 2. Meanwhile storms very fortunately 
 kept the barbarians from attacking '^ the Romans for several 
 days. 3. But, after sending messengers all around to tell 
 the people how' few soldiers Caesar had, they quickly 
 gathered a large number of infantry and cavalry for the 
 purpose of driving the Romans from their camp. 
 
 I. not . . till = not sooner . . .s. cf. Ill: n : i. 
 than = non prius . . . quam. 3. quam. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXV 
 
 I. On the previous day the enemy, when repulsed, had 
 escaped danger by their quickness of flight, yet Caesar de- 
 cided that the best thing to be done ^ was to draw up his 
 legions before the camp and give battle. 2. When this was 
 done, the enemy turned about and began to flee. 3. And 
 the Romans following them ^ killed as many as they could, 
 then set fire to all their buildings far and wide. 
 
 .1. 510; H. &B. 619, i; H. 635; 2. cf. II: 15: 3. 
 G. 436; B. 340, 2. 
 
8o LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVI 
 
 I. When deputies now came to Caesar about peace, he 
 demanded that they should bring hostages to him on the 
 continent.^ 2. Then, since the time of the equinox was near, 
 he started for the continent himself, while the weather^ was 
 favorable, that he might not expose a voyage to the stormy 
 season. 3. And, although his ships were not strong, they all 
 reached the same harbor in safety except two transports. 
 
 X. 428,'j;H. &B.450, c;H. 418, 1 ; 2. 419; H. & B. 421 ; H. 489; G. 
 G. 337, 6; B. 182, 2, b. 409; B. 227. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVII 
 
 I. As soon as Caesar's men were landed, they started for 
 the camp, but fell in with ■• a small party of the Morini, who 
 wished to kill them in hopes of ^ booty. 2. When they saw 
 that the Romans would not lay down their arms, and' were 
 forming a circle so as to defend themselves, they raised a 
 shout, at* which about six thousand men rallied* to their 
 assistance. 3. While the legions were bravely sustaining 
 the enemy's attack, Caesar, who had learned through messen- 
 gers what was going on, sent all his cavalry there. 4. And 
 on their arrival the enemy, seeing that many of their men 
 were being killed, became ^ panic-stricken " and * threw away 
 their arms. 
 
 1. obvenio. 4. at . . . rally = ad . . convenio. 
 
 2. in hopes of = causa. 5. Omit. 
 
 3. Use que. cf. II: 12: 4. 6. perterritus. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVIII 
 
 I. When Caesar^ led his legions back from Britain, he 
 found that the Morini had reopened the war. 2. But,'' 
 since they could not now use the swamps as a refuge, 
 they ^ quickly surrendered to Labienus. 3. Meanwhile the 
 
CAESAR: GALLIC WAR, BOOK IV 8 1 
 
 Menapii, after Titurius and Cotta had set fire to their 
 houses, since they had no other place in which to hide, had 
 sought the dense woods. 4. And now Caesar put all his 
 legions into winter quarters, and ' sent letters about his 
 victories to the senate at Rome.* 
 
 1. cf. II : 30: 1. 3. Observe the Latin style. 
 
 2. cf. II: 15: 3, and the text. 4. cf. 36: i. 
 
CICERO 
 
 FIRST ORATION AGAINST CATILINE 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 I. The consuls had long been baffled by Catiline's frenzy 
 and audacity. 2. And now the senators, who had learned 
 what plan^ he had formed, had met at night in a strongly 
 fortified place. 3. Yet Catiline was not at all disturbed. 
 4. Nay, rather each one of the senators was being marked 
 out for assassination by this daring man, who ought himself 
 long before to have been put'^ to death. 5. Once so dan- 
 gerous a citizen would have been restrained ° by the most 
 vigorous* punishment. 
 
 1. 346; H. &B. 346; H. 441; G. 3. 521; H. &B. 518; H. 553,2; 
 371 ; B. 201. G. 600; B. 305. 
 
 2. 486, a; H. & B. p. 311, ftn. 2; 4. vigorous = acer. 
 H. 618, 2 ; G. 280, I ; B. 270, 2. 
 
 CHAPTER 11 
 
 I. The senate had decreed, October 21,^ that the consuls 
 should see that the state suffer no harm. 2. Nevertheless 
 Catiline did not lay aside his audacity, though once many 
 men of famous ancestry^ had been put to death in accord- 
 ance with a similar decree. 3. And there were men' who, 
 because Catiline's forces were increasing daily, condemned* 
 
 83 
 
84 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 the consuls for inaction.^ 4. Yet ^ Cicero was not induced 
 to put Catiline to death so long as there was any one ^ who, 
 if he should do * this, would say he was arbitrary.^ 
 
 1. 631, a-d ; H. & B. 664, 665 ; H. 5. 352 ; H. & B. 343 ; H. 4567 G. 
 754; G. p. 491 ; B. 371. 378 ; B. 208, 2. 
 
 2. 415; H. & B. 443; H. 473, 2; 6. verum. 
 
 G. 400 ; B. 224. 7. any one = any one at all = 
 
 3. Omit. See 307, c; H. & B. quisquam. 311; H. & B. 276, 
 284; H. 399, 4; G. 621; B. 251. 7; H. 513; G. 317; B. 252, 4. 
 
 4. 535; H. & B. 517, 2; H. 591, 8. Use the pluperf. subj. Why? 
 I; G. 631, 2; B. 283. 9. dissolutus. 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 
 I. Catiline could expect nothing further when the words 
 of the conspirators could not^ be kept within the walls of 
 a private house even.^ 2. In fact^ Catiline could form no* 
 plan which Cicero did not plainly find out. 3. He even* 
 knew the very day on which Catiline was intending * to mur- 
 der the optimates. 4. Could " Cicero wish anything ' more ? 
 
 5. And yet Catiline did not* change his purpose, nor forget 
 the slaughter" of the chief men of Rome. 6. For, though 
 many had fled to protect^" themselves, he was content with 
 the slaughter of the rest. 
 
 1. ne . . . quidem. 599, b; H. & 7. 310, a; H. & B. 276, i ; H. 512, 
 B. 302; H. 656, 2; G. 448, 2; I ; 0.315; B. 252. 
 
 B. 347, I. 8. and . not = neque; yet = 
 
 2. immo vero. tamen. 328, a ; H. & B. 307, 
 
 3. form a plan = molior. 390, c ; 3, a ; H. 656, 4 ; G. 480 ; B. 
 H. & B. 396, 2 ; H. 409, I ; G. 341, d. 
 
 333 ; B. 1 76, 2. 9. 350, b ; H. & B. 350 ; H. 454 ; 
 
 4. 298, b ; H. & B. 270, a ; H. 508, G. 376 ; B. 206, b. 
 
 3; G. 310; B.-248. 10. 504, b and c; H. & B. 614; 
 
 5. 1 58, b ; H. & B. 600, 2 ; H. 236 ; H. 626, 3 ; G. 428, rem. i ; B. 
 G. 247, i; B. 115. 339, 5. 
 
 6. 332, b;H.&B. 23i,d;H. 378; 
 G. 456; B. 162, b. 
 
CICERO: FIRST ORATION AGAINST CATILINE 85 
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 
 I. Cicero kept very sharp watch for the safety of the state. 
 2. For Catiline could not deny that there were in the senate 
 some'' who were his associates in crime. 3. And he had 
 not only determined ^ to murder the senators and lead an 
 army against the city, but had selected men' to assassi- 
 nate' the consul. 4. But Cicero, having found* out all these 
 things, shut out of his house ^ those whom Catiline sent to 
 him to pay their respects.^ 
 
 1. Omit, or use nonnuUi. cf . 2 : 4; G. 410, rem. i; B. 356, 2, 
 3 and 4. b and c. 
 
 2. statuo. 5. 427, I ; H. & B. 451 ; H. 462 ; 
 
 3. cf. 2 : 3. And see 531, 2; H. & G. 390, 2 ; B. 229, b. 
 
 B. 502, 2 ; H. 590 ; G. 630 ; B. 6. 509 ; H. & B. 618 ; H. 633 ; G. 
 282, ^. 435 i B. 340. 
 
 4. 493, 2 ; H. & B. 602, I ; H. 640, 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 I. As long as Catiline aimed at the life of the consul, 
 Cicero opposed him by himself, and felt grateful to the gods 
 because he had escaped so dreadful an enemy. 2. But now 
 at last^ he was ijnwilling that Catiline should dwelP longer 
 in the city which he was dooming to destruction. 3. And 
 so, since he did not yet think it best to put Catiline to 
 death, — which properly belonged to' the authority which 
 was conferred upon him October 2 1, — he urged him to with- 
 draw' from the city, and take all of his followers^ with him. 
 
 1. iam. 4- 563 ; H. & B. 502, 3, a; H. 564, 
 
 2. versor. I; G. 546; B. 295, 1. 
 
 3. Imitate the text. 349. a; H. & 5. 302, d; H. & B. 249; H. 503, 
 B. 354; H. 435. 4; G. 374; B. 4! G. 204, i; B. 236. 
 
 204, 2. 
 
86 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 
 I. Do^ you hesitate to go into exile when all the citizens 
 know ^ what marks of dishonor and shame are branded ' upon 
 your life? 2. But I must pass over^ the private disgraces 
 of a man ^ who we all know came into the comitium for the 
 sake ° of plunging a dagger into the body of the consul. 
 3. And this^ indeed seemed to be so aimed that it could 
 not be avoided. 4. But the good fortune of the Roman 
 people thwarted your fury and wrenched the dagger from 
 your ' hands. 
 
 1. cf. 3:6. 5. is. 297, d; H. & B. 271, I; 
 
 2. 549; H. & B. 525; H. 598; G. H. 508; G. 308; B. 247, i. 
 586; B. 286, 2. 6. causa. 504, b ; H. & B. 612, i; 
 
 3. 574; H. & B. 537, b ; H. 649, II ; H. 626 ; G. 428, 2 ; B. 338, i, c. 
 G. 467; B. 300. 7. cf. Caes. II: 15: 3. 
 
 4. cf. Caes. II : 20 : i. 8. 377 ; H. & B. 368 ; H. 425, 4, 
 
 note ; G. 350 ; B. 188. 
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 
 I. If I say^ that you, Catiline, ought to leave the city, do 
 I seem to be unjust? 2. If no one of your friends saluted^ 
 you when you came into the senate, did you not recognize 
 their silence to be just and deserved ? 3. If your fellow- 
 citizens, whose death you have long been meditating,^ shall ^ 
 become alarmed and order you arrested, will not their hatred 
 move you at all ? 4. If your country should ° become wholly 
 alarmed on account of you, without whom no crime has been 
 committed for several years, would you not withdraw and 
 free her from this fear? 5. Surely, if my country feared* 
 and hated" me, and I could not succeed in breaking down 
 this fear, I would leave the city. 6. And you would have * 
 
CICERO: FIRST ORATION AGAINST CATILINE 87 
 
 left the city long ago, if you had regarded ' the feelings of 
 your countrymen.' 
 
 1. 515; H. & B. 579; H. 574, 2; 5. 466; H. & B. 485; H. 533, i; 
 G. 595 ; B. 302. G. 230; B. 259, 4. 
 
 2. 516, I, a and c; H. & B. 579, a; 6. 205, b; H. & B. 199; H. 299, 
 H. 574, 2 ; G. 595 ; B. 302. 2 ; G. 175, 5 ; B. 133, 2. 
 
 3. 516, 2, band c; H. & B. 580; 7. sequor. 
 H. 576 ; G. 596 ; B. 303. 8. civis. 
 
 4. 517; H. & B. 581; H. 579, i; 
 G. 597 ; B. 304. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 
 1. Cicero said to Catiline that if the country should talk'' 
 with him, as he had said,^ she ought ^ to prevail. 2. That 
 a man who had himself asked to be protected at the house 
 of his friends deserved to be in prison. 3. And he asked 
 why, if he could ^ not die with resignation, he hesitated" to 
 leave the city. 4. Catiline replied that, if the senate should 
 decree* that it was best that he should go' into exile, he 
 would obey. 5. Then Cicero ordered him to depart, saying" 
 that if he had said this to an honorable man, the senate 
 would have laid ' violent hands ' upon him. 6. But ^ in regard 
 to Catiline they approved and would gladly" escort" him 
 to the gates of the city. 
 
 1. would deserve, debeS. 589, i, 5. 454; H. &B. 585; H.615; G. 
 
 2, a ; H. & B. 534, b ; H. 646, 535 ; B. 330. 
 
 1 ; G. 656, I and 2; B. 319. 6. Omit. See Caes. 1:9:4. 
 
 2. 589, I ; H. & B. 534, 2 ; H. 646; 7. 589, b, i and 2 ; H. & B. 581, b, 
 G. 656, i; B. 319, ^. i;H.647; G.656,2; B. 321, _-. 
 
 3. 574; H. & B. 537, b; H. 646, 8. Observe the hendiadys. 
 
 2 ■ G. 467 ; B. 315. 9- Use autem to show contrast. 
 
 4. cf. 7: 2, and I above. See also cf. Caes. 1 : 25 : 3. 
 484, b and c ; H. & B. 476; H. 10. libenter. 
 
 545, II, 2 I G. 510; B. 319, a. II. proseqaor. 
 
88 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 
 I. That Catiline should go into exile at the warning of 
 the consul was not to be expected, for he was not the man ' 
 to be recalled ^ from his mad purpose by fear or reason. 
 2. And Cicero realized that, if he should do" this, a storm 
 of hatred would threaten him. 3. Yet he thought it worth 
 while * to endure odium, provided only ^ he could remove the 
 danger from the state. 4. But he preferred that Catiline 
 should go * to Forum Aurelium, where armed men were 
 waiting for him, and whither ' the silver eagle had been sent. 
 
 1. cf. 6:5. 5. 528; H. & B. 529; H. 587; G. 
 
 2. 535; H. & B. 517, 2; H. 591, 573; B. 310. 
 
 I ; G. 631, 2 ; B. 2S3. 6. 563, b ; H. & B. 511, 2 ; H. 565 ; 
 
 3. cf. 8:4. G. 546 ; B. 296. 
 
 4. 417; H. & B. 356; H. 448, I ; 7. quo. cf. Caes. II: 3: 1. 
 G. 380, rem.; B. 203-, 4. 
 
 CHAPTER X 
 
 I. Cicero had an opportunity^ to show'' that fine power 
 of speech ^ for which nature had trained him. 2. For at the 
 time when he ordered ' Catiline to depart many thought that 
 Catiline was being unjustly' driven from the city. 3. But 
 from * the speech of Cicero all saw that Catiline had got 
 together a company of desperate men, for the sake of a 
 wicked war. 4. With what pleasure did Cicero rejoice, 
 when he saw no follower ^ of Catiline in the city ! 
 
 1. Observe the text. cf. 2 : 3 3. 545; H. & B. 550, a; H. 601; 
 and 4. G. 580; B. 288, A. 
 
 2. dicendi facultas. 4. ex. 
 
 S- comes or socius. 
 
CICERO: FIRST ORATION AGAINST CATILINE 89 
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 
 I. But Cicero had to conciliate'^ those also who thought 
 he was not sending from the city, but letting loose against the 
 city, one ^ whom he had found to be the instigator of crimi- 
 nals. 2. For he knew that the Roman people, who had raised 
 him so early to the highest power, would condemn him for 
 inactivity and remissness ^ if he should not order ^ the leader 
 of the conspiracy to be arrested. 3. And he dreaded the 
 reproach of inactivity no less than that^ of severity. 
 
 1. plac5. cf. Caes. II : 20: I. 476; H. 574, 2; 646, i; 545, 
 
 2. cf. 6:5. II, 2 ; G. 595 ; 656, I and 2 ; 
 
 3. 352; H. &B. 343; H. 456; G. 510; B. 302; 319; 319, ■^. 
 378; B. 208. S- 297, f, note; H. & B. 273, b; 
 
 4. 516, i.aandc; 589, i, i:, a ; 484, H. 508, i ; G. 308, 3 ; B. 247, 3. 
 b and c ; H. & B. 579, a ; 534, b ; 
 
 CHAPTER XII 
 
 I . And so to those who were afraid that some danger was 
 impending, Cicero replied that he did not think it best to 
 put Catiline to death, because there were ^ some even in the 
 senate who did not believe that a conspiracy was forming. 
 2. But, if Catiline should go^ to the camp of Manlius, and 
 gather there all his followers, everybody " would acknowledge 
 the danger. 3. Then not only could Catiline be put to 
 death, but the root and seed of all evils could be destroyed. 
 
 I. 592, 3 ; H. & B. 535, 2, a ; H. 2. cf. 11 : 4. 
 643; G. 541 ; B. 286, I. 3. omnes. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII 
 
 I. Cicero knew that, if he should remove only Catiline, 
 although he might perhaps relieve the state from fear for a- 
 short time, yet the long-standing ^ fury would in some way 
 break out at another time. 2. And so he urged ^ Catiline 
 
90 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 and those who had joined together ' in criminal compact to 
 withdraw from the city. 3. Then, promising to be watch- 
 ful himself, and imploring* Jupiter to defend the city from 
 Catiline and his allies, he finished his speech and sat down.^ ' 
 
 1. long-standing = vetus. 4. imploro. 493, 2 ; H. & B. 602, 
 
 2. hortor. i ; H. 640, 4; G. 410, rem. i ; 
 
 3. to join together = se coniungere. B. 356, 2, b and c. 
 
 5. adsido. 
 
 SECOND ORATION AGAINST CATILINE 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 I. When at last Cicero drove Catiline out of the city by 
 his words, he unquestionably removed the danger from the 
 forum and the senate-house. 2. For regular warfare was 
 now to be" waged ^ openly. 3. Catiline himself was almost 
 overwhelmed with grief because he had been compelled to 
 leave the city, with Cicero alive ^ and the senators unharmed. 
 4. When he turned his eyes back toward the city which he 
 was leaving, not in flames' as he wished, and realized that 
 Cicero had wrenched from his ' hand the bloodless sword, 
 he was furious. 
 
 1. 196; H. & B. 162; H. 237 ; G. 3. Use the present participle of 
 129; B. 115. conflagro. Why? 
 
 2. 419, a; H. & B. 421; H. 489; 4. cf . 1 : 6: 8. 
 G. 409; B. 227, I. 
 
 CHAPTER 11 
 
 I. Although some ^ blamed Cicero for ^ letting Catiline go, 
 he did not think he would remove the danger if he should 
 put to death Catiline alone. 2. For" not* all of the senators 
 even* credited what he had laid before ^ the senate. 3. And 
 
CICERO: SECOND ORATION AGAINST CATILINE 91 
 
 they would not have defended " him, if he had arrested Cati- 
 line. 4. Cicero himself was troubled rather' because all 
 Catiline's forces did not leave the city with him.' 
 
 1. some (certain ones) = quidam. g. lay before = ad . . . defero. 
 
 2. cf. I: 12 : I. 6. cf. 1:7:4. 
 
 3. nam. 7. magis. 
 
 4. cf. I: 3: I. 8. not se. Why.' 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 
 1. The forces which Catiline had with him were greatly 
 to be despised ^ in comparison with the army of the Romans. 
 2. And Cicero felt that, if he should show^ these the edict 
 of the praetor, they would collapse. 3. But' how greatly 
 Cicero thought those * who remained in the city were to be 
 feared^ may be understood from the fact that he was troubled 
 because they did not flee, although he had disclosed all their 
 plans in the senate. 
 
 1. cf. I : I . still more emphatic by placing it 
 
 2. cf . I : 1 1 : 4. first. Find a model for the order 
 
 3. cf . 1 : 8 : 9. and construction of this whole 
 
 4. Use ille, which may be made sentence in text of chapter II. 
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 
 I. Cicero thought that the republic was fortunate because 
 Catiline had become alarmed and fled from the city, and all 
 could now see his designs. 2. And he hoped that all the 
 rabble ^ of the city would follow him so that the city might 
 be relieved of the incredible league of crime. 3. For^ there 
 was no assassin, no corrupt person, even ' in the lowest 
 quarter* of the city, who was not living on the most inti- 
 mate terms with Catiline. 
 
 1. sentlna. 3- 327. i ; H. & B. 298, 2, a ; H. 
 
 2. enim. 599, b ; H. & B. 311, 6; 656, 2; G. 448, 2 ; B. 347, 2. 
 H. 661, 'i ; G. 484, rem. ; B. 4. infimus locus. 
 
 35°. 8. 
 
92 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 I. If the fickle and worthless only were^ intimate with 
 Catiline, he could be endured, but who can '^ endure that 
 such men should boast' that Catiline is a brave man, when 
 he thinks of nothing but assassination and plunder ? 2. But 
 of course * those whose credit has failed because they have 
 squandered their property will extol* him who promises them 
 •the reward of plunder. 3. If we must contend with these 
 men in the city, we will contend by whatever means we can ; 
 and they must expect the punishment which has long been 
 due their crime and lawlessness. 
 
 1. cf . 1 : 7 : 4. 3. praedico. 
 
 2. 444; H. & B. 517, I; H. 557; 4. videlicet. 
 G. 259; B. 277. 5. laudo. 
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 
 I. Since some said that Cicero '^ drove Catiline into exile 
 by the speech which he made ^ in the senate, November 8, 
 he showed that before " he even called the senate together 
 Catiline had mapped out an entire scheme of war, and had 
 sent forward the silver eagle to the field of Faesulae,* where 
 the camp of Manlius ^ was waiting for him as leader. 2. He 
 also * said that Catiline had tried to kill hirri in his own 
 house. 3. And so, when he convened the senate and Cati- 
 line entered the senate-house, no senator saluted him, which 
 showed" that they looked upon him already as a most dan- 
 gerous enemy. 
 
 1. Cicero, since some, etc. 601, a; 4. 343,a,and249; H.&B. 210,4; H. 
 H.&B.626; H.684; B.3Si,i:. 353; G.182, 5; B. 152, I and 3. 
 
 2. make a speech = verba facio, 5. 298, b ; H. & B. 270, a ; H. 508, 
 or oratio habeo. 3; G. 310; B. 248, i. 
 
 3. priusquam. cf. Caes. II : 12 : i. 6. signified. 
 
CICERO: SECOND ORATION AGAINST CATILINE 93 
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 
 I. Cicero now did not so much fear as he desired that 
 Catiline would lead an enemy against the city. 2. For he 
 understood that, if Catiline should change his purpose and 
 go into exile, some would say that he had driven him into 
 exile by threats of violence. 3. And yet, if he had put Cati- 
 line to death, the same ones would have said that he was a 
 tyrant. 4. So the unfortunate condition oJE Cicero's consul- 
 ship was, that,^ whether ^ Catiline should go into exile or ^ be 
 put to death for = conspiring against the state, he would have 
 to endure a storm of odium. 
 
 1. 570; H. & B. 521, 3, note; H. 2. sive . . . sive. 
 
 571,4; G. 557; B. 297, 3. 3. for = because he, etc. cf. I: 
 
 12 : I. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 
 I. But since Catiline had gone from Rome with the con- 
 suls alive, Cicero did not fear him so much as those who 
 remained. 2. And one class even of these he hoped to be 
 able to win^ over to the state in some''' way. 3. For they 
 were rich and were likely to be ' better citizens, if they could 
 be induced to pay* their heavy debts with the income of their 
 own estates and not ° wait for new accounts from Catiline. 
 
 X. conciIi5 or placo. 5. For " and not " or " nor " in 
 
 2. some (very indefinite) = aliquis. prohibitions, and clauses of 
 cf . 2 : I. purpose or exhortation, use 
 
 3. cf . r : 3 : 5. neve, before a consonant usu- 
 
 4. solvo. cf . 1 : 5: 4. ally shortened to neu. cf. Caes. 
 
 I: 26: 4. 
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 
 I. The second class Cicero warned not to expect the 
 honors which they were attempting to secure, because not 
 only all good men but the immortal gods were defending the 
 
94 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 city. 2. And, even if they should become kings or consuls, 
 they could only hope to rule a city in ashes.^ 3. The third 
 class, which consisted '■' of Sulla's colonists, was expecting 
 the old-time plunder. 4. But good citizens who remembered 
 Sulla's proscriptions were not likely now to endure such' 
 robbery. 
 
 1. Use the perf. participle of con- 2. Use sum with pred. gen. 
 flagi5. cf. 1:3. 3. iste. 
 
 CHAPTER X 
 
 I. Let the fourth class, which is oppressed by old debts 
 which they will never pay, gather ^ in the camp of the enemy, 
 in order that not only they, but even ^ Catiline, may not ^ 
 perish alone. 2. In short, let all assassins and criminals, 
 who belong' peculiarly to Catiline, join with him and die in 
 their reckless frenzy,* that this nursery of Catilines may be 
 removed ^ from the city. 
 
 I. 439; H. & B. SOI, 3 ; H. 559, 3. cf. I : 5 : 3. 
 
 z; G. 263, 3; B. 275. 4. furor etscelus. cf. i: 8: 8. 
 
 2.,cf. I: 3: I. 5. deduc5. 
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 
 I. Cicero thought the war was little^ to be feared," if the 
 Roman generals would lead out the flower and strength of 
 Italy against that ruffian. 2. For the troops and equip- 
 ments in the city ° were not to be compared with the des- 
 titution of Catiline, who lacked a well-trained army* and 
 revenues. 3. Secondly, honor, bravery and ^ prudence were 
 about to contend with baseness, cowardice, rashness. 
 
 I. paulum. 4. a well-trained army = exercitus. 
 
 ^. 500; H. & B. 162 ; H. 237 ; G. 5. 323, bj H. & B. 305, a; H. 657, 
 
 251; B. 115. 6; G. 481, 2; B. 341, 4, a. 
 
 3. urbanus. cf . 6 : 4. 
 
CICERO: SECOND ORATION AGAINST CATILINE 95 
 
 CHAPTER XII 
 
 I. Cicero, having provided for the safety of the city, sent 
 Metellus, who was thought to be a very trustworthy man, 
 to check all of Catiline's movements outside of the city. 
 2. Then he warned those who had remained at Rome that 
 they must keep quiet or be off.'' 3. For the consuls were 
 on the watch, and the prison was waiting for any one ^ who 
 should make a move against the safety of the city. 
 
 I. exeo. cf . Caes. II : 20 : i . See 2. cf . 1 : 2 : 3. 
 also 208, d ; H. & B. 201, c ; H. 
 302,7; G. 251, 2; B. 138, IV. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII 
 
 I. Cicero promised so to manage this treacherous war 
 as a civilian that all good men would be safe. 2. For he 
 thought that the gods, who had formerly defended the 
 Roman people from a foreign foe, would now defend the 
 city and their own temples. 3. And so, relying' on their 
 help, he was confident that by the punishment of a few 
 wicked men he would quell all uprisings. 
 
 1. 231, a; H. &B. 432 ; H. 476, l; G. 401, note 6; B. 218,3. 
 
96 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 THIRD ORATION AGAINST CATILINE 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 I. Cicero now thought that, since by his efEorts the city 
 had been rescued from the greatest perils, he deserved to be 
 in no less honor with the Roman people than Romulus him- 
 self. 2. For the conditions of preserving the state. had been 
 perilous^ to the consul, since he had to contend^ with reck- 
 less conspirators, who had already unsheathed the sword, 
 and were about to place fires around the whole city. 3. He 
 now, therefore, explained to his fellow-citizens how he had 
 tracked out. and checked the plans of Catiline, the leader 
 of the conspiracy. 
 
 I. 245; H. & B. 209, 2; H. 346; 2. cf. Caes. 11: 20 ; 1. 
 G. 182, 10; B. 151, 3. 
 
 CHAPTER II 
 
 I. Since many confederates of Catiline did not go out of 
 the city at the time when Catiline hurried off,-' Cicero desired 
 to show the extraordinary danger, so that the people might 
 provide for their own safety. 2. And at last an opportunity, 
 which he had long been desiring,^ was offered to him. 
 3. For Lentulus had made overtures' to the ambassadors of 
 the Allobroges and sent letters by them into Gaul. 4. And 
 so Cicero sent men* to the Mulvian bridge, which the Allo- 
 broges were to cross,* to arrest the ambassadors and' deliver " 
 the letters to him. 
 
 1. erumpo. cf. 1 : 10 : 3. 
 
 4- 
 
 cf. 1 : 2 : 3. 
 
 
 2. 471. b; H. &B. 48s; H. 535; 
 
 S- 
 
 499, I ; H. & B. 607 ; 
 
 H. 236; 
 
 G. 234; B. 260, 4. 
 
 
 G. 129; B. 115. 
 
 
 3. hadmade overtures = one word. 
 
 6. 
 
 trado. 
 
 
CICERO: THIRD ORATION AGAINST CATILINE 97 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 
 I. In the morning the consul called the senate together 
 and sent for^ the conspirators, who did not yet know that 
 the letters had been seized. 2. Then, contrary to the advice 
 of many illustrious men who feared that it might bring on 
 too great^ excitement, he laid the whole matter before the 
 crowded senate, even before he opened the letters. 3. Mean- 
 while the praetor, who had been sent to the house' of Cethe- 
 gus, returned with many weapons which he found there. 
 
 1. arcesso. 3. aedes. 107; H. & B. 105; H. 
 
 2. 291, a ; H. & B. 241, 2 ; H. 498 ; 140 ; G. 69, C ; B. 61. 
 B. 240, I. 
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 
 I. The letters showed that the conspirators were about to 
 set fire to the city and a'ssassinate as many of the citizens as 
 possible. 2. The leaders in the city,^ too, were on hand 
 to join Catiline, who was leading an army against the 
 city. 3. And- the Gauls had been directed to unite their 
 cavalry in Italy with the infantry which the conspirators 
 were going to send there. ^ 4. Lentulus, who thought he 
 was destined to become ' king after this year, thought it 
 best that the burning of the city take place before the first* 
 of January.^ 
 
 1. cf . II ; 6 : 4. 3. according to the predictions of 
 
 2. cf. Caes. II : 3 : I. the Sibyl was to be. cf. I : 3 : 5. 
 
 4. Kalendae. 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 I. To be brief,' all the accused, though at first each made 
 some ^ impudent reply, were so conscience-stricken when 
 the seals and handwriting were shown, that they either 
 became silent or confessed. 2. And not only the letters 
 
98 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 and handwriting but their expression and glance^' betrayed 
 them. 3. These ought alone to have been* most certain evi- 
 dences of guilt. 4. But the force of conscience was so great 
 that even^ Lentulus, whom nobody surpassed in impudence, 
 did not' deny that he had said something to the Gauls about 
 the rule and control of the city. 
 
 i. 532 ; H. & B. 502, 2, c ; H. 568, 3. ocuH. 
 
 4i G. 545, rem. 3; B. 282, 4. 4. 486, a; H. & B. p. 311, ftn. 2; 
 2. 390, c ; H. & B. 396, 2 ; H. 409, H. 618, 2 ; G. 280, I ; B. 270, 2. 
 
 I : G- 333 ; B. 176, 2, a. 5. cf. 1 : 3 : I. 
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 
 I . The evidence which was brought out. was so decisive ^ 
 that the senate thanked Cicero for^ arresting the conspirators 
 and exposing their plans. 2. And even a thanksgiving on 
 his account they decreed to the gods, under whose guidance 
 he had freed the city from danger. 3. They thought that, 
 if nine of the most wicked conspirators should be punished, 
 the others could be reformed. 4. And, that they" might 
 have no * scruples ^ in punishing a praetor, they compelled 
 Lentulus to resign his office. 
 
 1. certus. 4. that ... no = that not any. 
 
 2. cf. II : 7:3, and 1 : 12 : i. 538 and 310, a; H. & B. 276, i ; 
 
 3. 373; H. &B. 374; H. 430; G. H. i86; 6.315; B. 252, i. 
 349; B. 190. 5. religio (singular). 
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 
 I. Cicero thought that, since he had driven Catiline from 
 the city so peacefully and quietly,-"^ he would not have to fight 
 with the rest, who were much'' less to be feared. 2. Catiline 
 was exceedingly keen' and shrewd. 3. He knew how to 
 
CICERO: THIRD ORATION AGAINST CATILINE 99 
 
 approach men and how to test them. 4. And yet,, if he 
 instructed * any one ^ to do something,* he never ' ceased to 
 watch and labor himself tilP it was accomphshed. 5. If he 
 had not left the city, Cicero would not so easily have got 
 possession of the letters and thwarted the plans of the 
 conspirators. 
 
 X. 412, a; H. &B. 445, 3; H.473, 5. quis. 310, a; H. & B. 276, I ; 
 
 3; G. 399; B. 220, I. H. 186; G. 315; B. 252, I. 
 
 2. 414; H. &B. 424; H. 479; G. 6. something, but not anything/o;-- 
 403; B. 223. ticu/ar = ahqais. cf. II: 8: 2. 
 
 3. cf. Caes. I: 2: 1. 7. cf. Caes. IV: 2: 2. 
 
 4. 518, b; H. & B. 579; H. 578, 8. priusquam. 
 I ; G. S9S ; B. 302, 3. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 
 I. Not to speak^ of all the plans which Cicero thwarted 
 during his consulship, it must be said that he accomplished 
 what seems scarcely to have belonged to one man.^ 2. He 
 himself thought the gods had lent him aid. 3. For not 
 only meteors and earthquakes, but especially the striking by 
 lightning of the statue' of Romulus and the melting of the 
 law tablets" had indicated that the government would be 
 destroyed,* unless the gods should be appeased in some* 
 way. 4. And so, for the sake of propitiating them, they had 
 instituted ten days' games, and the consuls had contracted 
 for the statue, of Jove to be made* larger. 
 
 X. cf. 5 : 1. 4. 569, a ; H. & B. 472, c ; H. 619, 
 
 2. belonged to = been of. 343, b; 2 and 3 ; G. 248 ; B. 270, 3. 
 H. & B. 340 ; H. 447 ; G. 366 ; 5. cf. 7 : 6. 
 
 B. 198, 3. 6. cf. Caes. I: 13 : i. 
 
 3. 497; H. &B. 333; H. 636, 4; 
 G. 664, 2 ; B. 337, 5. 
 
lOO LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 -CHAPTER IX 
 
 I. Cicero thought that, if the gods had not controlled all 
 things, the conspirators would not have been brought ^ into 
 the temple of Concord on the very day that the statue of 
 Jupiter was turned toward the senate-house. 2. Nor did he 
 wish to take so much praise to himself as to deny that he 
 had got at the proofs of the conspirators under the guidance 
 of the gods.^ 3. He believed, too, that it was due to provi- 
 dence that those foreigners, to whom Lentulus and the rest 
 had intrusted the letters, did not keep silent ' and accept 
 the power which patricians of Rome offered them. 
 
 ±. 589, b, 3 ; H. & B. 581, b, I ; 3. it came about providentially 
 472, b; H. 647, 2; G. 248, 3; that they should keep silent. 
 
 B. 321, 2, b. 569, 2; H. & B. 521, 3, a; H. 
 
 2. 419, a; H. & B. 421 ; H. 489; 571, i ; G. 553, 3 ; B. 297, 2. 
 
 G. 409; B. 227, I. 
 
 CHAPTER X 
 
 I . Having therefore exhorted the citizens to celebrate the 
 games which the senate had decreed to the gods, Cicero 
 compared the conspiracy of Catiline with the civil dissen- 
 sions of Sulla and Marius, who had wished merely^ to change 
 the government. 2. He showed that, although Catiline had 
 determined to burn as much of the city and kill as many ^ 
 of the citizens as' he could, the citizens had all been saved 
 under his leadership, whereas * those civil disputes had all 
 been settled by the slaughter of men who were the lights 
 of the state. 
 
 i. modo, postpositive. 3. quantus. 308, h; H. & B. 144; 
 
 2. as many = as great a part = H. 189 ; G. 642. 
 
 tantus. 4. autem. cf. 1 : 8 : g. 
 
CICERO: THIRD ORATION AGAINST CATILINE lOI 
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 
 I. Cicero now desired not so much^ the help of Roman 
 citizens as-' the praise of posterity. 2. And it is not neces- 
 sary even to say that he gained a fame such'' as^ a less 
 worthy man could not havS secured.' 3. For the memory 
 of his consulship has been extended for nearly two thousand 
 years, and his orations have long been firmly established^ 
 in our courses ° of study.^ 4. And this ' fact is a silent 
 monument to the memory of the man* who preserved the 
 seat of government not by war but by speech. 
 
 1. tam . . quam. 323, g. 5. ratio. 
 
 2. eius modi quae. 6. disciplina. 
 
 3. cf. 5:4. 7. cf. Caes. II: 15: 3. 
 
 4. inveterasco. cf. 1 : 7 : 5. 8. cf. 1 : 6 : 5. 
 
 CHAPTER XII 
 
 I. Cicero had now secured the lasting good-wilP of all 
 good citizens. 2. And he could acquire nothing more ^ 
 which would help to increase" his fame. 3. And, as it had 
 been his lot* to preserve* his citizens from a bold and 
 criminal conspiracy, so it was now their duty* to see that 
 he should not be harmed* by those who' had the* disposi- 
 tion to' assail him. 4. Especially since it had been the con- 
 dition of his consulship that in repelling' from the citizens 
 the attacks of wicked men he should incur the hostility of 
 those with whom he would have to live in the future. 
 
 i. voluntas. 6- 372 ; H. & B. 364, 2 ; H. 426, 
 
 2. ampUas. 3 ; G. 346, rem. i ; B. 187, 2, b. 
 
 3. help to increase = valeo ad. 7. cf. 6 : 3. 
 
 4. This may be expressed in sev- 8. the to = is . . ut. cf. 
 eral ways. cf. 8 : 2, i : J., and Caes. Ill : 22 : i, and Cic. II : 
 II: 7: I. T- I- 
 
 5. cf. 8: 2, and 1:2. 9- 503; H. & B. 613, i ; H. 631 ; 
 
 G. 427 ; B. 339- 
 
I02 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 FOURTH ORATION AGAINST CATILINE 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 1. When the senate was called together to see what to 
 do with the conspirators, all turned their eyes upon Cicero. 
 
 2. And he was glad to speak,-' for their good-will towards 
 him" in the time of^ danger was very gratifying to him. 
 
 3. Although, since he became consul, he had at no time 
 been free from plots at his own home or in the senate-house, 
 he had rescued the city from flames and secured safety to the 
 senate and* people. 4. And so he was willing to endure 
 cheerfully whatever fortune might put upon him, since his 
 consulship seemed to be destined for^ the safety of his 
 country. 
 
 1. spoke gladly. 3. in the time of = in. How many 
 
 2. 348, c; H. & B. 354, a; H. 440, times is in thus used in this 
 
 2, note I; G. 363, 2, rem.; B. chapter? 
 200,1. 4. Use que. Why? 
 
 5. for = to bring about = ad. 
 
 CHAPTER II 
 
 I. Therefore Cicero exhorted the senators to look out for 
 themselves and not think of him. 2. For he thought if 
 death should befall him he could die with composure, since 
 he had received the favor of the people in so far as he had 
 deserved it. 3. And yet the grief and fear of his family 
 moved him deeply.^ 4. For " he was not " the man to dis- 
 regard' the feelings of those who were dear to him. 5. Nor 
 was he willing that the citizens should perish, even if he should 
 
CICERO: FOURTH ORATION AGAINST CATILINE I03 
 
 not be spared*. to punish the conspirators. 6. For they who 
 had been brought to trial were no common^ criminals. ° 
 
 1. veliementer. 4. relinquo. 
 
 2. Deque enim. cf. 1 : 3 : 8. 5. mediocris. 
 
 3. negleg5. cf. I: 9: i and 2. 6. sceleratus. 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 
 I. Since the accused had confessed and Lentulus had 
 resigned the praetorship, Cicero first stated what he thought 
 belonged to the consul.^ 2. He urged the senate not to 
 delay the case,'^ but to decide at once in whatever way they 
 thought best, saying' that the conspiracy had long been 
 brewing* and was now spreading very rapidly. 3. And see- 
 ing that^ so many were imphcated,^ he laid the evidence^ 
 before them entire.* 4. For, although they had already 
 shown by many decrees what they thought about the fact, 
 he thought they ought to vote ^ upon the punishment, with 
 all the evidence before them.^" 
 
 i. cf. Ill : 8 : 2. 7. indicium. 
 
 2. res. 8. integer. 
 
 3. cf. Caes. 1:9:4. 9. sententiam fero. 
 
 4. Use pres. infin. pass, of misceo. 10. before them = expositus. 419; 
 
 5. seeing that = since. H. & B. 421 ; H. 489; G. 409; 
 
 6. adfinis. B. 227. 
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 
 I. Silanus, who as consul-elect was first asked his opinion,^ 
 thought that the authors of so dreadful a conspiracy were 
 deserving ^ of immediate ° death. 2. But Caesar, while * he 
 did not wish to lighten the penalty or remove pain from 
 the minds and bodies of the wicked men, held the view that 
 imprisonment for life and the confiscation^ of property were 
 the punishments justly" devised for those who wished to 
 deprive others of life for the sake of plunder. 3. Rethought 
 
104 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 it best to distribute the conspirators among, the municipal 
 towns and place guards over them, that they might have no' 
 hope to console * them in their misery. 
 
 1. 396, b ; H. & B. 393, a ; H. 41 1, 5. Use the noun related to publico. 
 1 ; G. 339, 4; B. 178, I, 2. 6. iure. 
 
 2. dignus. 7. cf. Ill : 5 : 4. ' 
 
 3. praesens. 8. cf . 1 : 9 : z. 
 
 4. while = although = cum. 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 I. Cicero thought the same'' as^ Silanus, although he real- 
 ized that it was for his own ' personal* interest that the senate 
 should follow the opinion of Caesar, who was thought to be 
 truly devoted to the people. 2. There was great ' difference 
 between Caesar and those who were away, so as not to cast 
 a vote ^ affecting the life ' of Roman citizens. 3. For Caesar, 
 in condemning * Lentulus to lasting confinement, did not hes- 
 itate to express his opinion ^ about the guilt and punishment 
 of the conspirators, and showed his loyalty^" to the state. 
 4. But Cicero maintained that there was no danger in punish- 
 ing* the conspirators with death on the ground that since they 
 were enemies of the state they were no longer " citizens. 
 
 1. cf. Ill : 5: 2. 5. inultum. 
 
 2. quod. 6. cf . 3 : 9. 
 
 3. 3S5ia; H. & B. 345; H. 449, 7. affecting the life = de capita. 
 
 I ; G. 381 ; B. 21 1, I, a. 8. cf. in . . . puniendo, text of III : 
 
 4. jpsius. 302, e; H. & B. 339, b; 6. Also cf. Ill: 12: 9. 
 H. 393, 6 ; G. 321, 2 ; B. 243, 3. 9. say what he thought, 
 cf. nostro omnium interitu, text 10. voluntas. 
 
 of 1 : 4. II. no longer = not now (iam). 
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 
 I. The consul believed that it was an act^ not of cruelty^ 
 but of humanity to punish these men, in order that they 
 might not burn the city and revel in the slaughter of the 
 citizens. 2. Unless, indeed, he should inflict upon them as 
 
CICERO: FOURTH ORATION AGAINST CATILINE 105 
 
 severe punishment as possible, he felt that he would have 
 to endure^ the imputation of cruelty towards the citizens. 
 3. For in times of ^ party strife^ men had been put to death 
 by the order of the consuls. 4. And so now they had no 
 occasion to fear° that they might pass some" measure too 
 severe' against these men who had assigned to one the burn- 
 ing* of the city, to anotherthe massacre' of the citizens. 
 
 1. Omit. 6. cf. 5 : 1. pass a mea.sure = 
 
 2. cf. Ill : 8 : 2. statuo. 
 
 3. cf. Caes. II : 20 : I. 7. cf. Caes. 1 : 2 : 2. 
 
 4- cf. 1:3. 8. the city to be burned, etc. 500, 
 
 5. partium contentio. 4 ; H. & B. 605, 2 ; H. 638, 3 ; 
 
 G. 43°; B. 337, 7, b, 2. 
 
 CHAPTER Vli 
 
 I. There were some who were afraid that the consul 
 could not^ carry out the measures which the senate might 
 pass.^ 2.; But all the citizens agreed with so much loyalty 
 and enthusiasm for preserving the state that Cicero believed 
 he would have sufficient support. 3. Even the knights and 
 senators had been restored to harmony by the common dan- 
 ger. 4. In short, all orders of freeborn citizens were vying 
 with one another ' in devotion to * the state. 5 . For all wished 
 the possession of liberty to be kept unbroken.^ 
 
 1. 564 ;,H. & B. 502, 4; H. 567, 3. 301, f; H. & B. 266; H. 502, 
 I ; G. 550, 2 ; B. 296, 2. I ; G. 221 ; B. 245. 
 
 2. pluperf. subj. Why? 484, b 4. deamorewithobj. gen. 348; H. 
 and c ; H. & B. 476 ; H. 545, II, & B. 354 ; H. 440, 2 ; G. 363, 
 2; G. 510; B. 269, I, b. 2; B. 200. 
 
 5. perpetuus. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 
 I. There was no freedman, provided he^ had secured his 
 liberty by merit, who was not aroused by the audacity of 
 the conspirators to a defense^ of the city and his own home. 
 
Io6 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 2. Even the slaves wished the republic to stand ; for, if their 
 condition was wretched with the city standing," it was likely 
 to be ^ intolerable if it should be burned." 3. And, of course, 
 all those in shops wished the peaceful course of their daily 
 trade to be secure. 4. Therefore Cicero hoped the senate 
 would not fail the Roman people, whose support was not 
 likely to fail * them. 
 
 1. qui modo. 535, d; H. &B. 529; 3. 420, i, 4; H. & B. 421, 2, 6; 
 H. 587; G. 571 ; B. 310, II. H. 489, I ; G. 410; B. 227, z. 
 
 2. Use gerundive. 4. cf . 1 : 3 : 5. 
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 
 I. Cicero thought that since he had himself been provi- 
 dentially ' preserved from death, he ought to perform his 
 consular duty. 2. And so he implored the senators to see 
 that the liberty, which had been established with-great valor, 
 should never ^ be destroyed. 3. And he showed that it 
 devolved upon them," from whom the country suppliantly 
 asked help, to come to a decision " at once about the penalty 
 of the conspirators, for the sake not of liberty only but their 
 own fortunes and firesides. 
 
 1. divinitus. 3. it devolved upon them to come 
 
 2. that . . . never = that not (ne) to a decision = they must de- 
 . . . ever (unquam). cf. 10 : .;. cide (iudico). 
 
 CHAPTER X 
 
 I. Although, as consul, Cicero had incurred the enmity 
 of many wicked men, he did not repent ■^ of his deeds, for he 
 loved praise more than he feared death. 2. And no one^ 
 of those illustrious generals who had gained eternal renown 
 on land and sea," had done a greater deed than he, — unless, 
 
CICERO: FOURTH ORATION AGAINST CATILINE I07 
 
 indeed, it is a more glorious thing * to subdue a foreign foe 
 than to restore ^ to harmony all classes of citizens distracted ° 
 by dissensions and party strife/ and to repel men, perverted 
 by some rash frenzy,' from the ruin of the state. 
 
 X. 354, b; H.&B. 352, l; H.457; 4. Omit. 
 G. 377; B. 209. 5. revoco. 
 
 2. And no one = nor (nee) ... 6. districtus. 
 
 any one (quisquam). cf. Caes. 7. partium contentio. 
 I: 20: I. 8. dementia ac furor. 
 
 3. 427, a ; H.&B. 449, a ; H. 485, 
 2 ; G. 385, 3, note i ; B. 228, i, c. 
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 
 I. In order to defend the state, Cicero had to sacrifice^ 
 power, riches, triumphs, and other marks of honor. 2. But 
 in place of these things he acquired great praise for his 
 consulship.^ 3. For at his own personal ° danger he exposed 
 the conspiracy and caused* the conspirators to be convicted ^ 
 and executed, — in short, he aroused ° the senate to the 
 defense' of their own altars and firesides, liberty and 
 government, home and native land. 4. And, as long as he 
 lived, he stood by and defended, by his personal influence,* 
 the measures' which'" the senate passed.' 
 
 1. neglego. 6. excito. 
 
 2. cf . 7 : 4 for construction. 7. 506 ; H. & B. 613, i ; H. 628 ; 
 3- cf. 5:4. G. 427, 432 ; B. 339, 2. 
 
 4. etdcio. 8. Observe the text. 
 
 5. conTlnco. 568; H. & B. 521, 3, 9. cf. 6 : 6. 
 
 a; H. 571, 3; G. 553, I ; B. 10. For "the . . . which" cf. Caes. 
 297, I. Ill: 22: I. 
 
THE CITIZENSHIP OF 
 ARCHIAS 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 I. When a boy^ Cicero studied the theory and art of 
 speaking under the direction of Archias.^ 2. And now, 
 since he was engaged ip the practice of speaking, he felt 
 that as far as was in his power he ought to render aid to 
 the one' who had encouraged him to enter upon this course 
 of study. 3. Besides, although he did not possess* the 
 same kind ' of talent as * Archias, he thought that poets and 
 orators were allied to each other by a certain common bond 
 of relationship. 
 
 I. 282, 3d ex.; H. & B. 317, a; 4. I possess (a quality) = in me 
 
 H. 393; G. 321 ; B. 169. est, etc. 
 
 J.. Archiae hortatii, or Archia prae- 5. facultas. 
 
 ceptore. 6. quae. cf. Cat. IV : 5 : 2. 
 3. cf. Cat. 1:6:5. 
 
 CHAPTER 11 
 
 I. Since many literary men were present^ at the trial, 
 Cicero did not adopt the language of the courts,'* but spoke 
 very freely about the study of literature. 2. And, hav- 
 ing shown that Archias was a citizen by law, and for this 
 reason could not be removed from the state, he made it 
 
 108 
 
THE CITIZENSHIP OF ARCHIAS IO9 
 
 evident ' that, even if he were not a citizen, he ought to 
 be adopted, because he was a poet. 
 
 1. adsum. 3. videor. cf. Cat. IV: 11 : 4 and 5. 
 
 2. Use the adjective related to 
 iudicium. cf. Cat. II : 6 : 4. 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 
 I. Archias, who was born at Antioch, in his youth ^ 
 excelled all his companions in his devotion ^ to writing, 
 and became known throughout Asia and Greece. 2. The 
 Greek cities of Italy admired his talent and the man him- 
 self so much that they considered him worthy of citizen- 
 ship. 3. When he came to Rome, the Luculli were the 
 first' to appreciate^ his talent and character. 4. And, since 
 the Luculli received him to their home, the greatest and 
 most illustrious men treated him with the highest respect. 
 5. But it was due^ to his talent and virtue that^ those 
 who admired him in his youth also' esteemed him in his 
 old age. 
 
 1. cf . I : 1 . 5. was due to = erat with the geni- 
 
 2. studium with obj. gen. tive. cf. Cat. Ill : 8 : 2. 
 
 3. cf. Caes. I: 12: 5. 6. 569, 2; H. & B. 521, 3, a; H. 
 
 4. percipio. S7i. li G. 553, 3; B. 297, 2. 
 
 7. cf. Cat. 11:6:5. 
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 
 I. It happened^ that Archias went to Heraclea with Lu- 
 cullus; and, finding^ that this state had most equitable treaty 
 rfghts, by the help of LucuUus he got himself enrolled ' there 
 as a citizen. 2. Afterwards, by the law of Silvanus and 
 Carbo, which was passed 89 B.C.,* he obtained the right of a 
 Roman citizen. 3. And when Gratius, who knew that the 
 Heraclean records were destroyed, wished Archias to be 
 
no LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 removed ^ from the state on the ground that ^ he was not a 
 citizen, Lucullus testified ' that he was present himself when 
 Archias was enrolled at Heraclea. 4. Gratius could say 
 nothing in reply.* 
 
 1. accidit. 5. reicio. 
 
 2. which state when he found to 6. on the ground that = because, 
 have (be of), cf. text and Caes. cf. Cat. 1 : 12 : 1. 
 
 II: 15: 3. 7. tester. 
 
 3. cf. Cat. IV: 11:4 and 5. 8. say in reply = one word. 
 4 630; H. & B. 661, ;i, a; G. 
 
 p. 492. 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 I. Since Archias was enrolled^ not in the records of 
 Appius, but of Metellus, whom all knew to be a very care- 
 ful man, there was no reason why any one^ should doubt 
 that^ he was a citizen. 2. Besides, several allied states 
 also' had given him citizenship. 3. And he had long exer- 
 cised* the rights of a Roman citizen. 4. Yet Gratius asked 
 for the census-lists, although he knew that Archias was not 
 in the city even" when the people were enumerated. 
 
 1. 31T ; H. & B. 276, 7; H. 513; word of the pAr'ase, which they 
 G. 317 ; B. 252, 4. emphasize. 
 
 2. quin. 4. in . . . versor. 471, b; H. & 
 
 3. quoque and quidem always come B. 485 ; H. 535 ; G. 234 ; B. 
 right after the word, or /irst 260, 4. 
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 
 I. But, setting aside' the law, Cicero thought that Archias 
 was worthy of citizenship because he supplied something 
 for^ a busy man to refresh his mind with after the day's' 
 labor. 2. And Cicero* was not ashamed to acknowledge 
 that he spent as much time in the study of literature as most 
 men devote to rest and pleasure. 3. For he was persuaded 
 that this was ' of great value " in the pursuit of fame and 
 
THE CITIZENSHIP OF ARCHIAS III 
 
 honor. 4. And yet even he would have blamed a man " who 
 so buried himself in literary pursuits that he could devote 
 no time to the interest * of his friends. 
 
 1. omitto. 5. Not subjunctive. Why .' 
 
 2. something for = whereby = ubi. 6.417; H. & B. 356; H. 448, i; 
 cf. text and Cat. 1 : 10 : 1. G. 380 ; B. 203, 4. 
 
 3. cotidianus. 7. cf. Cat. 1 : 6 : 5. 
 
 4. 354, band c; H. &B. 352, i,a; 8. commodum. 
 H. 457. 3 ; G. 377 ; B. 207, a. 
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 
 I. Although learning is not always sufficient to bestow' 
 virtue and honor, and many men of distinguished and bril- 
 liant natural talent have become able and influential men 
 without learning, yet the greatest men have been those who, 
 being endowed with a brilliant nature, have been educated 
 by some systematic training.^ 2. Such' was Africanus, such 
 was Cato the elder, who did not seek enjoyment alone while 
 devoting himself to study. 3. These studies truly are suited 
 to^ all times and places at home and abroad. 
 
 1. sufficient to bestow = ad . . . 3. huius modi, 
 valeo. 4. cf. 3 : 5. 
 
 2. ratio ac disciplina. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 
 I. Did not the death of the aged Roscius greatly move us 
 all recently ? 2. If then,' he, by the skill and grace with 
 which he spoke the verses of others,^ deserved to be praised, 
 shall we not admire and defend Archias, who can speak 
 extempore excellent verses of his own, and, with care, can 
 write poetry which the old writers even_' did not surpass ? 
 
 3. Poets, who derive their power not from rules and educa- 
 tion, but from divine inspiration, and whose speech moves 
 
112 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 even wild beasts, should* be regarded as sacred with you, 
 most cultivated men. 
 
 1. If then = ergo. 3. cf. Cat. 1 : 3 : i. 
 
 2. alienus, 343, a; H. & B. 210; 4. debeo. 
 H. 349;G. 182, 5; B. 354, 4. 
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 
 I. Since, therefore,^ many nations claimed Homer as their 
 citizen even after his death, shall we not seek this man while 
 he is living, especially since every one is very glad '^ to listen 
 to the " poet who can best proclaim his worth ? 2. Besides, 
 he * who praises an illustrious Roman extends the fame of 
 the Roman people. 3. The opening* of Pontus, indeed,^ 
 under the command of LucuUus, is an honor to the Roman 
 people. 4. So poets who praise our great men deserve to 
 be wrought in marble and honored by the whole Roman 
 people. 
 
 1. cf. 8:1. 4. 497; H. & B. 333; H. 636, 4; 
 
 ^. See text for this idiom. G. 664, 2 ; B. 337, 5. 
 
 3. 297, d; H. & B. 271, II; H. 5. quidem. See 5: 3. 
 508 ; G. 308 ; B. 247, I, a. 
 
 CHAPTER X 
 
 I. We ought the^ more^ to honor Archias, because Latin 
 poetry is not read in so many nations as' the Greek. 2. And 
 Archias would have great influence in* extending our fame 
 and reputation wherever our brave soldiers fight for glory. 
 3. Who does not reckon Alexander and Achilles fortunate in 
 having had' writers to set forth their deeds ? 4. Therefore ' 
 ■ our commanders have often considered foreign poets, even 
 though" of little worth,'' nevertheless worthy of citizenship; 
 
THE CITIZENSHIP OF ARCHIAS 1 1 j 
 
 and' shall we reject this poet who has great talent' and 
 virtue, and moreover" is a Roman citizen by law? 
 
 1. eo. cf. Caes. I : 14: i. 7. of little worth = malus. 
 
 2. magis. 8. Therefore . . . and = ergo. cf. 
 
 3. quot. cf. Cat. Ill: 10: 3. 9^ '. and 8: i. 
 
 4. plurimum valeo ad. 9. 415 ; H. & B. 443 ; H. 473, 2 ; 
 
 5. 540, c ; H. & B. 523 ; H. 592 ; G. 400 ; B. 224. 
 
 G. 633 ; B. 383, 3, a. 10. and moreover = autem. 
 
 6. Omit the conjunction. 
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 
 I. All' good men wish to be praised. 2. Philosophers 
 even do not despise reputation so far as to'' hesitate to 
 inscribe their names in the books ^ they write. 3. I confess 
 that I was pleased that* Archias commenced in verse the 
 history* of my consulship. 4. For' a certain manly ^ quality ^ 
 incites us all to labor that we may transmit the memory of 
 our names to posterity. 5. If this '' quality were taken away, 
 we should have no motive to * toil and trouble ourselves in 
 this brief span of life. 
 
 i. 313, b; H. & B. 278, .2, b; H. 5. res (plural). 
 
 515, 2 ; G. 318, 2 ; B. 252, 5, c. 6. manly quality = virtus. 
 
 2. usque eo, ut. 7- cf. Caes. II : 15: 3. See also 
 
 •3. 308, a ; H. & B. 2.84, 2 ; B. 251, 420, 4 ; H. & B. 421, 6 ; H. 489, 
 
 5. I ; G. 410; B. 227, 2. 
 
 4. 572, b; H. & B. 555; H. 588, 8. we should not have, why we 
 
 4 ; G. 542 ; B. 286, I. should toil. cf. Cat. 1 : 2 : 3, 4. 
 
 CHAPTER XII 
 
 I. I surely am not so narrow-minded as to believe that 
 after death I shall cease ' to remember what I have done in 
 life. 2. And I would much rather "^ that my talents and 
 virtues be expressed and embellished by the poet than that 
 a likeness of my body should be wrought in marble by the 
 
114 
 
 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 sculptor.' 3. Therefore, judges, you ought, not only for his 
 own^ sake but for the sake^ of the state, to protect this man, 
 who by his character as well as" his talent is thought worthy 
 of the friendship of the noblest families, and is proven a 
 Roman citizen by unimpeachable' testimony. 
 
 desino. 
 
 would rather = malim. 442, b ; 
 
 H. &B. 519, b; H. 558, 4; G. 
 
 261, rem. ; B. 280, 2, a. 
 
 artifex. 
 
 ipse. 359. b; H. & B. 339, d; 
 
 H. 475, 2; G. 373; B. 198, 1. 
 
 5. Do not repeat causa. 
 
 6. as well as = cum . . . turn. For 
 position of these words observe 
 the text. 
 
 7. integer : use the superlative. 
 
POMPEY'S MILITARY 
 COMMAND 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 1. Although all the best^ men have especially coveted^ 
 the honor of speaking from this place, I have hitherto, on 
 account of my plan of life, devoted all my time to defending 
 my friends. 2. But now, since you have conferred honors 
 upon me by electing " me praetor, I will use what influence 
 I have* for those, above all, who have judged so well of me. 
 3. And I am especially glad that I am to speak of one about 
 whom it will not be difficult to find something ^ to say.° 
 
 1. cf. Arch. II : I. 4. in me est. cf. Arch, i: 4. 
 
 2. cupio. 5. cf. Cat. 1 : 2 : 3. 
 
 3. creo. 507; H. & B. 612, IV; 6. cf. Cat. I: 2:4. 
 H. 630; G. 431; B. 338, 4, a. 
 
 CHAPTER II 
 
 I. To state ^ the case briefly, Mithridates and Tigranes 
 are bringing war upon your tributaries. 2. And the Roman 
 knights who are managing your revenues are daily receiving 
 letters from Asia showing^ that the war is being badly man- 
 aged by the successor ° of Lucullus, and that all the allies 
 are asking for a certain commander whom the enemy fear. 
 3. Therefore, seeing that the war is such as to* endanger* 
 
 "5 
 
I l6 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 the safety of your allies and your own revenues, it seems to 
 me that you ought to prosecute it with the utmost zeal. 
 
 1. cf. Cat. Ill : 5 : I. 4. such as to = tantum nt or eius 
 
 2. cf. Caes. 1 : 9:4. modi, quod. 
 
 3. 308, c; H. & B. 284,3; H. 510, 5. in discrimen adduce. 
 6; G. 610; B. 311. 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 
 I. You who are eager for glory ^ ought to efface the memory 
 of that former stain and not leave your allies to Mithridates 
 to be massacred." 2. For that king, though defeated by Mu- 
 rena, has long been openly active ' among your tributaries. 
 3. But yet we must not censure* our former commanders, 
 whom the welfare of the state recalled from Asia to Rome. 
 
 i. 349, a; H. & B. 354; H. 450; 3. openly active = versor. 
 
 G. 374; B. 204, I. 4. reprehends. 
 
 2. cf. Cat. IV: 6: 8. 
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 
 I. But Mithridates procured new armies and a large fleet 
 so as to attack us while we were waging war in Spain. 
 2. But yet Pompey removed the danger of one side of this 
 double contest ; the other side LucuUus managed very suc- 
 cessfully at first. 3. And praise is not to be taken from 
 him ' on account of these recent mishaps," which were due 
 not to his fault but to his fortune. 4. But I must return to 
 the beginning of my speech. 
 
 i. 381 ; H. & B. 371 ; H. 427 ; G. 2. cf. 2 : 3. 
 347, S; B. 188, z,d. 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 I. Ought you to disregard the loss-^ of revenues and the 
 massacre ^ of Roman citizens, when " our ancestors thought 
 that to leave unpunished those who had arrogantly addressed 
 our ambassadors was dishonorable to them ? 2. Two kings 
 
POMPEY'S MILITARY COMMAND 11/ 
 
 are endangering the safety of our allies, who are worthy of 
 being defended ' by you, and the more so because the other 
 commanders who have been sent to them have pillaged* 
 their towns. 3. But this one commander, whom they wish, 
 has such kindness and self-control, that they would be safe 
 if he should be sent to defend them. 
 
 1. cf. Cat. Ill: 8: 3. 3. 535, f; H. & B. 513, 3; H. 
 
 2. 549 ; H. & B. 525 ; H. 598 ; G. 591, 7 ; G. 631, i ; B. 282, 3. 
 579, II ; B. 286, 2. 4. diripio. 
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 
 I. Therefore it becomes you for your own^ sake as well 
 as for the sake^ of your allies to defend even from the fear 
 of invasion these lands which are so rich and fertile that we 
 can depend ' upon them both for the resources ■* of war and 
 the ornaments* of peace. 2. With what feeling, pray, can 
 you enjoy these revenues, unless you protect both those who 
 pay them to us and those who collect them? 3. For, when 
 two hostile armies are near by, they fear invasion. 4. And 
 this ^ fear itself interrupts ° agriculture and commerce. 
 
 I. 
 
 vestra. 404, c; H. & B. 339, a; 
 
 438, 4; H. 476, i; G. 401, 6; 
 
 
 H. 440, I, note 2 ; G. 362, rem. 
 
 B. 219, I. 
 
 
 I ; B. 198, I, and 86. 
 
 4. For the word, see text, chapter 
 
 2. 
 
 cf. Arch. 12:5 and 6. 
 
 II. 
 
 3- 
 
 contentus est. 431, a; H. & B. 
 
 5. cf. Caes. II : 15: 3. 
 
 6. intermitto. 
 
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 
 I. The revenues, which are the sinews of the state, cannot 
 be impaired ^ without ^ bringing disaster. 2. For the system 
 of finances employed at Rome is so connected with the 
 finances of Asia, that if payment is hindered there,^ credit 
 will fail at Rome. 3. Therefore it is the part of wisdom* to 
 see that, unless you defend the safety of the allies and the 
 
Il8 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 credit at home, it will be of little * use afterwards to regain 
 by war provinces in which Roman citizens do not dare to 
 invest ^ money for farming the revenues. 
 
 1. Use the active form of concido 4. cf. Cat. Ill : 8 : 2. 
 
 or the passive of minuo. 5. 355, note 2; H. &B. 345,b; H. 
 
 2. without = that not = ut non. 449, 3 ; G. 381, 382 ; B. 211, 3. 
 
 3. illic. 6. conloco. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 
 I. Now this war is great and not to be despised, yet it is 
 not to be feared. 2. For it is not so^ difficult as the war in 
 which Lucullus defeated the enemy in many battles on land 
 and sea. 3. This same commander opened Pontus to our 
 legions, captured cities, and ^ seized the ancestral kingdom 
 of Mithridates. 4. And the greatest praise is due to Lucul- 
 lus for having done " all those things without impairing * the 
 revenues. 
 
 1. so ... as = tam . . . quam. 4. cf. 7 : i and 2, and integris 
 
 2. cf. Cat. II: II: 5. vectigalibus in the text. 
 
 3. cf. Cat. II : 7 : 3. 
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 
 I. If our soldiers had not delayed in order to gather up 
 the gold and silver which Mithridates in his flight ^ had left 
 to check the ardor of pursuit, he would not have escaped. 
 2. Besides, many other nations, which had never been assailed 
 by us, began to fear that our army was brought among them 
 for plunder. 3. Therefore they sent help to the conquered 
 Mithridates, and so encouraged him in his defeat ^ that he 
 returned to his native land, and even defeated our victorious 
 army. 4. Since Lucullus happened to be ^ recalled at the 
 time of this disaster, the war, taken up by fresh nations, 
 has become perilous. 
 
 I. Use participle. What tense ? 2. It happened that Lucullus was. 
 
POMPEY'S MILITARY COMMAND IIQ 
 
 CHAPTER X 
 
 I. Though this war is perilous, we have one commander 
 who surpasses all others in knowledge of military science. 
 2. For no one^ has been more experienced than he in war, 
 foreign and civil, servile and naval. 3. In short, there is no 
 military discipline in which he has not been trained ^ from 
 boyhood. 4. He has won' more victories and celebrated* 
 more triumphs than any one else of ancient or modern 
 times. ^ 5. This man, therefore, in preference to all others ° 
 should be chosen by us for this perilous war. 
 
 1. quisquam. Also notice how 4. ago. 
 
 often the Latin sentence begins 5. of those who now are, or were 
 with neque enim. in ancient times. 
 
 2. cf. Cat. 1 : 2 : 4. '6. in preference to all others = 
 
 3. potior. potissimum. 
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 
 I. But who can find speech equal to the merit of Pompey, 
 in whom all the virtues of a commander^ exist in the highest 
 degree?^ 2. And he is the more worthy of our trust and 
 honor, because he has been trained in every kind of war. 
 3. He laid open a road through Gaul into Spain and sup- 
 pressed the war of slaves.-' 4. And he drove the pirates 
 from every bay and harbor of the whole sea, when they had 
 such firm control ' that you could not protect your allies with 
 your fleet, and even our own merchants could not sail except 
 in the height of * winter. 
 
 1. 343, a; H. & B. 210, I ; H. 3. imperium. 
 
 350; G. 182, 5; B. 151, z. 4. the height of = summus. 
 
 2. in the highest degree = sum- 
 mus. 
 
126 LATIN COlVtPOSltiON 
 
 CHAPTER XII 
 
 I. But why should I say ^ that our allies or even our mer- 
 chants were not safe, when the pirates captured a Roman 
 praetor, plundered your own ports, and,^ almost in sight of 
 the Roman people, captured your fleet ? 2. And yet Pompey, 
 in a few months after he undertook this war, cleared ' the 
 whole sea of pirates, and guarded with his fleet all the 
 bays and harbors. 3. He also* received hostages from 
 the Cretans, and joined Cilicia to the Roman empire. 
 4. Who else ^ is there who could ^ have accomplished so 
 much as quickly as Pompey? 
 
 1. 444 ; H. & B. 503 i H. 557 ; G. 
 259; B. 277. 
 
 2. cf. 8 : ^. 
 
 3. clear of = libero. 401 ; 
 
 557 ; G. 
 
 
 408, 3 ; H. 462 ; G. 390, 2 ; B. 
 214, I. 
 
 
 4- 
 
 See text, and cf. Cat. II : 6 : 5. 
 
 H. &B. 
 
 S- 
 
 alius. 
 
 
 6. 
 
 cf. 10 : 2. 
 
 CHAPTER 
 
 XIII 
 
 I. But a good general ought to have the greatest integrity 
 and self-control. 2. For a commander can have no generous 
 thought for ^ the public interest who, while he is pretending 
 to be carrying on war, draws money from the treasury to use 
 for ^ his own profit.' 3. If this is done at Rome, you can all 
 understand what is being done among the allies, wherever 
 avaricious* generals have gone. 4. But Pompey does not' 
 permit his army to harm any one or to receive anything even 
 from a willing citizen, lest the homes of the allies become a 
 retreat for avarice. 
 
 1. can think nothing generous 4. avarus. 
 
 (amplus) about, cf. Cat. Ill: 5. not . . . any one or . . . any- 
 
 5 : 2. thing even = nemini . . nee 
 
 2. to use for = ad. quicquain ne . . . quidem. Use 
 
 3. quaestus. patior for " permit." 
 
POMPEY'S MILITARY COMMAND 121 
 
 CHAPTER XIV 
 
 I. But again,^ Pompey was able to reach the remotest 
 lands very quickly because he did not stop" his march for 
 pleasure, and did not even visit the statues and paintings 
 which others would have' carried off. 2. Therefore it is 
 not surprising' that the allies believe Pompey has such 
 self-control as the old Romans were once thought to have. 
 3. And it is difficult to say whether they esteem more his 
 bravery or his honesty, or indeed his courtesy — all of which 
 are virtues suited to a commander.* 
 
 1. Age vero or iam vero. 4. to be wondsred at. 
 
 2. intermitto. 5. suited to a commander = one 
 
 3. cf. Cat. 1 : 1:3. word. cf. 11 : i. 
 
 CHAPTER XV 
 
 I. Does anybody doubt that prestige also and reputation 
 have great weight in military affairs ? 2. And from Pompey 
 himself examples can be taken which show how much the 
 enemy and our allies are moved by the reputation of com- 
 manders. 3. From the day on which he-^ undertook the 
 maritime war, grain, which had been scarce ^ and dear,^ 
 became cheap. ^ 4. And Asia you could hardly have saved, 
 when Mithridates was flushed with victory and Tigranes 
 was near by with large forces, had not Pompey providen- 
 tially arrived there at the critical moment. 
 
 I. From which day he (qui), cf. 2. Form the adjective from the 
 text and Caes. II : 15 : 3. noun in the text. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI 
 
 I. Then again ^ this fact, that^ nations have preferred to 
 surrender to Pompey and have sent ambassadors to him espe- 
 cially,' shows how much weight his prestige is likely to have * 
 with the enemy. 2. And need I say^ that he has managed 
 
122 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 matters at home and in the field with so great success that 
 not only the enemy but the winds seem to have yielded to 
 him ? 3. Truly the gods have never bestowed upon any one 
 else such good fortune " as upon Pompey. 4. Therefore, for 
 the sake of the common safety as well as for his own sake, 
 you should not hesitate to confer upon this man the manage- 
 ment of this war/ 
 
 ±. cf. 14: I. 
 
 
 5. cf. 12: I. 
 
 2. quod. 
 
 
 6. good fortune = ability to suc- 
 
 3. cf. 10: 6. 
 
 
 ceed = facilitas. 
 
 4. cf. Cat. Ill : 
 
 2: 5. 
 
 7. this war to be managed, cf. 3 : 2. 
 CHAPTER XVII 
 
 I. This war should be intrusted to Pompey the more 
 because he is already there with an army. 2. But Catulus 
 and Hortensius, whose opinions ^ justly have great weight 
 with you, think that we ought not to intrust everything to 
 one man, however^ worthy. 3. But they also ^ said one 
 man should not be appointed against the pirates. 4. Yet 
 facts rather than words have refuted their speech. 5. For, 
 although the pirates then held such control of the sea that 
 even Roman praetors were being captured and business 
 across the sea^ stopped, we now control all seas and lands. 
 
 1. auctoritas. 3. cf. Cat. II : 6 : 5. 
 
 2. quam^s. 4. cf. Cat. II : 6 : 4. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII 
 
 I. Although once there was no nation which the Roman 
 people could ^ not conquer, no island or harbor which they 
 could not defend, the pirates had for several years held con- 
 trol of the coast and harbors, and even the Appian Way. 
 2. Then the people^ were so ashamed to be deprived' of 
 the power and prestige which their ancestors had left them, 
 
POMPEY'S MILITARY COMMAND 1 23 
 
 that they demanded Pompey as commander, who alone was 
 everywhere a match for the pirates. 
 
 1. cf. Cat. 1:2:4. 3. to be deprived of = careo (act.). 
 
 2. cf. Arch. 6:4. cf. 12 : 3. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX 
 
 I. Now, too, it seems to me that Gabinius, who got Pom- 
 pey put in command ^ of the war, ought to have ° a share " 
 in the glory of that commander. 2. Those who raise objec- 
 tions to Pompey's taking* as lieutenant the one whom he 
 asks for, deserve the less to prevail^ now, because if we had 
 heeded their opinion before we should not now rule the sea. 
 
 3. And nothing but the veto of the praetor shall keep me 
 from bringing* before the senate the business " of appoint- 
 ing as lieutenant this man by whose influence the under- 
 taking of the war' against the pirates was conferred upon 
 one commander. 
 
 1. praeficio. cf. Cat. IV : n : 4 5. cf. text and 5 : 3. 
 
 and 5. 6. bring before the senate the 
 
 2. sum. business of = de . . . ad sena- 
 
 3. particeps. cf . 3 : i. turn refero. 
 
 4. 558, b; H. & B. 502, 3, b; H. 7. cf. 16: 7. 
 568,8; G. 549; B. 295, 3. 
 
 CHAPTER XX 
 
 I. But I differ greatly from Catulus also, who fears that, 
 if we should stake everything upon Pompey, he might be 
 killed and we should have nobody ^ on whom to place hope. 
 2. But let us take advantage of ^ the lives of great men while 
 we may. 3. And, if anything happens to Pompey,' we will 
 have hope in Catulus himself. 4. But he objects to any- 
 thing now being done*; need I say, however, that again 
 and again the safety of the government has been placed 
 
124 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 in the hands of one man with the full consent of Catulus 
 himself ? 
 
 1. should not have on whom we 3. 403, c ; H. & B. 423, b ; H. 476 ; 
 could, cf. Arch. 11 : 8. G. 401, 7 ; B. 218, 6. 
 
 2. utor. 439; H. & B. 501, 3 ; H. 4. ne. 558, b; H. & B. 502, 3, b; 
 559, I ; G. 263,.! i B. 274. H. 568; 0.548 ; B. 295, 3. 
 
 CHAPTER XXI 
 
 I. Was there ever anything '^ more unusual than that the 
 senate should decree ^ a triumph to a very young man .'' 
 2. And what is so remarkable as that the senate should 
 have" such confidence in a young man as to intrust to him 
 alone the duty of two consuls.? 3. But, — what* is still 
 more extraordinary, — the senate exempted Pompey from 
 the law so that he could be elected consul before he could * 
 have been lawfully elected praetor even. 4. In short, more 
 new precedents have been established in the case of Pompey 
 than in the case of all the men of our time.^ 
 
 L. cf. Arch. S : !• ^1 iiote 2 ; H. 399, 6; G. 614, 2 ; 
 
 2. See in the text two ways of B. 247, 1, b. 
 
 expressing these substantive 4. licet, cf. Cat. I : i : 3, and 
 clauses. Cat. Ill : 5 : 4. 
 
 3. id quod. 307, d ; H. & B. 325, 5. cf. 10 : 5. 
 
 CHAPTER XXII 
 
 I. If these men made opposition^ unreasonably when you 
 put ^ Pompey in command of the warwith the pirates,' let 
 them obey your wishes now. 2. And the more so,* since 
 Pompey has not only bravery but such a sense of honor 
 that it is difficult to say whether^ the enemy hate more" the 
 avaricious generals we have sent them than they esteem 
 him. 3. For there is no rich city which our commanders 
 have not plundered under the pretense of war. 4. And 
 
POMPEY'S MILITARY COMMAND 12$ 
 
 how long must our allies stand ' the arrogance and greed of 
 such commanders ? 
 
 1. cf. Cat. I: 7:1. 3. 348; H. & B. 354; H. 440, 2; 
 
 2. cf. Cat. 1 : 10: 3. G. 363, 2 ; B. 200. 
 
 4. cf. Arch. 10 : i and 2. 5. ne, an enclitic. 6. magis. 7. capio. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII 
 
 I. Therefore, even if there is' some one who can defeat 
 royal armies, he will not be a fit^ person for us to intrust an 
 army to, if he has ■'■ such greed for money as to pillage the 
 homes and temples of the allies. 2. For what else have our 
 generals accomplished during these years except to enrich ' 
 themselves ? 3. Therefore do not hesitate to send to our 
 allies Pompey alone, whose virtues they esteem no less than 
 they despise * the vices of others. 4. And, if we ought ' to 
 heed ° the opinions of great men in this case, we must send 
 Pompey, whom so many great men justly praise. 
 
 1. cf. 22: I. 3. Use nisi ut with locupleto. See 
 
 2. idoneus. cf. 5 : 3. also Caes. IV : 1 : 4. 
 
 4. contemno. 5. obtempero. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV 
 
 I. Therefore, Manilius, I pledge you and the Roman 
 people that I will devote-' whatever talent I have to passing^ 
 this law. 2. This I do for the sake of the public interest, and 
 not that I may gain Pompey's favor or anybody's help. 3. For 
 I place the honor of the -state and the safety of the allies before 
 all my interests. 4. Though I may incur many enmities, I will 
 still defend this cause. 5. So now I beg you to persevere" 
 with the same zeal as heretofore,* and not ^ be turned aside 
 from' your opinion by the opposition' of any one. 
 
 1. defero. 3- persevere. 
 
 2. constituo. 4- adhuc. 
 
 5. neve. cf. II : 8 : 5. 6. de , . . demoveo. 7. obtrectatio. 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY SIGHT 
 TESTS 
 
 1. I know that my brother Dumnorix hates the Romans 
 and favors the Helvetii for the sake of obtaining royal power 
 through them. 2. And no one on this account feels ^ more 
 pain than I do, because, while I myself have very great power 
 through my influence at home and in the rest of Gaul, and 
 my brother very little on account of his youth, he has 
 risen ^ through my influence. 3. And this help and power' 
 he is using not only for diminishing my popularity, but 
 almost to my ruin. 
 
 I. capio. 3. nervus (plur.). 
 
 J., cresco. 
 
 I. When Caesar came to Gaul, the Haedui were the leaders 
 of one party, the Sequani of the other. 2. But after a num- 
 ber of favorable engagements had been fought, and all the 
 nobles of the Haedui had been slain, the Sequani surpassed 
 the Haedui in power, so that the Haedui were compelled to 
 give as hostages the sons of their leading men, and to take 
 an oath in the name of the state that they would never con- 
 spire against the Sequani. 3. The only man who could not 
 be induced to take the oath was Diviciacus, and he fled to 
 Rome to the senate to beg for help. 
 
 126 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY SIGHT TESTS 12/ 
 
 I. If the unsuccessful battle and flight of the Gauls 
 trouble^ any, they can find out, if they inquire, that Ariovis- 
 tus, after keeping himself in camp and the swamps for many 
 months and not giving them a chance at him,^ suddenly 
 attacked them, and conquered them rather by strategy^ and 
 cunning than by valor. 2. But even Ariovistus himself does 
 not expect that our army can be taken by this strategy for 
 which there was a chance * against barbarous and unskilled 
 men. 
 
 1. commoveo. 3. ratio. 
 
 2. at him = sai. 4. locus. 
 
 I. The Aduatuci, who had come to the assistance of the 
 Nervii, returned home after the battle and gathered into one 
 town for the purpose of defending themselves. 2. At first 
 they kept ridiculing the towers which were being con- 
 structed by the Romans. 3. When, however, they saw that 
 the towers were being moved toward the fortifications they 
 quickly surrendered, but begged that Caesar would not 
 deprive them of their arms. 4. Caesar decided that accord- 
 ing to his custom he would spare them, but that they must 
 give up their arms. 5. They, having concealed a part of 
 their arms, with these, in the night, suddenly made a rush 
 from the town, but were driven back. 
 
 ,1. Caesar, having learned that the Germans had been 
 invited to come into Gaul, procured a supply of grain, and 
 began to march into those places in which he heard the 
 Germans were. 2. And when he was a few days' march 
 from them, ambassadors came from them, whose speech 
 
128 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 was as follows : " The Germans do not make war upon the 
 Roman people first, and yet we do not shrink from a contest 
 with arms if we are assailed, because it is the custom of the' 
 Germans, handed down from their ancestors, to resist who- 
 ever brings on war." 
 
 I. Having completed the German war, Caesar decided 
 for many reasons that he must cross the Rhine; the most 
 weighty-' of these was, that he wished the Germans to fear 
 for their own interests. 2. But, when Caesar sent messen- 
 gers to them to. request that they should give over to him 
 those who had made war upon him and Gaul, they replied 
 as follows : " The Rhine bounds the empire of the Roman 
 people ; if against your will you think it is not fair that the 
 Germans should cross the Rhine into Gaul, why do you 
 claim that anything across the Rhine is subject to ^ your 
 dominion or power .' " 
 
 I. iustns. 2. is subject to = est with the gen. 
 
 I. Caesar was now reported to have withdrawn from 
 Gergovia, and rumors were brought of a successful uprising 
 of Gaul. 2. Then Labienus, as the change of affairs was 
 so great, saw that he must adopt a plan far different from 
 what' he had previously intended. 3. Therefore towards 
 evening, having called a council, he exhorted his soldiers to 
 execute -vyith diligence and energy such orders as he might 
 give. 4. The five cohorts which he considered least to be 
 depended on" for fighting he left as a guard to the baggage, 
 the remaining five of the same legion hq orders to go up 
 stream ^ with all the baggage with great tumult. 5. He him- 
 self a little afterwards, going out silently with three legions. 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY SIGHT TESTS I29 
 
 aims for * the place to which he had ordered the ships to be 
 brought.' 
 
 1. far different from what = longe 3. adverso flumine. 
 aliud atque. 4. peto. 
 
 2. to be depended on = firmus. 5. appello. 
 
 8 
 I. When all his men had been quickly carried over the 
 river, Labienus, having exhorted them to remember their 
 former valor, gives the signal for battle. 2. At the first 
 onset, on the right wing, where the seventh legion had taken 
 its stand, the enemy are routed and put to flight; on the 
 left, although the first ranks of the enemy had fallen, pierced 
 by the javelins, yet the rest resisted very spiritedly, and no 
 one gave a suspicion of flight. 3. The leader himself of the 
 enemy, Camulogenus, was near his men and encouraged them. 
 4. Although the issue of the victory was even now uncertain, 
 not even at this time did any one leave his position, but all 
 were surrounded and killed. 
 
 9 
 
 I. Twenty days ago the senate decreed that the consuls 
 should see that the republic suffer no harm. 2. And I have 
 long been watching Catiline and know where his associates 
 in crime met, and what plans they adopted. 3. And yet for 
 a certain reason I am not yet induced to execute that villain. 
 4. For, if I should order him to be put to death at once as 
 he deserves, many good men, who do not know that he has 
 assigned parts of the city for flames and the senators for 
 slaughter, would say that I was acting too cruelly. 5. Then, 
 in short, he shall be put to death when there shall be no 
 one who does not see plainly that he is not content with 
 the slaughter of us who are in the senate, but that he is 
 recruiting an army for the sake .of destroying the city and 
 devastating all Italy. 
 
130 LATIN COMTp'OSITION 
 
 10 
 
 I. Catiline left the city November 8. 2. The next day 
 Cicero called together the people and showed why he had 
 not arrested Catiline, who ought long ago to have been put 
 to death. 3. There were some who did not believe Catiline 
 was threatening the consul with "death and the city with fire. 
 
 4. And so Cicero had allowed him to go from the city. 
 
 5. Catiline set out at once for the camp of Manlius, so that 
 all could see plainly that a conspiracy had been formed 
 against the state. 6. Cicero, however, told the people that 
 Catiline was still greatly to be feared, since he had not taken 
 all his forces with him. 
 
 11 
 
 I. In the third oration against Catiline, the consul ex- 
 plained to his fellow-citizens in what way the plans of the 
 conspirators had been found out. 2. After Catiline's depar- 
 ture from the city, Cicero ascertained that ambassadors from 
 the Allobroges, who had come to Rome at this time, had 
 been tampered with by Lentulus for the sake of inciting an 
 insurrection in Gaul. 3. Accordingly, when these ambassa- 
 dors were returning home with letters from the conspirators 
 for their own people, they were arrested, and the letters, 
 with unbroken seals, were given to Cicero as proofs of 
 evident guilt. 4. The senate was quickly convened, and, 
 after the letters had been read, the accused, one by one, 
 confessed. 
 
 12 
 
 I. In the temple of Concord, at Rome, December 5, 
 63 B.C., Cicero laid before the senators the entire conspiracy 
 of Catiline, and begged them to preserve themselves and 
 their children and cease to think about him. 2. Since the 
 accused had confessed, they had only to decide upon the 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY SIGHT TESTS I3I 
 
 penalty. 3. There were two opinions : one of Silanus, who 
 thought the conspirators should be put to death ; the other 
 of Caesar, who maintained that death was not ordained ^ for 
 the sake of punishment, and so urged ^ that they be put in 
 prison for life.* 4. Cicero held the same opinion as Silanus. 
 5. And the leaders of the conspiracy were accordingly put 
 to death at once. 
 
 I. constituo. 2. iubed. 3. vincula sempitetna. 
 
 13 
 
 I. The Roman people had seen many civil strifes, it need 
 not be said even with how great an injury to the state. 
 2. And yet all those dissensions, no one of which sought 
 the destruction of the state, were of such a kind that they 
 were settled, not by the restoration of harmony but by the 
 slaughter of citizens. 3. But in this war alone, the greatest 
 and most cruel within the memory of men, I have so con- 
 ducted myself that you all might be saved ; and, although 
 your enemies had thought that only so many^ of the citizens 
 would survive as should remain after ^ a limitless slaughter, 
 and only so much of the city as fire could not reach, both the 
 city and citizens I have preserved untouched and unharmed. 
 
 I. only so many= tantum. 2. remain after = resists. 
 
 14 
 
 I. But since my lot is not the same as that of those men 
 who have waged foreign wars, — -because I am to live with 
 those whom I have conquered and subdued; they have left 
 their enemies either killed or suppressed, — it is your duty, 
 fellow-citizens, if their deeds rightly benefit others, to see 
 that mine' may never injure me. 2. And yet to me myself 
 surely no harm can now be done by those wicked and crimi- 
 nal enemies of mine. 3. For there is great protection in 
 
132 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 good men, which has been procured for me forever; great 
 majesty^ in the republic, which, though silent, will ever defend 
 me ; great power of conscience, and those who neglect this, 
 when they wish to injure me, will betray^ themselves. 
 
 I. dignitas. 2. indico. 
 
 15 
 
 I. A. Licinius Archias was born at Antioch, once a pop- 
 ulous and wealthy city. 2. When a young man he came to 
 Heraclea, a city of most favorable privileges and treaty rights, 
 and afterwards, in the consulship of Marius and Catulus, he 
 came to Rome, where he formed the acquaintance of many 
 distinguished men, who presented him with citizenship, and 
 in other ways highly honored him. 3. At this time, 'how- 
 ever, a certain man, Gratius by name, falsely charged ^ that 
 Archias was not by law a Roman citizen. 4. The charge 
 was easily refuted.^ 5. The orator therefore adopted a style 
 of speaking which was at variance with the custom of the 
 court, and showed that Archias was a man of such genius 
 that if he were not a Roman citizen he ought to be enrolled. 
 
 I. falsely charge = criminor. .a. refuto. 
 
 16 
 
 I. Cicero does not disguise the fact^ that we are all influ- 
 enced by a desire for glory, and says that those very phi- 
 losophers who write about despising glory are so eager to be 
 talked about that they inscribe their names in their books. 
 2. And he speaks truly. 3. For praise is an especial incen- 
 tive to labor. 4. Cicero, for instance, would not have exer- 
 cised himself so zealously in such perils and labors if a 
 certain principle '^ had not admonished him that the remem- 
 brance pf his name was to be extended ^ with all posterity. 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY SIGHT TESTS I 33 
 
 5. He certainly is narrow-minded who supposes that every- 
 thing he does is terminated by the same limits by which the 
 space of life is bounded. 
 
 I. disguise the fact = dissimulo. 2. viitus. ; 
 
 17 
 
 I. It seems to me that I have said' enough about the 
 character of this war. 2. It remains for me to speak of the 
 commander to be selected. 3. Would that you had such an 
 abundance of brave and incorruptible men that it would be 
 a difficult question whom above all others you would think 
 worthy to be put in charge of such important interests. 
 4. But now, since there is Gnaeus Pompey only, who in 
 valor surpasses not only the glory of' men now living, but 
 also the memory of antiquity, what is there that can make 
 any one hesitate in this case ? 5. He has such humanity, 
 too, that it is difficult to say whether the enemy fear rather 
 his bravery while they are fighting or admire his kindness 
 when they are conquered. 
 
 18 
 
 I. Recall the marches which, during these years, our com- 
 manders have made in Italy through the fields and towns of 
 Roman citizens ; then you will more easily decide what to 
 think is being done among foreign nations. 2. Do you 
 think more cities of the enemy have been destroyed during 
 these years by the arms of your soldiers, or states of the 
 allies by your winter encampments ? 3. For he cannot 
 restrain an army as a general who does not restrain him- 
 self, nor can one be strict^ in judging who does not wish 
 others to be strict towards him as judges. 4. In this par- 
 ticular shall we wonder that Pompey excels others so much, 
 since his legions came into Asia in such a way that not 
 
134 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 only the hand, but even the tread ^ of so great an army is 
 said to have harmed no one who was peaceful ? 
 
 I. severus. 2. vestigium. 
 
 19 
 
 I. Even now, Caius Erucius, I will concede to you in this 
 case what I would not concede in another, relying on this 
 man's innocence. 2. I do not ask you why Sextius Roscius 
 killed his father. 3. I ask how he killed him. 4. Did he 
 strike the blow-' himself, or give him over to others to be 
 murdered.? 5. If through others, I ask whether slaves or 
 freemen ? 6. Why are they not named? 7. If from Rome, 
 whence did he get acquainted with them, who has not come 
 to Rome for many years, and was never there more than 
 three days? 8. Letters, I suppose, he sent to some assassin ! 
 9. By bribery or promises he induced some one ! 10. None 
 of these things can even be pretended.'^ 11. And yet the 
 case is pleaded on a charge of " parricide ! 
 
 J., strike the blow = percutio. 3. on a charge of = de. 
 
 2. confingo. 
 
 20 
 
 I. Since I have now been speaking so many hours about 
 the wicked cruelty of Verres, I will place before you a case 
 which itself will inflame your minds. 2. Gavius, a Roman 
 citizen, had been put in chains, and by some means had 
 secretly escaped and come to Messana; and, by chance, on 
 that very day Verres came to Messana. 3. The matter is 
 laid before him. 4. He, inflamed with criminal frenzy,^ 
 came into the forum. 5. His eyes flashed fire,^ cruelty 
 gleamed ' from his whole countenance. 6. All waited to 
 see what he would do, when, suddenly, he orders the man 
 to be dragged forth* and, un condemned and innocent, to 
 be scourged.^ 7. O, sweet name of liberty! 8. Have all 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY SIGHT TESTS I35 
 
 things at last come to this/ that a Roman citizen should be 
 bound and scourged within the province of the Roman 
 people by a Roman praetor? 
 
 1. scelus et furor. 5. verbero. 
 
 2. flash fire = ardeo. 6. have come to this ? = hucine 
 
 3. emineo. reciderunt ? 
 
 4. proripio. 
 
 21 
 
 Harvard, 1894. The Usipites and Tencteri, German 
 tribes, were so persecuted by the Suevi that they were com- 
 pelled to abandon their homes, and wandered about for 
 three years in the vain search for a new abode. Finally 
 they came to the river Rhine with the design of crossing 
 into Gaul. But the Menapians, who dwelt on. both banks 
 of the river at that point, were alarmed at the approach of 
 such an immense host, and transporting all their property 
 across the river, they posted troops on the farther bank to 
 keep the Germans from crossing. The latter, having no 
 ships, resorted to a trick : they withdrew from the river, 
 pretending to return to their own country ; but when the 
 Menapians, deceived by their departure, had come back to 
 their homes, they suddenly turned, and surprising them by 
 a rapid march, massacred them all and seized their ships. 
 
 22 
 
 Yale, 1895. On the 8th of November, B.C. 63, the 
 consul Cicero asked Catiline, in the senate, whether he did 
 not know that all had learned that he had conspired against 
 the state. "All your plans," he said, " are now clearer to 
 me than the light of day ; you met your confederates at 
 Laeca's house night before last ; you chose men to leave at 
 Rome to burn the city and murder the optimates ; you your- 
 self, after killing me, intend to go to the army which Manlius 
 
136 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 is now collecting for you in Etruria. You ought to have 
 been killed long ago by the command of the consul, but I 
 will permit you to go; nay, I advise you to do so." 
 
 Catiline, attempting to reply, was prevented by the shouts 
 of the senators and rushed out, asserting that he was going 
 to Marseilles into exile ; but really he went to the camp of 
 Manlius and a year later fell fighting bravely. 
 
 23 
 
 Harvard, 1895. While Cicero was consul at Rome, a 
 senator named Catiline formed a plan to destroy the govern- 
 ment, and persuaded several men of noble birth to join with 
 him in this plan. But Cicero, who was always watching to 
 see that the state suffered no harm, learned of this conspir- 
 acy at once ; and when he heard that the number of con- 
 spirators was increasing every day, he began to fear that 
 his own life might be in danger. He therefore called the 
 senate together and laid the whole matter before them. 
 After Cicero had finished speaking, Catiline attempted to 
 reply, but was prevented by the angry cries of the senators, 
 and was compelled to leave the senate-house. The senators 
 were so enraged that, if he had not, of his own accord, left 
 the city during the following night, they would have driven 
 him out. A few days later the senate decreed that the con- 
 spirators who had remained in the city should be put to 
 death. Catiline himself was afterwards defeated and killed 
 in battle by Antonius, Cicero's colleague. 
 
 34 
 
 Yale, 1896. We ordered the tablets which were said to 
 have been given by each man to be brought forward. First 
 we showed Cethegus his seal ; he acknowledged it ; we cut 
 the thread (linum) and read it. It was written by his own 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY SIGHT TESTS 137 
 
 hand to the senate and people of the Allobroges, saying that 
 he would do what he had promised their ambassadors ; he 
 begged them also to do what their ambassadors had under- 
 taken irecipere) for them. Then Cethegus, who a little 
 before had said, about the swords which had been seized at 
 his house, that he had always been an admirer (studiosus) 
 of good swords, suddenly became silent. 
 
 25 
 
 Harvard, 1896. While this was going on, Caesar waited 
 outside the walls : but when Cicero had been forced by the 
 violence of Clodius to go into exile, Caesar set out without 
 delay for his province, and traveled with such speed that 
 he reached Geneva, which is about eight hundred miles 
 from Rome, in eight days. For he had received word that 
 the Helvetians were preparing to migrate from their country 
 in search of Isirger territory to dwell in, and he was afraid 
 they would do much harm to the province if he should allow 
 them to enter it. He therefore ordered the bridge which 
 was at Geneva to be torn down, and made a requisition on 
 the province for troops. The Helvetians, who had now 
 assembled on the other side of the Rhone, on hearing of 
 Caesar's arrival, sent envoys to ask him to allow them to 
 proceed through the province, because there was no other 
 way by which they could go. Caesar told the envoys he 
 needed time to consider the matter ; if they would come 
 back on the thirteenth of April, he would give them his 
 answer. 
 
 26 
 
 Yale, igoi. In the consulship of Cicero, Catiline collected 
 a band of worthless men to destroy the Roman common- 
 wealth. When Cicero saw that the conspirators had estab- 
 lished a camp in Etruria and that the number of the enemy 
 grew every day and that the state was in the greatest danger. 
 
138 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 he begged of the senators to decree that the consuls should 
 see that the state should suffer no harm. By this speech he 
 brought it about {efficere) that Catiline left Rome and went 
 to the camp of Manlius, which was at Faesulae. This he 
 would not have done if he had not seen that all his plans 
 had been revealed (to be revealed =patere). 
 
 27 
 
 Harvard, 1901. When the senate heard that D. Brutus 
 had gone to Modena and was in danger there because 
 Antony had attacked him, they sent ambassadors to warn 
 Antony that he must leave the town. The two consuls 
 raised an army and set out against him. The young Caesar 
 felt such affection for his country, if we can believe Cicero, 
 that he overcame his distress at his father's death and went 
 out to set Brutus free. 
 
 28 
 
 Yale, 1902. After Catiline had left the city, being driven 
 away by the violent speech of Cicero, some of the conspir- 
 ators who had remained in Rome endeavored to obtain help 
 from the Allobroges, a Gallic tribe. But when Cicero learned 
 that the ambassadors of the Allobroges had letters written 
 by the conspirators, he thought that he should no longer 
 hesitate. He therefore sent a number of picked men to 
 the Mulvian bridge and ordered them to arrest the ambas- 
 sadors and to take the letters with the seals unbroken, so 
 that he might show them to the senators and urge them to 
 look out for the safety of the republic. 
 
 29 
 
 Harvard, 1902. Some men of Pompey's party were so 
 insolent that peaceable citizens feared their victory greatly. 
 Nor did any one know what Caesar was likely to do. When, 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY SIGHT TESTS 1 39 
 
 however, he had overcome his enemies, no swords were seen 
 in the city. He could not raise any one from the dead, but 
 showed by the preservation of all whom he could save that 
 he wished the others had not been killed. No one could 
 doubt that he was merciful. 
 
 30 
 
 Yale, 1903. Since you have now captured the wicked 
 leaders of this dangerous and nefarious conspiracy, you may 
 (debere) consider all the hopes, all the resources of Catiline 
 to be ruined {concidere). For I drove him from the city 
 because I knew that he alone was to be feared, but only as 
 long as he was within the walls of the city. He, indeed, 
 knew everything ; he selected apt men and persuaded them 
 to perform the most shameful deeds. When he had con- 
 ceived {capere) a plan his tongue and his hands were always 
 ready to accomplish it. When, therefore, I drove him from 
 the city into the camp I relieved you from the greatest burden 
 and anxiety, so that you might live in peace. For if Catiline 
 had remained in the city we should always have had to fight 
 against him. But since he is gone, there is no reason why 
 we should fear either Lentulus or Cassius or Cethegus. 
 
 31 
 
 Harvard, 1903. Pansa began the fighting. He declared 
 that unless he were slain he should conquer Antony. If his 
 soldiers had not rushed too eagerly into the conflict they 
 would have won the day alone. But in the dangerous fight 
 Pansa fought so bravely in the front ranks that he received 
 two serious wounds. Hirtius then fearing that the battle 
 would be Ipst led twenty cohorts from the camp. After 
 their success he sent a messenger to report the battle to 
 Cicero.- 
 
PREPARATORY 
 LATIN COMPOSITION 
 
 Part II 
 
 A SYSTEMATIC DRILL 
 IN SYNTAX 
 
 BY 
 
 F. P. MOULTON, A.M. 
 Teacher in the Hartford High School 
 
 BOSTON, U.S.A. 
 GINN & COMPANY, PUBLISHERS 
 
 t 1904 
 
Copyright, 1898, 1904, by 
 F. P. MOULTON 
 
 ALL EIGHTS RESERVED 
 
PREFACE 
 
 These exercises are not an afterthought. They were 
 planned at the same time with the Preparatory Latin Com- 
 position. They imply no modification of the method of 
 that book, but are designed as a supplement to it. Latin 
 composition, for the most part, can undoubtedly be taught 
 most effectively by connected passages, in which the gram- 
 mar is taught naturally as it is required. And no composi- 
 tion book requires the use of grammar more regularly and 
 persistently than the Preparatory Latin Composition. But 
 most teachers believe that at some time in the course the 
 pupil needs special and concentrated drill on the principles 
 of syntax. These exercises have been prepared to give this 
 very drill. An effort has been made to bring in as little 
 material as possible which would distract the attention from 
 the principles to be taught. Therefore the sentences are 
 short, and are taken mostly from Caesar and Cicero, a few 
 only being taken from Nepos and other authors. 
 
 Since the sentences are taken from various sources, a 
 vocabulary has been prepared, and synonyms are given in 
 their proper places in the vocabulary, where they will be sure 
 to be observed. As an example, see lead, so, surround, 
 take, etc. 
 
 That the pupil may be sure to see the application of the 
 rules, a group of illustrative examples is given, in which the 
 numbers of the sentences correspond to the numbers, at 
 the head of the lesson, under which the rules of grammar 
 are given. There is a separate group of miscellaneous 
 
 iii t 
 
IV PREFACE t 
 
 exercises under each lesson, in which all the grammatical 
 principles are repeated. In these exercises the pupil must 
 use his own judgment as to which rule applies. 
 
 The exercises afEord an entire review of Latin syntax. 
 The chapters" are independent, and so they may either be 
 taken in order, or any chapter may be taken as the teacher 
 may see the need of drill on a special subject. The sen- 
 tences are suitable for either oral or written work. 
 
 If any teacher, from lack of time, or in a school having a 
 short Latin course, should wish to review the entire gram- 
 mar very rapidly, the miscellaneous exercises might be 
 omitted. This division of the exercises, and the fact that 
 each chapter is independent, make the exercises adapted to 
 the needs of all schools and the wishes of any teacher. 
 
 Lake Suncook, N. H. 
 August I, 1898. 
 
 F. P. MOULTON, 
 
 Hartford High School. 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 Chapter Page 
 I. Nouns — Appositive and Predicate. Adjectives — 
 Attributive and Predicate. Agreement of the Verb — 
 
 witii Collective Nouns — with Different Subjects . . i 
 II. Genitive with Nouns and Adjectives ... .3 
 
 III. Genitive with Verbs ... 4 
 
 IV. Dative with Verbs 6 
 
 V. Dative (continued) . . 8 
 
 VI. Accusative . . . . 10 
 
 VII. Ablative 12 
 
 VIII. Ablative (continued). ... . . 14 
 
 IX: Expressions of Time and Place 15 
 
 X. Conjunctions, Negative Combinations, Questions . . 17 
 
 XI. Pronouns: Personal, Reflexive, and Demonstrative . . 19 
 
 XII. Relative Pronouns and Correlatives . 20 
 
 XIII. Indefinite Pronouns and Adverbs 21 
 
 XIV. The Participle : its Uses and Tenses . .... 23 
 XV. Gerund and Gerundive. Supine. Infinitive .... 25 
 
 XVI. Hortatory and Deliberative Subjunctive. Imperative. 
 
 Prohibitions. How to Express May, Can, Ought, etc. 26 
 
 XVII. Conditions and Wishes . . 28 
 
 XVIII. Tenses of the Indicative .... 30 
 
 XIX. Sequence of Tenses. Indirect Questions and Indirect 
 
 Requests ... . . 32 
 
 XX. Subjunctive of Purpose and Result ... ... 34 
 
 XXI. Subjunctive of Concession, Cause, and Characteristic 36 
 
 XXII. Temporal Clauses .... 37 
 
 XXIII. Indirect Discourse . . . -39 
 
 Vocabulary 41 
 
EXERCISES IN SYNTAX 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 Agreement of Nouns, Adjectives, and Verbs 
 
 1. Nouns — Appositive and Predicate. 281, 282, 283, 
 284; H. & B. 317, a; 230; 318; H. 383, 3; 393; G. 321, 
 325; B. 169, 2 ; 167. 
 
 2. An Appositive — expressing Time, Age, Office, etc. 
 282, example 3; H. & B. 317, a. 
 
 3,4. Adjectives — Attributive and Predicate. 285, i, 2; 
 286 ; 289, d ; H. & B. 320, I, III ; H. 394 ; G. 289 ; B. 233, 
 2; 234. 
 
 5. Adjectives — belonging to several Nouns. 286, a; 
 H. & B. 323, 2 ; H. 39S, 1,2; G. 290 ; B. 235, i, 2. 
 
 '6-9. Adjectives — used Substantively, in place of a Geni- 
 tive, in place of an Adverb or Clause, to designate what 
 Part. 288; 343, a; 290; 293; H. & B. 249; 210, 4, 5; 
 243; 244; H. 494; 3S3; 497, 3, 4; G. 204, i; 189, 31; 
 325. S> 6 ; B. 236 ; 354, 4 ; 241, i, 2. 
 
 Agreement of the Verb — 
 
 10. With a Collective Noun. 317, d, i ; H. & B. 331, i; 
 H. 389, I ; G. 211, exc. (a); B. 254, 4. 
 
 11-13. With two or more Subjects. 317, a, b ; H. & B. 329, 
 1,-2; 331, 3; H. 392, I, 2, 4; G. 285, I, 2; B. 2SS, 1-4- 
 
 14. A Relative Pronoun requires its Verb to be in the 
 same Person as its Antecedent. 
 
2. EXERCISES IN SYNTAX t 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I. Lucius Piso, the lieutenant, was grandfather of Caesar's 
 father-in-law. 2. Catiline plotted against Cicero as the consul- 
 elect, and wished to kill him when consul. 3. The servile 
 war was severe and dangerous. 4. To cross the river was 
 dangerous. 5. Great was the name and reputation of the 
 army. 6. Good men, property, all things, our men. 7. The 
 camp of Manlius, the war with Cassius, the battle of Cannae, 
 the Calends of January. 8. He was the first to cross the 
 river. . 9. On the summit of the hill, the rest of the legions, 
 the ends of the ditches, in the middle of the road. 10. A 
 multitude were hurling stones. 11. Cicero and Atticus were 
 friends. 12. Suddenly a great calm and quiet ensued. 
 13. You and I are present. 14. You, who are always very 
 faithful, were not present yesterday. 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. Paulus was considered an extraordinary man. 2. The 
 cavalry and charioteers had been sent ahead. 3. Archi'as 
 was with Lucullus as quaestor in Asia. 4. Arms, trumpets, 
 and that silver eagle had been sent ahead. 5. If you and 
 TuUia are well, Cicero and I are well. 6. The aged and 
 the wise never meet death unwillingly. 7. Cicero was 
 elected consul. 8. To quell the insurrection of slaves was 
 difficult. 9. This state was the chief one to pay the penalty. 
 10. Octavianus, the grandson of Julia the sister of Caius 
 Caesar, lost his father when a boy. 
 
t EXERCISES IN SYNTAX ■ 3 
 
 CHAPTER II 
 Genitive with Nouns and Adjectives 
 
 1. Genitive. 342 ; H. & B. 339 ; H. 439; G. 360; B. 195. 
 
 2. Subjective Genitive. 343, note i; H. & B. 344; H. 
 440, i; G. 363, i; B. 199. 
 
 3. Possessive Genitive. 343 ; H. & B. 339 ; H. 439 ; G. 
 362; B. 198. 
 
 4. 5. Substitutes for Genitive. 343, a; H. & B. 339, a; 
 H. 440, note 2 ; G. 362, rem. i ; B. 86. 
 
 6. Genitive of the Material. 344; H. & B. 349; B. k)-;. 
 
 7. Genitive of Quality. 345 ; H. & B. 355 ; H. 440, 3 ; 
 G. 365 ; B. 203. 
 
 8. Partitive Genitive. 346, a, 1-4 ; H. & B. 346, a-c ; 
 H. 441, 443; G. 367-369; B. 201, 1-3. 
 
 9. Substitutes for Partitive Genitive. 346, c; H. & B. 
 346, e; H. 444; G. 372, 2 ; B. 201, i, a. 
 
 10. Objective Genitive. 348; H. & B. 354; H. 440, 2; 
 G. 363, 2 ; B. 200. 
 
 11. Substitutes for Objective Genitive. 348, a; H. & B. 
 354, a ; H. 440, 2, note i ; G. 363, 2, rem, i ; B. 200, i. 
 
 12. 13. Genitive with Adjectives. 349, a, b; 385, c, 2; 
 H. & B. 354; 339, c; H. 451, i, 2, note i; G. 374; 359, 
 rem. i ; B. 204, 1-3. 
 
 14. Genitive with Special Words. 359, b; H. & B. 339, 
 d ; H. 446, 4, 5 ; G. 373 ; B. 198, i ; 201, 3, a. 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I. The safety of the allies, hope of defense, prepara- 
 tion for war. 2. The shouts of the soldiers, the noise 
 of the wheels. 3. The brother of Diviciacus, Caesar's 
 soldiers. 4. Ariovistus will reject neither my own nor the 
 Roman people's good-will. 5. The danger to the state and 
 
4 EXERCISES IN SYNTAX t 
 
 yourselves. 6. Squadrons of cavalry, a fleet of five hundred 
 ships. 7. Men of great bravery, light-armed infantry, rocks 
 of great weight. 8. So much space, less doubt, sufficient 
 cause, six thousand cavalry, g. Some one of the soldiers, 
 three of the ships, quite a number of the Belgae. 10. Rest 
 from labor, your associate in crime, reputation for bravery. 
 
 11. Your good- will towards me, hatred against Cicero. 
 
 12. Considius was considered very skillful in military affairs. 
 
 13. The boy is like his father. 14. The day after this the 
 soldiers went out after plunder. 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. Who is like Catiline? 2. The day before this Caesar 
 delayed near the town for the sake of supplies. 3. You 
 have always been eager for glory and greedy of praise. 
 4. What plan did you form ? 5. One of the soldiers, no 
 one of us, all of us, each of us, two hundred paces, two 
 thousand paces. 6. You are anxious not alone about the 
 dangers of yourselves and the state, but about my danger 
 also. 7. At the end of this island there is a fountain of 
 fresh water full of fish. 8. He was a man of great discre- 
 tion and valor, and was acquainted with the habit of the 
 Roman people, but he showed too little diligence. 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 
 Genitive with Verbs 
 
 1-3. The Genitive, or its equivalent Possessive Adjective, 
 may be used in the Predicate. 343, b, c ; H. & B. 340 ; H. 
 439. 447 ; G- 366, rem. 1-3 ; B. 198, 3. 
 
 4, 5. Remembering and Forgetting. 350, a-d ; H. & B. 
 35° ; H. 454, I ; G. 376, 2 ; B. 206, i, 2. 
 
t EXERCISES IN SYNTAX 5 
 
 6, 7. Charge and Penalty. 352, a ; H. & B. 343 ; H. 456 ; 
 G. 378; B. 208. 
 
 8-10. Verbs of Feeling. 354, a-c ; H. & B. 352, i, 2; 
 H. 457; G. 377; B. 209, I, 2. 
 
 II, 12. Interest and refert. 355, a; H. & B. 345, a, b; 
 H. 449. I. 3 ; G. 381, 382 ; B. 211, I, a, 3. 
 
 13. Plenty and Want. 356; H. & B. 347; H. 458, 2; 
 G. 383; B. 212. 
 
 14. Genitive of Price. 417; H. & B. 356, i; H. 448, i; 
 G. 379; 380, i; B. 203, 3. 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I. Gaul belongs to the Roman people rather than to 
 Ariovistus. 2. The decision in regard to the war belongs 
 not to us but to. the commander. 3. To wait is the height 
 of folly. 4. Remember the former valor of the Helvetii. 
 5. I am willing to forget the old insult. 6. Miltiades, who 
 was accused of treason, was acquitted of a capital offense. 
 7. Herennius and Popilius were senators, both of whom 
 were condemned for embezzlement. 8. The Gauls often 
 adopt plans which they repent of at once. 9. Many pitied 
 Phocion, remembering his age. 10. I shall never repent 
 of my deeds. 11. This matter is of great interest to me. 
 12. That is of little importance. 13. Who needs help? 
 14. For how much did you buy this book? 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 1. You pity others, you do not pity yourself. 2. The 
 control of so great affairs scarcely belongs to human wis- 
 dom. 3. Forget slaughter and conflagration. 4. I need your 
 counsel. 5. It is for your interest and mine especially that 
 you be well. 6. They are not ashamed of themselves and 
 
6 EXERCISES IN SYNTAX t 
 
 I pity them. 7. Your good-will is of great value to me. 
 8. Was it Mile's interest that Clodius be killed? 9. He 
 will not be condemned for a capital offense. 10. It is your 
 duty to defend the city. 11. The dangers of death are 
 regarded of little account. 12. It is the part of a grateful 
 people to reward deserving citizens. 
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 Dative with Verbs 
 
 1-3. Dative of the Indirect Object. 361, 372 ; H. & B. 
 365 ; 364, 2 ; H. 424 ; 426, 3 ; G. 344 ; 346, rem. i ; B. 187, 
 II, b. 
 
 4, 5. Dative of the Indirect Object with an Accusative of 
 the Direct. 362; H. & B. 365, 2; H. 424; G. 345; B. 
 187, I. 
 
 6, 7. Dative with Special Verbs. 367; 368, i, 2 ; H. & B. 
 364, 1,4; H. 426, 1,2; G. 346 ; B. 187, II, a. 
 
 8. Dative or Accusative with Difference in Meaning. 
 367, c; H. & B. 367; H. 426, 4; G. 346, note 2. 
 
 9, 10. Dative and Accusative or Accusative and Abla- 
 tive. 364; H. & B. 376, b; H. 426, 6; G. 348; B. 187, 
 I, a. 
 
 II, 12. Dative with Compounds. 370; H. & B. 376; H. 
 429; G. 347; B. 187, III, I, 2. 
 
 13. Dative after Verbs of Taking Away. 381 ; H. & B. 
 371 ; H. 429, 2; G. 347, 5; B. 188, 2, d. 
 
 Note i. Verbs compounded with prepositions, like many others, 
 frequently take an accusative in addition to the dative, or even an accu- 
 sative alone, if there is no object to which the preposition applies, as : 
 Caesar equites militibns legionariis praemisit, Caesar sent the cavalry 
 ahead of the legionary soldiers ;' axii Caesar equites praemisit, Caesar 
 sent the cavalry ahead. 
 
t EXERCISES IN SYNTAX 7 
 
 Note 2. Verbs which in the active take the dative alone can be 
 used in the passive only impersonally, the dative being retained ; and 
 this dative may be translated by the English subject, as : Mihi noces, 
 you harm me ; mihi abs te nocetur, / am harmed by you. 
 
 Note 3. Verbs which take the accusative and dative are used regu- 
 larly in the passive, taking the accusative of the active as subject and 
 retaining the dative, as : Caesar provlnciae exercitum imperavit, Caesar 
 levied an army upon the province ; a Caesare exercitus provinciae impe- 
 latus est, an army was levied upon the province by Caesar. 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I. The Germans yielded to the Suevi alone. 2. Dumnorix 
 favors the Helvetii. 3. The Helvetii are favored by Dum- 
 norix. 4. Caesar demanded of them a great number of 
 hostages. 5. A great number of hostages was demanded of 
 them. 6. Marcellus spared the town. 7. Do we satisfy the 
 state? 8. He feared an ambush, he did not fear for the ships, 
 g. The conspirators placed fires around the whole city. 
 10. The enemy surrounded the Romans with cavalry and 
 chariots. 11. Catiline plotted against the consul. 12. This 
 thing brought Caesar great pleasure. 13. Take this fear 
 from me. 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. It pleased the greater part. 2. He provided an army, 
 he provided for the army, he provided grain for the army. 
 3 . An army was provided, the army was provided for, grain was 
 provided for the army. 4. In these places few could resist 
 many. 5. These could be easily resisted. 6. I prefer death 
 to slavery. 7. Glabrio succeeded Lucullus. 8. Lucullus 
 was succeeded by Glabrio. 9. Caesar promised them help. 
 10. Consult for your own and the soldiers' safety. 11. If 
 you consult me, I advise you. 12. Catiline is threaten- 
 ing you and this city. 13. Caesar presented booty to the 
 
8 EXERCISES IN SYNTAX t 
 
 soldiers, he presented the soldiers with booty. 14. I place 
 friendship before all things human. 15. Pompey did not 
 take from the enemy the hope of surrender. 16. I am 
 believed, you are believed, he is believed. 17. We have 
 been persuaded, you have been persuaded, they have been 
 persuaded. 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 Dative {continued) 
 
 I. Dative of Possessor. 373; H. & B. 374; H. 430; 
 G. 349 ; B. 190. 
 
 2-41 Dative with the Gerundive. 374; H. & B. 373, i; 
 H. 431; G. 3SS; B. 189, I. 
 
 5, 6. Dative of Service. 382, i ; H. & B. 360 ; H. 433 ; 
 G. 356; B. 191, 2. 
 
 7-9. Dative with Adjectives. 384 ; H. & B. 362 ; H. 434, 
 2; G- 359; B. 192, I, 2. 
 
 10, II. Dative of Reference. 376, 377; H. & B. 368; 
 H. 42S> 4, note; G. 350, i ; 352; B. 188. 
 
 12. Ethical Dative. 380; H. &B. 372; H. 432 ; G. 351; 
 B. 188, 2, b. 
 
 Note i. To express "for" — meaning instead of, in defense of in 
 behalf of — use pro with the ablative. 
 
 Note 2. It must be remembered that the gerundive is passive, and 
 therefore such expressions as I must, I have <o, etc., must all be written 
 alike in Latin after this model : For me there is something to be done ; in 
 which the phrase " to be done " is represented by the gerundive, used 
 with some form of esse, like a predicate adjective, and agreeing with 
 the subject, as : / must write u letter, mihi epistula. scribenda est ; the 
 book is to be read, liber legendus est. Of course, if the verb is intransi- 
 tive, the passive will be impersonal and the gerundive neuter singular, 
 as : we must all die, nobis omnibus moriendum est. 
 
f EXERCISES IN SYNTAX 9 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I. We have nothing left. 2. You must endure these 
 things. 3. We must fight for our country. 4. The soldiers 
 are to be exhorted. 5. This will be a care to me. 6. Labie- 
 nus sent the tenth legion as a relief to our men. 7. Is this 
 light pleasing to you ? 8. The Belgae are the nearest to 
 the Germans, g. He selected a suitable place for the camp. 
 10. Sabinus came into contempt with the enemy. 11. They 
 threw themselves at Caesar's feet. 12. What do you mean? 
 13. Diviciacus spoke for them. 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. The conspiracy is perilous to the state and must not 
 be endured. 2. Two things were a relief to these difficulties. 
 3. What business did Caesar have in Gaul ? 4. In your 
 case alone the pillage and plundering of the allies has been 
 unpunished. 5. What do those wretches mean ? 6. In 
 return for Caesar's kindnesses toward me I am very much 
 indebted to him. 7. I must look out for a supply of grain. 
 8. The Haedui sent cavalry to the help of Caesar. 9. I still 
 have a little delay. 10. The same thing will have to be 
 done by all the Gauls. 1 1 . The sight of Cethegus hovers 
 before my eyes. 12. I will have lasting friendship with 
 you. 13. I must live with these men or die for them. 
 14. Traders had no access to them. 15. The death of 
 Ariovistus was a great grief to the Germans. 16. The line 
 of battle is to be formed and the signal must be given. 
 
lO EXERCISES IN SYNTAX f 
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 Accusative 
 
 I, 3. Accusative of the Direct Object. 387 ; 388, a ; 
 H. & B. 390; 391, i; H. 404, 405; G. 330, rem.; B. 172; 
 
 17s. b. 
 
 4, 5. Cognate Accusative. 390, c; H. & B. 396, i, 2; 
 H. 409, i; G. 333, I, 2 ; B. 176, 2, 4. 
 
 6. Adverbial Accusative. 397, a [cf. 390, c] ; H. & B. 
 387, III ; H. 416, 2 ; G. 334, rem. ; B. 176, 3. 
 
 7, 8. Direct Object and Predicate Accusative (noun or 
 adjective) with Verbs of Naming, etc. 393 ; H. & B. 392, 
 a; 410; G. 340; B. 177, i, 2. 
 
 9, 10. How to form the Passive. 393, a; H. & B. 392, 
 b; H. 410, i; G. 340, rem. i; B. 177, 3. 
 
 II, 12. Secondary Object with Compounds and Verbs 
 of Asking, etc. 395, 396 ; H. Sz: B. 393 ; H. 411; G. 339 ; 
 B. 178, 179. 
 
 13. Substitute for Secondary Object. 396, a; H. & B. 
 393, b, c; H. 411, 3, 4; G. 339, rem. i; B. 178, a. 
 
 14-16. How to form the Passive. 396, b; H. & B. 393, 
 a; H. 411, i; G. 339, 4; B. 178, 2. 
 
 17. Duration of Time and Extent of Space. 423, 425; 
 H. & B. 387 ; H. 417 ; G. 335. 336 ; B. 181. 
 
 i-io. Infinitive with Subject Accusative. 397, e; H. & B. 
 398; H. 4x5; G. 343, 2; B. 184. 
 
 Note i. Write 1-3 and 5-10 a second time -with dixit before them. 
 300, 2 ; H. & B. 262, 2 ; H. 504 ; G. 520 ; B. 244, II. 
 
 Note 2. The cognate accusative may be a, noun repeating the exact 
 meaning of the verb, as : somnium somniare, to dream a dream ; or a 
 neuter adjective, or pronoun, defining or limiting the meaning of the 
 verb, as : idem peccat, he commits the same fault, or pauca lespondit, 
 he makes a brief reply. The cognate accusative becomes the cognate 
 subject in the passive, as : idem peccatur, the same fault is committed. 
 
t EXERCISES IN SYNTAX II 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I. Labienus held the mountain. 2. The mountain was 
 held by Labienus. 3. The citizens grieved at my misfortune 
 and sorrow. 4. Is he serving a private servitude ? 5. I give 
 them this advice. 6. He is very powerful. 7. The Romans 
 called the Celts Gauls. 8. Mucius called Laelius wise. 
 9. Laelius was called wise by Mucius. 10. The Celts were 
 called Gauls. 11. Caesar led his army across the river. 
 12. He asked me my opinion. 13. They sought peace of 
 the Romans. 14. The Belgae were led across the Rhine. 
 15. Sabinus was asked his opinion. 16. Peace was sought 
 from the Romans. 17. Caesar delayed a few days. 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. Cincinnatus was called dictator. 2. I will in no way 
 harm you. 3. You shall in no way be harmed. 4. He 
 asked of him alone the same questions. 5. Scipio and 
 Laelius lived the life which alone is to be called life. 
 6. Why do you ask me that? 7. All have the same opin- 
 ion. 8. They despair of honors. 9. He has much power, 
 he has more power, he has the most power, i o. How much 
 influence has he? He has very great influence. 11. They 
 make this boast. 12. Mithridates taught us this. 13. We 
 were taught this by Mithridates. 14. I give this warning 
 to all. 15. This warning is given to all. 16. This warning 
 is to be given to all. 
 
12 EXERCISES IN SYNTAX t 
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 
 Ablative 
 
 1-3. Ablative of Separation. 401, 402 ; H. & B. 408, 
 1-3; H. 461 ; 462, l; G. 390, I, 2 ; B. 214, 1-3. 
 
 4, 5. Ablative with opus and usus. 411; H. & B. 430; 
 H. 477, III ; G. 406 ; B. 218, 2. 
 
 6, 7. Ablative of Source and Material. 403 ; H. & B.' 
 413 ; 406, 4 ; H. 467 ; G. 395, 396 ; B. 215. 
 
 8. Ablative of Cause. 404; H. & B. 444; H. 475; G. 
 408 ; B. 219. 
 
 9-12. Ablative with dignus, indignus, contentus, and fretus. 
 418, b ; 431, a ; H. & B. 442, 432 ; H. 481 ; 476, 1 ; G. 397, 
 2 ; 401, 6 ; B. 226, 2 ; 218, 3. 
 
 13. Ablative of Agent. 405 ; H. & B. 40*6, i ; H. 468 ; 
 G. 401 ; B. 216. 
 
 14-16. Ablative with Comparatives. 406; 407, a, c; 
 H. & B. 416, d; H. 471, I, 4; G. 398; B. 217, 1-3. 
 
 17, 18. Ablative of Manner. 412, a; H. & B. 445; H. 
 473> 3; G. 399; B. 220, I. 
 
 19. Ablative of Accompaniment. 413; H. & B. 420; 
 H. 473, i; G. 392; B. 222. 
 
 20. Ablative with Verbs of Contention and Association. 
 413, b ; H. & B. 419 ; H. 473 ; G. 392 ; B. — 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I. They deprive us of all hope. 2. They ceased from this 
 attempt. 3. They will be driven from the state. 4. There 
 is need of help. 5. I need your services. 6. The Belgae 
 sprang from- the Germans. 7. The ships were made wholly 
 of oak. 8. We are perishing from hunger. 9. They are 
 worthy of the punishment. 10. They committed no act 
 
t EXERCISES IN SYNTAX 1 3 
 
 unworthy of themselves, ii. He was not content with this. 
 
 12. The Sontiates were relying on their previous victories. 
 
 13. The mountain was held by Labienus. 14. Your plans 
 are clearer to us than light. 15. He is more worthy of pity 
 than reproach. 16. A space of not more than two hundred 
 feet was left. 17. The ancients wrote with care. 18. We 
 have freed the state with great peace. 19. They went from 
 their borders with all their forces. 20. He contends with 
 them, he talks with them, he makes peace with them. 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. More than fifteen thousand men with all the cavalry 
 were sent by Ariovistus. 2. My country is dearer to me 
 than to you. 3. My country is dearer to me than life. 
 4. The enemy fought with rashness and imprudence. 5. Go 
 from the city, free the state from fear. 6. The Gauls were 
 alarmed by the swiftness of the Romans. 7. Now there 
 is need of strength. 8. I rely on you. 9. He was con- 
 tent with the honor. 10. The shields were made of bark. 
 II. Catiline was dislodged from his vantage-ground, he was 
 driven from the city. 12. You are worthy of the greatest 
 praise. 13, The consul did not need ships. 14. I am 
 moved by grief. 15. There has been nothing nobler than 
 this battle. 16. He was born of a most distinguished family. 
 17. Nothing could be accomplished by the enemy by these 
 means, because of the watchfulness of our men. 18. With 
 great fury the Romans fought with the Germans with swords. 
 
14 EXERCISES IN SYNTAX t 
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 Ablative (continued) 
 
 I, z. Ablative of Means. 409 ; 429, a; H. & B. 423, 426; 
 H. 476; G. 401, 389; B. 218. 
 
 3, 4. Ablative with utor, fruor, etc. 410; H. & B. 429; 
 H. 477 ; G. 407; B. 218, I. 
 
 5, 6. Ablative of the Degree of Difference. 414, a; 
 H. & B. 424, a; H. 479 ; G. 403 ; B. 223. 
 
 7. Ablative of Quality. 415, a; H. & B. 443; H. 473, 
 2 ; G. 400 ; B. 224. 
 
 8. Ablative of Price. 416; H. & B. 427; H. 478; G. 
 404; B. 225. 
 
 g. Substitutes for Ablative of Price. 417; H. & B. 427, 
 2 ; H. 478, 2 ; G. 379, 380 ; B. 203, 4. 
 
 10. Ablative of Specification. 418 ; H. & B. 441 ; H. 
 480; G. 398; B. 226. 
 
 II, 12. Ablative Absolute. 419, a; H. & B. 421; H. 489 ; 
 G. 409 ; B. 227, I. 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I.' The Gauls were won over by this speech. 2. Caesar 
 pushes on by the same road which the enemy had gone. 
 3. How long will you abuse our patience? 4. I will per- 
 form the duty of a consul. 5. He advanced a little farther. 
 6. The more severe the attack was, the more frequent were 
 the dispatches. 7. Pompey possessed great self-control. 
 8. The estate was sold for four hundred minae. 9. The 
 services of Gato were of great value, they were rated not less 
 than a triumph. 10. The Gauls differed in language, insti- 
 tutions, and laws. 11. All the buildings being set on fire, 
 he hastened into the province. 12. With Dumnorix as 
 mediator, they obtain their request. 
 
EXERCISES IN SYNTAX 15 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. This man sold his country for gold. 2. I sold the 
 estate for more than I bought it for. 3. The Helvetii 
 surpass the rest of the Gauls in valor. 4. They used their 
 swords the more freely. 5. I bear this the more grievously, 
 the less deservedly it has happened. 6. The enemy got 
 possession of the camp and baggage. 7. The Roman fleet 
 excelled in speed. 8. Agesilaus was of low stature and 
 slender body, and lame in one foot. 9. This response b6ing 
 given, he withdrew. 10. He is performing, the duty of a 
 slave. II. This state was of great influence among the 
 Belgae, and excelled in number of men. 12. He was king 
 in name more than in power. 13. This road is much easier. 
 14. He could not use the grain which he had brought up 
 the river in ships. 15. I enjoy the recollection of our 
 friendship. 
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 Expressions of Time and Place 
 
 1-3. Time when or within which. 423; H. & B. 439; 
 H. 486, 487; G. 393; B. 230, 231. 
 
 4, 5. Extent of Time and Space. 423, 425 ; H. & B. 
 387; H. 417; G. 33S, 336; B. 181. 
 
 6. Place yw»« which. 426, i; 427, i; H. & B. 409; 
 451, a; H. 491, 2 ; II, 2 ; G. 390, 2 ; 391 ; B. 229, i, a, b. 
 
 7-9. Place to which. 426, 2; 427, 2; 428, j; H. & B. 
 450, a, b, c; H. 491, i; II, i; G. 337, 6; B. 182, i, 2. 
 
 10. Place in which. 426, 3 ; 427, 3 ; H. & B. 433 ; 449, a ; 
 H. 491,3; 11,3; G. 385; 386; 411, 2; B. 228, I, a; 232, 1,2. 
 
 Note i. Distance froip a. place Is expressed either by the ablative 
 as measure of difference or by the accusative of extent. 
 
1 6 EXERCISES IN SYNTAX t 
 
 Note 2. The length of time before or after an event is more gen- 
 erally expressed by the ablative as measure of difference, less often by 
 the accusative of extent. 
 
 Note 3. The number of days before the Calends, Nones, or Ides 
 of the month is expressed by diem and an ordinal number placed 
 between ante and Kalendas, Nonas, or Idltis ; except the Jirsi day before, 
 which is expressed by pridie. 631, a-d; H. & B. 662-666; H. 754; 
 G. p. 491; B. 371. 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I.' The same day he moved his camp. 2. You will hear 
 this within thre.e days. 3. Caesar was assassinated on the 
 Ides of March. 4. He lived many years in Italy. 5. The 
 rod is seven feet long. 6. He came from home, from Italy, 
 from Corinth, from the country, from the town, from Athens. 
 7. He has gone home, to Italy, to Corinth, to the country, 
 to the town, to Athens. 8. The enemy had hidden in the 
 woods, g. Many came to him in the camp. 10. He has lived 
 at home, in Italy, at Corinth, in the country, in the town, at 
 Athens. 11. Caesar stationed the legion two hundred paces 
 from the hill. 12. The town was eight miles away. 13. Vale- 
 rius had been killed there a few years before. 14. The 
 fourth year after Themistocles was expelled from Athens. 
 15. October 21. 16. February 2. 17. December 31. 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. Pompey conducted matters successfully on land and 
 sea. 2. We went from Brundisium to Athens, from Athens 
 to Asia, from Asia to Europe. 3. We will give hostages in 
 a few days. 4. They pitched caiiip less than ten miles off. 
 5. Two years after the death of Africanus. 6. This took 
 place sixteen years ago. 7. The hill was bare for two 
 hundred paces. 8. March 31. 9. Januarys. 10. We started 
 from the city to the country June 25, remained in the 
 
t EXERCISES IN SYNTAX Ij 
 
 country two months, and returned from the country to the 
 city, August 25. II. Diviciacus alone came to the senate 
 at Rome. 12. Deputies came from Rome to Carthage. 
 
 CHAPTER X 
 
 Conjunctions, Negative Combinations, Questions 
 
 1-3. When there are more than two coordinate words 
 or clauses, the conjunction is generally omitted entirely or 
 repeated between every two, but sometimes que connects the 
 last two only. 323, b, c, i and 3, d; H. & B. 305, a; 307, 
 c, d; H. 657, 6, note; G. 481, i, 2, note; B. 341, 4. 
 
 4. Two adjectives belonging to the same noun require the 
 connective. 
 
 5. When the same subordinate conjunction, or pronoun, 
 or preposition, belongs to several words or clauses, it is 
 commonly repeated with each, as : Caesar questus est quod 
 Haeduos, quod Ambarros, quod Allobrogas Helvetii vexassent. 
 
 6. Negatives are frequently joined with the connective at 
 the beginning of the sentence or clause, as : neque, and not ; 
 neque tamen, and yet not ; neque ^tAm^for not; nee quisquam, 
 and no one. 
 
 7. 8. Postpositives. The words autem, enim, fere, modo, 
 que, quidem, quoque, vero are placed right after the word, or 
 the first word (except a preposition) of the phrase or clause 
 to which they belong. Que is also enclitic. 
 
 9-12. Questions which contain an interrogative pronoun 
 or adverb are just like English. Otherwise special particles 
 are used. 332, a, b; 333, a; 336, a; 337; H. & B. 231, 
 232; H. 378, 379; G. 454, 455, 456, 47i; B. 162, i, 2, 5. 
 
 13. Alternative Questions. 334, 335; H. & B. 234; 
 H. 380; 0.458; B. 162, 4. 
 
l8 EXERCISES IN SYNTAX 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I. The enemy were driven away by slings, arrows, and 
 engines. 2. I heartily approve your law, wish, and purpose. 
 3. They had fields, buildings, and villages. 4. There were 
 many large islands. 5. We must contend with extravagance, 
 madness, and crime. 6. For this matter does not bring 
 grief to Catiline. 7. Then indeed the enemy conveyed 
 themselves and all their possessions into the town. 8. For 
 Archias was a citizen in other states also. 9. What are you 
 doing? 10. Do you remember.? Yes. 11. Did not your 
 associates meet at the house of Laeca? 12. Do you dare 
 deny it ? 13. Was Roscius killed by slaves or freemen ? 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. The same man managed the war with Jugurtha, the 
 Cimbri, and the Teutoni. 2. A good man, indeed, loves 
 praise. 3. Philosophers even do not despise praise. 4. I 
 said this to many great men. 5. Shall we lead the forces 
 against the enemy or defend the camp? 6. Nearly all 
 Britain was unknown to the Gauls. 7. For traders did not 
 often visit the island, and to them the interior regions were 
 not known. 8. And yet Caesar did not hesitate to visit 
 Britain. 9. For it was of great advantage to him to examine 
 merely the ports, locations, and entrances. 10. Will you 
 allow Catiline to go from the city? 11. Will you not punish 
 him with death? 12. What, pray, hinders you? 13. Is it 
 custom, or the law? 
 
t EXERCISES IN SYNTAX 1 9 
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 Pronouns 
 
 I, 2.. Personal. 295, a, c; 143, f ; H. & B. 257 ; 418, a; 
 H. 500 ; 175,7; G. 207 ; 413, rem. i ; B. 242 ; 142, 4. 
 
 3-6. Intensive. 298, d, f ; H. & B. 267, 268, 269 ; H. 
 509' I. 3; G. 311, I, 2; B. 249, I, 2. 
 
 7-9. Reflexive. 299, a; H. & B. 260, a, b; 262, i, 2; 
 H. 502 ; 503, I ; G. 309, 1 ; B. 85, 244. 
 
 10, II. Possessive Adjectives in place of the Genitive of 
 the Personal Pronouns. 145., a; 302, a, d ; H. & B. 136, 
 a, d; H. 176; 503, i; G. 364; B. 86, i. 
 
 12-15. Demonstrative. 296, 1, 2; 297, a-d; H. & B. 
 271, a; 272, 274; H. 505, 506, 508;' G. 305-308; B. 246, 
 247. See also Part I, Caes. Ill: 22: r-4. 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I. Both father and I have served you. 2. You proceed, 
 I will listen. 3. Caesar himself hastened into Italy. 4. You 
 yourselves see these things. 5. The supply of grain began 
 to fail themselves. 6. They fought on the very banks of 
 the river. 7. You have given yourself into custody. 8. I 
 blame myself, you blame yourself, he blames himself. [Add 
 the plural forms.] 9. He took all his army with him. 
 10. My country is dear to me, yours to you. 11. Caesar 
 exhorted his men. 12. How long will that fury of yours 
 bafHeus? 13. Grief retarded the former, joy these. 14. He 
 killed the consul and sent his army under the yoke. 15. We 
 do not. blame those who say what they think. 
 
20 EXERCISES IN SYNTAX t 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. You have through yourselves brought dignity to this 
 empire. 2. The aged Cato, Alexander the Great. ' 3. At 
 last Catiline has gone from this city. 4. Now we shall not 
 fear that monster and that dagger. 5. He has taken his 
 forces with him. 6. You yourselves from this very place 
 have heard these things. 7. I have often exposed myself 
 to that fury of yours. 8. I esteem Africanus and he in turn 
 esteems me. 9. This commander saved himself and his 
 men, that one defeated a consul and his army. 
 
 CHAPTER XII 
 
 Relatives and Correlatives 
 
 1-3. Construction. 305; 150, d; 308, h; H. & B. 322; 
 4.18, a ; H. 396 ; 182, 2 ; G. 614 ; 413, i ; B. 250 ; 142, 4. 
 
 4. Relative in Agreement with Predicate Noun. 306 ; 
 H. & B. 326, I ; H. 396, 2 ; G. 614, 3, b ; B. 250, 3. 
 
 5. Repetition of the Antecedent. 307, a; H. & B. 284, 
 4; H. 399, i; G. 615; B. 251, 3. 
 
 6. Relative never omitted. 308, a; H. & B. 284, 2 ; B. 251, 5. 
 7-9. Position of Relative Clause. 308, d ; H. & B. 284, 
 
 5; H. 683, 2; G. 620; B.— 
 
 10, 11. Position of Relative, referring to previous sentence. 
 308, f, note; H. & B. 284, 8; H. 510; G. 610; B.'2Si, 6. 
 
 Note. The rules for relative pronouns apply also to the following 
 and other 
 
 Correlatives 
 
 Talis,suci{hnd). TaMs qusilis, suci (iiad) as. Qualis? Wkatkind? 
 
 Tantua, so great. Tuntnaqusintus, as {01 so) great as. Quautas? J7otv great ? 
 Tam,so(or as) — . Tam quam, as (or so) — as. Quam? Ifow — ? 
 
 Tot, so many. Tot quot, as (or so) many as. Quot ? How many ? 
 Toties, so often. Toties quoties, as (or so) often as. Quoties? ffow often? 
 
t EXERCISES IN SYNTAX 21 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I. The city which you see is most beautiful. 2. These 
 are the same ones with whom the Helvetii engaged. 3. He 
 did the same as Coriolanus had done. 4. Nothing is better 
 than friendship, which is a fountain of good-will. 5. He 
 marched into those places where the Germans were. 6. I 
 received the message you sent. 7. Defend this city which 
 is the most beautiful. 8. With the material of those vessels 
 which were most seriously, damaged he repaired the rest. 
 9. I have incurred as great a multitude of enemies as is the 
 band of conspirators. 10. Great is the power of conscience. 
 And those who disregard this often betray themselves. 
 II. Caesar sent for the fleet. And while this was coming 
 he waited. 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. There are as many opinions as men. 2. I take as much 
 time for study as is granted to others for pleasure. 3. I have 
 written to you as often as I have received letters from you. 
 4. How often I have seen this man ! 5. He is not so wise as 
 he is brave. 6. They followed the same plan as their neigh- 
 bors. 7. The beginning of the flight at the cavalry battle, 
 which took place a few days ago, was made by Dumnorix. 
 8. What sort of a man was Laelius? 9. He was such a man 
 as we all admire. 10. Almost no one secured so many honors 
 as Pompey. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII 
 Indefinite Pronouns and Adverbs 
 
 Formation. 151, a-i ; H. & B. 140, d; 142, 1-9, a; H. 
 187, 1-4; G. 107, 108, III ; B. 91, 92. 
 
 Uses. 310-313; H. & B. 276, 278; H. 512-515; G. 
 313-318; B. 252, 1-6. 
 
22 EXERCISES IN SYNTAX t 
 
 The Pronominal Adjectives alter and alius. 315, a, b, c ; 
 H. & B. 279, 1-4; H. 516, I ; G. 319; B. 253, 1-3. 
 
 Note i. The prefix ali with a pronoun or adverb means some, as: 
 aliquis, some one ; aliquando, some time; ali(c)ubi, somewhere ; aliquot, 
 several. The suffix dam means some, u certain, as : quidam, some one, 
 a certain person ; quondam, a certain time, once, one day, etc. The suffix 
 quam has the force of any, any at all, as : quisquam, any one [at alii > 
 umquam, any time, ever ; us[for ubi]quam, anywhere. The suffix que 
 has the force of every, as : quisque, every one ; ubique, everywhere ; 
 Uterque, each of two, both. The suffix cumque has the force of ever, as : 
 quicumque, whoever ; ubicumque, wherever ; qualiscumque, of whatever 
 sort. The suffix vis, or libet, means any you choose, anybody, emphatic, 
 as : qui'rfs, or quilibet, any one whosoever, anybody ; utervis (from uter, 
 which [of two]), whichever [of the two], i.e., either. NonnuUi means 
 some, a number, in distinction from none at all. 
 
 Note 2. After si, nisi, ne, and num use quis [qua, quid] for any ; 
 aliquis for some. In negatives, or interrogatives and conditions imply- 
 ing a negative, and after sine, vix, and quam use quisquam (subst.) 
 iillus (adj.) for any [at all] ; aliquis for some. In affirmative statements 
 use aliquis for some one {i.e., no one in particular) ; quidam for some 
 one, a certain one {i.e., some one in the speaker's mind). Quivis and 
 quilibet, anybody you choose [therefore, logically, everybody], emphatic, 
 are used chiefly in affirmative statements, though they may be used in 
 conditions where the meaning requires, which is very seldom. 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 1. If any one is like Catiline, he will without any doubt 
 sympathize with , Catiline. 2. What disgrace was ever so 
 great in any man as in him.? 3. I will suppress this con- 
 spiracy by whatever means, if in any way it can be done. 
 4. But some do not believe the conspiracy. 5. I do this 
 with a certain fear. 6. I do this with some fear. 7. I do 
 this without any fear. 8. I do not do this without some 
 fear. g. Will any one be allowed to go ? [Write this with 
 several meanings to "any one."] 10. If any one at all is 
 
t EXERCISES IN SYNTAX 23 
 
 ever allowed to go, any one and every one will be allowed 
 to go, whenever he wishes. 11. Was there ever any one 
 anywhere wiser than he ? 12. One said, one thing ; another, 
 another. 13. Some feared the enemy; others, the roads. 
 14. Once there were two citizens at Rome, one of whom 
 conquered provinces, the other saved the state. 15. If one 
 is caught in some wickedness, he is punished. 16. Which 
 of you will go with me ? Either you wish, or both of us, 
 will go. 17. A certain good fortune everywhere attends 
 certain great men who are successful in everything and 
 never seek help from any one. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV 
 The Participle 
 
 1. Tenses of the Participle. 489; H. & B. 600, 1-4; 
 H. 640; G. 282, 283; B. 336, 1-5. 
 
 2. The Participle used like an Adjective, as in English. 
 494 ; H. & B. 599, a ; H. 636 ; G. 438 ; B. 337, i. 
 
 3. The Participle in place of a Subordinate Clause. 
 496; H. & B. 604, 2-5; H. 638, I, 2; G. 664; B. 337, 
 2, a-f. 
 
 4-6. The Participle in place of a Coordinate Clause. 
 496, note 2 ; H. & B. 604, i ; H. 639 ; G. 664, rem. i ; B. — 
 
 7. The Participle in place of a Verbal Noun with of. 
 497; H. & B. 608, 2 ; H. 636, 4; G. 664, 2; B. 337, 5. 
 
 8, 9. The future active V&xiici^ltviiih sum, to denote what 
 is likely, intended, or about to happen. 499, 1,2; H. & B. 
 607 ; H. 638, 3 ; G. 247 ; B. 337, 4- 
 
 10, II. The future j>assive {gerundive) with sum, to denote 
 what is to be done, often implying obligation. 500, 1-3;. 
 H. &B. 600, 3; H. 621, i; G. 251; B. 337, 7, a, b, i. 
 
24 EXERCISES IN SYNTAX 
 
 12, 13. Th& future passive agreeing with the object of 
 verbs signifying to give, deliver, receive, undertake, etc. 500, 
 4 ; H. & B. 60s, 2 ; H. 622 ; G. 430 ; B. 337, 7, 2. 
 
 Note. Where in English we use two coordinate verbs, in Latin a 
 perfect participle and one verb are generally used, if one act is merely 
 preparatory or incidental to the other. If the noun with which the 
 participle agrees is the subject or object of the verb, no further change 
 must be made ; if the noun is not subject or object, it becomes ablative 
 absolute. 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I. They caught sight of some as they were leaving the 
 ship, others after leaving, some as they were about to leave. 
 2. The struggling soldiers, armed forces. .3. They returned 
 because they feared treachery. 4. The enemy led their 
 forces from the camp and drew them up.' 5. Indutiomarus 
 is caught and killed. 6. Caesar led his legions into winter 
 quarters and started for Italy. 7. After the founding of the 
 city, the sinking of the enemy's fleet. 8. Men are not likely 
 to endure these things. 9. Catiline is not intending to go 
 into exile. 10. The camp is to be fortified. 11. All the 
 Gauls will have to do the same thing. 12. Caesar had a 
 bridge built. 13. He gave the army to his lieutenants to 
 be led among the Menapii. 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. The enemy, being defeated, sent deputies about peace. 
 
 2. Caesar, having defeated the enemy, withdrew into camp. 
 
 3. Crassus, having delayed 'a few days, set fire to all the 
 villages and returned into the province, no enemy delay- 
 ing the march. 4. Will you disregard the taking of life? 
 5. This is not to be borne. 6. We must lead the army into 
 winter quarters. 7. They were about to cross the river. 
 8. Lentulus has assigned us to Cethegus to be slaughtered. 
 
t EXERCISES IN SYNTAX 25 
 
 9. Hannibal drew Gracchus into ambush and killed him. 
 
 10. They surrounded and killed the enemy while impeded 
 and attempting to cross the river. 11. Caesar, learning this 
 and fearing an ambush, followed up and killed the fleeing 
 enemy. 
 
 CHAPTER XV 
 Gerund and Gerundive. Supine. Infinitive 
 
 1-3. Gerund and Gerundive. 502, 503, note and a 
 H. & B. 609, 611 ; H. 621, 624; G. 426, 427 ; ' B. 338, 339 
 
 3-5. Genitive. 504, b, c; H. & B. 612, 1; 614; H. 626 
 3 ; G. 428, I, 2 ; B. 338, I, 5 ; 339, i. 
 
 6. Dative. 505, a; H. & B. 612, II; 613; H. 627 
 G. 429; B. 338,. 2; 339, 2. 
 
 7,8. Accusative. 506, note 2; H. & B. 612, III ; H. 628 
 G- 432; B. 338, 3; 339, 2. 
 
 9, 10. Ablative. 507, note 2 ; H. & B. 612, IV; H. 629 
 G. 433; B. 338, 4; 339, 2. 
 
 11-13. The Supine. 509, 510; H. & B. 618, 619 
 H. 634; 635, i; G. 43S, 436; B. 340, i, 2. 
 
 14. The Iniinitive as subject of esse. 452 ; 289, d 
 H. & B. 585 ; H. 615; G. 422 ; B. 327, 330. 
 
 15, 16. Complementary Infinitive. 456 ; H. & B. 586, a 
 H. 607; G. 423; B. 328. 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I. The desire of fighting. 2. They were fond of hunting. 
 
 3. A plan for renewing the war and crushing the legion. 
 
 4. Give us the chance of sending deputies. 5. They fled 
 for the sake of saving themselves. 6. This is the day set 
 for besieging all the winter quarters of Caesar. 7. The 
 
26 EXERCISES IN SYNTAX t 
 
 ships were useless for sailing. 8. These things were of use 
 for repairing the ships. 9. In seeking peace the enemy 
 attempted to gain their request by deceiving. 10. Deputies 
 were sent with reference to seeking peace. 11. The Haedui 
 sent deputies to ask help. 12. It is strange to say. 13. This 
 is the best thing to be done. 14. It is most dishonorable 
 not to protect and save the empire. 15. They began to 
 fortify the camp. 16. We desire to protect the empire. 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. The hope of getting possession of the town disap- 
 pointed them. 2 . They do this for the sake of training the 
 youth. 3. Athletes at Athens trained themselves by run- 
 ning and jumping. 4. It is difficult to say. 5. Deputies 
 were sent to seek peace. 6. Orgetorix is chosen to carry 
 out these things. 7. He gives the signal for commencing 
 battle. 8. The opportunity of freeing themselves was given. 
 9. It is difficult to cross the river. 10. They dared to 
 cross the river. 11. The weather was suitable for sailing. 
 12. The Haedui came to complain. 13. To complete the 
 undertakings is a thing very easy to be done. 14. Time 
 was given neither for holding a council nor taking arras. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI 
 
 Hortatory and Deliberative Subjunctive. Imperative 
 
 How to Express May, Can, Ought, etc. 
 
 1,2. Hortatory Subjunctive. 439; H. & B. 501, 3; 
 H. SS9, I, 2; G. 263, 3; B. 274, 275. 
 
 3, 4. Deliberative Subjunctive. 444 ; H. & B. 503 ; 
 H. SS9> 4; G. 259; B. 277. 
 
t EXERCISES IN SYNTAX 27 
 
 5-7. Imperative. 448; 449, a; H. & B. 496, c; H. 560, 
 2; G. 267, rem.; B. 281. 
 
 5, 6. Vocative. 340; H. & B. 400; H. 402; G. 201, 2; 
 B. 171. 
 
 8. Prohibitions. 450; H. & B. 501, 3, a, 2 ; H. 561, i; 
 G. 270, 2 ; B. 276, c. 
 
 9. With tlie hortatory subjunctive and the imperative ne is 
 used for not; neve (neu) for and not or nor. Debeo and possum 
 take the complementary infinitive, as : ire debeo, I ought to go. 
 Licet takes the dative and the infinitive (sometimes subjunc- 
 tive), as : mihi ire licet, it is allowed m'e to go, I am allowed to 
 go, I may go, etc. Oportet takes the accusative and the infini- 
 tive (sometimes subjunctive without ut), as : te ire oportet or 
 oportet eas, it behooves you to go, you ought to go, etc. 
 
 Note. The present infinitive is used regularly with the past tenses 
 of possum, debeo, licet, oportet ; where the English requires the perfect, 
 if we use the defective verbs, " could," " might," " ought," as we usually 
 do in statements contrary to the fact. 
 
 - ^ , . { I was able to go ifi.xA -^sxiXS. 
 
 Ire poteram or potui, < ^ , , , „ ,. , 
 
 ( I could nave gone (but did not). 
 
 z ,..-. ,..^ . ( I was under obligation to go (and went). 
 
 Ire debebam or debui, X " ^ ' 
 
 ought to have gone (but did not). 
 
 „., . . ,. -1 i ,. .^ { I was allowed to go (a.-D.dL ■vient). 
 Mihi ne licebat or hcuit, -^ ^ . , , „ ,. , . 
 
 ( I might have gone (but did not). 
 
 It behooved me to go (and I went). 
 
 I ought to have gone (but did not). 
 
 Me ire oportebat or oportuit, \ 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I. Let these men go, let them not allow Catiline to go 
 alone. 2. Let it be decreed. 3. Why should I -here men- 
 tion the Roman knights ? 4. Should I not esteem this man ? 
 5. Go from the city, Catiline, separate yourself from good 
 men, make war upon your country, take all your followers 
 with you. 6. Remember, citizens, that these men are to 
 
28 EXERCISES IN SYNTAX t 
 
 be feared. 7. Consider these men in the number of the 
 enemy. 8. Do not subject all Gaul to servitude. 9. Let 
 not these citizens be driven into exile, nor let their property 
 be confiscated. 10. This could have been done. 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. Let us not delay, let us start at once. 2. Remember 
 me, consider me in the number of your friends. 3. What 
 shall I say ? shall I complain ? should you hesitate ? 4. Do 
 not yield nor fear death, but defend yourself. 5. Let the 
 wicked separate themselves from good men. 6. Do not 
 assist the enemies of the Roman people with grain or other 
 means. 7. I ought to put you to death. 8. You ought 
 long ago to have been put to death. 9. I could have done 
 this. 10. You may do this, you might have done this. 
 II. We shall all be allowed to go. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII 
 Conditions 
 
 Definitions. 512; 525, a, i, 2 ; H. & B. 573, 578 ;H. 
 572 ; 575. 2 ; G. 589, 591 ; B. 301, 306. 
 
 I, 2. Present and Past Conditions, nothing implied. 515; 
 H. & B. 579 ; H. 574 ; G. 595 ; B. 302, i. 
 
 3. Future Conditions, more vivid. 516, i, a; H. & B. 
 579. a; H. 574, 2 ; G. 595 ; B. 302, i. 
 
 4. Future Conditions, less vivid. 516, 2, b ; H. & B. 580 ; 
 H. 576; G. 596; B. 303. 
 
 5. 6. Future Conditions, condition completed. 516, c; 
 H. 576, i; G. 596, 1. 
 
 7. Conditions Contrary to Yz.cX., present. 517, a; H. & B. 
 581; H. 579, i; G. 597, rem. i; B. 304, 2. 
 
t EXERCISES IN SYNTAX , 29 
 
 8. Conditions Contrary to Fact, ^ast 517; H. & B. 581; 
 H. S79; G. 597; B. 304. 
 
 9-11. Wislies. 441; 442, a; H. & B. 510, a; 511, i; 
 519, c; H. 556 ; 558, I, 2 ; G. 260; 261, rem.; B. 279, i, 2. 
 
 Note i . • Wishes have the same mood and tense as less vivid future 
 conditions and conditions contrary to fact. 
 
 Note 2. In a condition contrary to fact the protasis and apodosis 
 may both be imperfect or both pluperfect ; or either one may be imper- 
 fect and the other pluperfect, according as each denotes continued or 
 completed action. 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 1. They are greatly mistaken, if they now expect leniency. 
 2. If they hoped that they would be dictators, they were 
 greatly mistaken. 3. If Catiline shall withdraw from the 
 city, many will go with him. 4. If he should remain, we 
 should all fear assassination. 5. If he goes out of the city 
 and takes all his forces with him, I shall rejoice. 6. But if 
 I should order him to go, many would say I was a tyrant. 
 7. If all his forces were outside of the city, we should not 
 fear. 8. If he had taken all his forces with him, he would 
 have freed us from fear. 9. Would that you, Catiline, would 
 take all your forces with you! 10. I would wish all his 
 forces were outside of the city. 11. Would that he had 
 taken all his forces from the city! 12. If he had taken 
 all his forces with him, I should rejoice. 13. If I thought 
 it the best thing to do, I should have put Catiline to death 
 long ago. 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. If I do not hinder you in your right, you ought not to 
 hinder me in mine. 2. If you had not hindered me, I should 
 not complain. 3. I should not have come into Gaul, if I 
 had not been asked. 4. If I did not think Gaul belonged 
 
30 EXERCISES IN SYNTAX t 
 
 to me, I should not have led the Germans across the Rhine. 
 5. Unless you lead your army from these regions, I shall 
 consider you as an enemy. 6. If I should kill you, I should 
 do a favor to the Roman people. 7. If you lead your army 
 away, I will make peace with you. 8. Oh, if my brother 
 were living ! 9. Would that I had never . come to these 
 shores ! 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII 
 Tenses of the Indicative 
 
 1-6. Present — progressive, general truth, with iam diu, 
 etc., historical, with dum. 465, 466; 469, a; 556; H. & B. 
 468, I, a, b; 485; 491, i; H. 532, 1-3; 533, i, 4'; G. 227- 
 230; B. 259, 293. 
 
 7-11. Imperfect — progressive, customary or repeated, at- 
 tempted, in description, with iam diii, etc. 470; 471, a, b, c; 
 H. & B. 468, 2 ; 484 ; 485 ; H. 534, 1-3 ; 535 ; 530 ; G. 231- 
 234; B. 260, 1-4. 
 
 12. Future. 472, a, b ; H. & B. 468, 3; H. 536; G. 
 242 ; B. 261. 
 
 13-15. Perfect — definite, indefinite, emphatically finished. 
 473, 474; H. & B. 468, 4; 489; H. 537, I, 2r G. 235; 
 236, i; 239; B. 262. 
 
 16. Pluperfect. 477; H. & B. 468, 5; H. 539; G. 241; 
 B. 263. 
 
 17. Future Perfect. 478 ; H. & B. 468, 6; H. 540; G. 
 244 ; B. 264. 
 
 18. Preterite Verbs. A few verbs whose present stem is 
 wanting are used in the perfect and pluperfect with the force 
 of the present and perfect, as odi and memini. And a few 
 verbs, such as cognosco, / learn ; consuSsco, / become accus- 
 tomed ; consists, / take a stand, acquire a double meaning 
 
t EXERCISES IN SYNTAX 3 1 
 
 in the perfect, as : cognovi, / have learned or / know ; c6g- 
 noveram, I had learned ox I knew. 205, a, b; 476; H. & B. 
 199, 1,2; 487 ; H. 299, 1,2; 538, 4 ; G. 236, rem. ; B. 133 ; 
 262, A. 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 1. I am aware of your plans. 2. The army is marching. 
 3. Nothing is dearer than friendship. 4. I have been 
 aware of your plans for a long time. 5. The soldiers seize 
 their arms. 6. While Caesar was delaying in these places, 
 deputies came to him. 7. The enemy were crossing the 
 river. 8. They kept the enemy from their borders. 9. The 
 enemy tried to keep our men from supplies. 10. A high 
 mountain hung over the road. 11. Archias had already had 
 a residence at Rome for many years. 12. What can be 
 cured, I will cure. 13. What I have been waiting for, I 
 have now attained. 14. Deputies came to Caesar to com- 
 plain. 15. I have spoken, the case is stated. 16. The 
 Veneti had gathered all their ships into one place. 17. I 
 at any rate shall have discharged my duty. 18. I had taken 
 my stand on the wall, the legion was standing near by. 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. I will go with you to-morrow, if I can. 2. Very dense 
 woods concealed the view. 3. Catiline came into the senate. 
 Who saluted him ? 4. The soldier is dying. 5. Many were 
 being killed. 6. I have long been exhorting you. 7. The 
 river is crossed by a ford. 8. While these things were 
 going on, the enemy approached. 9. The conspirators were 
 astounded and kept glancing at one another. 10. The Usi- 
 petes were kept from agriculture. 11. The commander was 
 killed. 12. Your country hates and fears you. 13. The 
 Germans are becoming accustomed to cross the Rhine, they 
 
32 EXERCISES IN SYNTAX t 
 
 were accustomed to cross the Rhine. 14. I have lived, the 
 city is taken. 15. Towers were being constructed, these 
 towers were constructed by Caesar, towers were often con- 
 structed by the Romans. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX 
 
 Sequence of Tenses. Subjunctive in Indirect Questions 
 and Requests 
 
 Sequence of Tenses. 482, 12 ; 484, a, b ; H. & B. 476; 
 H. S43-S45i G. 509, i; 510; B. 267, 1-3. 
 
 I, 2. Subjunctive in Indirect Questions. 574; H. & B. 
 507, 3; H. 649, II; G. 467; B. 300. 
 
 3, 4. Subjunctive in Indirect Requests. 563 ; H. & B. 
 502, 3, a ; H. 565 ; G. 546 ; B. 295, i. 
 
 5, 6. Except iubeo and veto, which take the Complemen- 
 tary Infinitive. 563, a; H. & B. 587, b; H. 565, 3; G. 
 546, note 3 ; B. 295, 1, a. 
 
 Note i. In indirect requests ne is used for not, neve (neu) for and 
 not or nor, ne quis for that no one, that not any one. 
 
 Note 2. An indirect question is a subordinate clause introduced 
 by some interrogative word, as : Quid agas scio, / know what you are 
 doing. 
 
 Note 3. An indirect request is a subordinate clause representing 
 a, command or exhortation, as : Militibus Caesar mandavit ut proelium 
 committerent, Caesar directed the soldiers to commence battle. Caesar 
 really said : Proelium committite. Atiovistus postulavit ut uterque cum 
 equitatu veniret, Ariovistus demanded that each should come with cavalry. 
 Ariovistus really said : Uterque cijm equitatu veniat, let each come with 
 cavalry. 
 
 Note 4. The same verb may sometimes take the infinitive with 
 subject accusative if it implies a statement, or the subjunctive if it 
 implies a request ; or it may in the same sentence imply both, and so 
 
t EXERCISES IN SYNTAX 33 
 
 take the subjunctive in one clause and the infinitive in another, as : 
 Regem monuit ut consuleret sibi; eum enim in tuto loco non esse. He 
 really said to the king : Consule tibi ; tu enim in tuto loco non es, look out 
 for yourself ; for you are not in a safe place. 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I. I ask you how Roscius killed his father. 2. I asked 
 Catiline where he had been last night. 3. I exhort you 
 to persist in your opinion and not fear threats of violence. 
 4. He writes to Labienus to construct a great number of 
 vessels. 5. Caesar ordered his men to follow. 6. He had 
 forbidden the lieutenants to withdraw. 7. It is announced 
 that they will go at daybreak. 8. The leaders announce 
 that no one should withdraw from the place. 9. Ambiorix 
 announces that they shall hurl weapons from a distance and 
 not draw nearer. 10. Orgetorix persuaded the state to go 
 from their territories. 11. He persuades them that this is 
 easy. 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. He commands him to visit these states also. 2. He 
 was commanded not to commence any battle. 3. He ordered 
 hostages to be brought to him. 4. Caesar forbade his men 
 to advance farther. 5. Lentulus was asked what he had 
 said about the conspiracy. 6. Then he, maddened with 
 guilt, showed how great is the power of conscience. 7. I 
 ask whether they are slaves or freemen. 8. Antony inquired 
 where Atticus was, and with his own hand wrote to him not 
 to fear, [saying] that he had exempted him from the number 
 of the proscribed. 
 
34 EXERCISES IN SYNTAX t 
 
 CHAPTER XX 
 
 Subjunctive of Purpose and Result 
 
 I, 2. Subjunctive of Purpose with ut (negative ne, neve). 
 531 ; H. & B. 502, 2 ; H. 568 ; G. 54S, i, 3 ; B. 282, i. 
 
 3. Subjunctive of Purpose with the Relative. 531, 2; 
 H. & B. 502, 2 ; H. 590 ; G. 545, i ; B. 282, 2. 
 
 4. Subjunctive of Purpose with quo and the comparative. 
 531, 2, a; H. & B. 502, 2, b; H. 568, 7; G. 545, 2; B. 
 282, a. 
 
 5. 6. Subjunctive of Result with ut (negative ut non). 
 537; H. & B. 519, 3 ; H. 570 ; G. 552, I, 2 ; B. 284, i. 
 
 7, 8., Subjunctive with quominus or ne with Verbs of 
 Hindering. 558, b; H. & B. 502, 3, b; H. 568, 8; G. 
 548, 549; B. 294, 3. 
 
 9. ProhibeS almost always takes the simple infinitive. 
 558, b, note; H. & B. 587 (3); H. 614; G. 548, 2. 
 
 10, II. Subjunctive with quin after Expressions of Doubt, 
 also after Expressions of Hindrance when negatived. 558, a; 
 H. & B. 502, 3, b; H. 595, I, 2 ; G. 555, i, 2 ; B. 295, 3, a. 
 
 12, 13. Negative Combinations with Pronouns and Adverbs 
 in Purposie Clauses. 538, with examples; G. 543, 4. 
 
 14, 15. Subjunctive with Verbs of Fearing. 564; H. & B. 
 502, 4; H. 567, i; G. 550, 2 ; B. 296, 2. 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I. I have waited that you all might see the danger. 
 2. Caesar hurried by forced marches, that Ariovistus might 
 not seize the town. 3. He sent men to ascertain where the 
 enemy were. 4. He ordered them to open out the maniples, 
 that they might use their swords more freely. 5. They 
 made the attack so sharply that the enemy were quickly 
 
t EXERCISES IN SYNTAX 35 
 
 routed. 6. The town was so fortified that it could not be 
 taken. 7. The ships were kept by the wind from coming 
 into port. 8. They deterred the masses from bringing the 
 grain. 9. The enemy were preventing our men from enter- 
 ing within the fortifications. 10. There is no doubt that 
 the Helvetii were very brave. 11. The Germans could not 
 be restrained from hurling weapons. 12. They attempted 
 to surround the enemy, that no hope of flight might be left. 
 13. So great a storm suddenly arose that no ship could hold 
 its course. 14. They were afraid that they would be killed. 
 15. I fear that you will not hold out. 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. He hastened that he might reach the town and not 
 lose the time of fighting. 2. He sent cavalry to prevent 
 the enemy from crossing the river. 3. What hinders me 
 from defending my right? 4. They were afraid that they 
 would be surrounded. 5. Who doubts that the Romans 
 conquered the Helvetii ? 6. Caesar feared that the Germans 
 would not refrain from going into the province. 7. The 
 consul took care that the state should receive no harm. 
 8. The consul watched so sharply that the state received no 
 harm. 9. He made the attack quickly, that no one might 
 escape. 10. He made the attack so quickly that no one 
 escaped. 11. That the victory might be the easier, he took 
 all his forces with him. 
 
36 EXERCISES IN SYNTAX t 
 
 CHAPTER XXI 
 
 Subjunctive of Concession, Cause, and Characteristic 
 
 1—4. Subjunctive of Concession. 527, a-d; H. & B. 
 532, 2, a, c; H. 586, I, II; G. 605-609; B. 309, 1-5. 
 
 5. Subjunctive of Proviso with dummodo. 528; H. & B. 
 529; H. 587; G. 573; B. 310. 
 
 6, 7. Indicative or Subjunctive with quod. 540 ; H. & B. 
 555, a; H. 588, I, II ; G. 540, 541 ; B. 286, i. 
 
 8. Relative Clauses of Cause or Concession. 535, e; 
 H. & B. 523; H. 592; 593, 2; G. 633, 634; B. 283, 3. 
 
 9, 10. Relative Clauses of Characteristic. 535 ; H. & B. 
 Si7> 2 ; H. 591, i; G. 631, 2 ; B. 283, i, 2. 
 
 11. Relative Clauses with dignus, etc. 535, f ; H. & B. 
 513. 3 ; H. 591, 7 ; G. 631, I ; B. 282, 3. 
 
 12, 3. Subjunctive with cum, Causal or Concessive. 549 ; 
 H. & B. 526 ; H. 598 ; G. 586, 587 ; B. 286, 2. 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I. Old age, although it be not burdensome, yet takes 
 away freshness. 2. Although the Rhine was broad and 
 deep, Caesar built a bridge. 3. Although the Suevi could 
 not drive the enemy from their borders, yet they made them 
 tributary. 4. Lentulus, although he had lost the right of a 
 citizen, resigned office. 5. You will free me from great fear, 
 provided only there is a wall between you and me. 6. The 
 Belgae were very brave, because they had not been effemi- 
 nated by the vices of the province. 7. The Haedui com- 
 plained because the Germans were ravaging their territories. 
 8. The Nervii blamed the rest of the Belgae who had sur- 
 rendered to the Roman people. 9. There are men who do 
 not believe the conspiracy. 10. Diviciacus was the only 
 one who did not take an oath. 11. He is not a suitable 
 
t EXERCISES IN SYNTAX 37 
 
 man to be sent to this war. 12. Since Archias is a citizen, 
 he is not to be driven from the state. 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. These books are worthy to be read. 2. There were 
 two roads by which they could go from home. 3. The aged 
 Cato seemed a fit person to talk about old age. 4. Although 
 these things are so, I will make peace with you. S- I 'wiH 
 gladly undergo reproach, provided only the danger be removed 
 from you. 6. Who is there that does not wish to be esteemed ? 
 7. Catiline, although Cicero thwarted all his plans, was yet 
 a dangerous enemy. 8. The deputies excused themselves 
 because they had made war through ignorance of our custom. 
 9. Oh, fortunate are we, who have escaped such a scourge ! 
 
 CHAPTER XXII 
 Temporal Clauses 
 
 I, 2. Indicative with ubi, postquam, etc. 543; H. & B. 
 557; H. 602; G. 561; B. 287. 
 
 3, 4. Indicative or Subjunctive with antequam, priusquam. 
 551, a, b; H. & B. 507, 4; 550, b; H. 605; G. 574; B. 
 291, 292. See Part I, Caes. II : 12 : i. 
 
 5, 6. Indicative or Subjunctivje with dum, donee, etc. 553, 
 SS4; H. & B. 507, s; H. 603, II, i, 2 ; G. 571, 572; B. 
 293, III, I, 2. 
 
 7, 8. Cum temporal with the present or future Indicative. 
 547 ; H. & B. sso ; H. 600, I; G. 583 ; B. 289. 
 
 9-1 1. Cum temporal, introducing the occasion, the circum- 
 stances, or the nature of the time under which some past act 
 was done, takes the Subjunctive. [This is by far the most 
 common use of cum temporal. By the law of sequence the 
 
38 EXERCISES IN SYNTAX t 
 
 tense will always be secondary.] 546; H. & B. 524; H. 
 600, II; G. 585; B. 288. 
 
 12. The present a.ndper/ect Subjunctive in this use of cum 
 approach very nearly, and are usually treated as, muse or 
 concession. See chapter XXI. 
 
 13, 14. Cum meaning whenever, also cum meaning at the 
 time when or at which time, and referring to a definite fact, takes 
 the Indicative in any tense. 548; 545, a; H. & B. 550, a; 
 566, a; H. 601, 4; G. 581, 582, 584; B. 288, 2, 3; 290, I. 
 
 Note. The learner will have very little occasion to use cum in the 
 last sense. 
 
 Illustrative Examples 
 
 I. The Helvetii, as soon as they were ready to start, set 
 fire to their villages. 2. The Suevi, after they found that 
 a bridge was being built, gathered in one place. 3. The 
 Haedui held the leadership of Gaul before they sought the 
 friendship of the Romans. 4. Caesar, before running a risk, 
 sent Volusen us ahead with a warship. 5. While Caesar was 
 delaying in these places, deputies came to him. 6. Caesar 
 did not wait till time should be given the enemy for taking 
 arms. 7. While they are silent, they approve. 8. When you 
 reach the city, I shall be far away. g. When Caesar himself 
 came, the enemy surrendered. 10. Piso, while he was bring- 
 ing aid to his brother, was killed. 11. Having said this, he 
 withdrew. 12. Can this light be pleasing to you, when you 
 know that your conspiracy is found out? 13. Whenever 
 the Gauls had defeated the enemy, they sacrificed animals 
 to Mars. 14. When Caesar came into Gaul, there were two 
 factions. 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 
 
 I. The wounded soldier resisted very bravely as long as 
 he could. 2. Hold out till I come. 3. As soon as Caesar 
 learned this, he returned into Gaul. 4. The enemy reached 
 
t EXERCISES IN SYNTAX 39 
 
 the Rhine before they ceased to flee. 5. The Germans 
 crossed the river before they were (to avoid being) seen. 
 6. When the Gauls asked Lentulus what he said, he sud- 
 denly confessed. 7. When so great a multitude were hurl- 
 ing weapons, no one could resist the attack. 8. Caesar 
 waited for the fleet to (until it should) come. 9. After he 
 heard this, he started. 10. When you come, I shall be 
 ready. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII 
 Indirect Discourse 
 
 Indirect Discourse. 580, b, d ; 581; 584; 588; H. & B. 
 533 ; S34, 1, 2 ; 59^ ; H. 641, 642, 643, 645 ; G. 650, 651, 
 652; B. 313, 314, 316. 
 
 Conditions in Indirect Discourse. 589, i, 2, a, b, 1-3; 
 H. & B. 534, b ; 581, b, I ; H. 646, i ; 647, 2 ; G. 656 ; B. 
 319-321. 
 
 Note. Write 1-6 as they stand. Then rewrite 1-3 with Caesar 
 dixit before them, 4 with Caesar negavit, 5 with Caesar postulavit, and- 
 6 with Antonius ei scripsit. 8-12 should be omitted except by advanced 
 ^ pupils. 
 
 I. Caesar wished to stop the Helvetii because they were 
 ravaging the fields of the Haedui. 2. I must build a bridge 
 over the Rhine to strike fear into the Germans. 3. If you 
 make war upon me, I shall inflict great disaster upon you. 
 4. I shall not wait till the Helvetii lay waste the fields of the 
 Haedui. 5. Do not bring war upon the Haedui and their 
 allies ; return the hostages you have, and if you cannot 
 send back home any part of the Germans, at least allow no 
 more to cross the Rhine. 6. Do not fear, and come to me 
 at once ; I have exempted you, and, for your sake, Canus, 
 from the number of the proscribed. 7. Cicero said that 
 
4° EXERCISES IN SYNTAX t 
 
 they were greatly mistaken, if they thought his leniency 
 would be perpetual. 8. Ariovistus said that he would not 
 have crossed the Rhine if he had not been sent for by the 
 Gauls. 9. Titurius thought that, unless Caesar had started 
 for Italy, the Carnutes would not have formed the plan of 
 killing Tasgetius, and the Eburones, if he were present, would 
 not come to the camp with so much contempt. 10. Cicero 
 saw that, if he should punish Catiline with death, he would 
 not be able to pursue his allies. 11. The soothsayers said 
 that, if a greater image of Jove should look upon the forum 
 and senate-house, all plots would be revealed. 12. Cicero 
 thought that, if the immortal gods did not control all things, 
 the conspiracy would not have been suppressed. 
 
VOCABULARY 
 
 about, concerning, de. 
 abuse, abator, !, usus sum. 
 apcess, aditus, us, m. 
 accomplish, proficio, ere, eci, ectus. 
 accuse, acciiso, are, avi, atus. 
 acquainted with, peritus, a, m. 
 acquit, absolve, ere, solvi, solfltus. 
 act, no act, nihil. 
 admire, admiror, ari, atus sum. 
 adopt (a plan), ineo, ire, ii, itus. 
 advance, progredior, 5, essus sum. 
 advantage, usus, vis, m. 
 advice, give advice, moneo, ere, ui, 
 
 itus. 
 advise, suadeo, ere, si, sus. 
 affair, res, el,/. 
 
 after, /rif?>., post ; f ««/'., postquam. 
 after, to get, causa, 
 against, (feeling) against, in. 
 age, aetas, atis,y. 
 aged, senex, is, m. or f. 
 ago, abhinc or ante. See long. 
 agriculture, agricultura, ae, f. 
 alarm, permoveo, ere, 5vi, otua. 
 allow, patior, i, passus sum. 
 allowed, it is allow,ed, licet, ere, 
 
 licuit. 
 ally, socius, i, m. 
 almost, fere. 
 
 alone, iiuus or solus, a, m. 
 already, iam. 
 
 41 
 
 also, quoque. 
 always, semper, 
 ambush, insidiae, plur. f. 
 among, into, in. 
 ancient, antiquus, a, m. 
 animal, animal, alis, n. 
 announce, proniintio, are, etc. 
 Antony, Antonius, i, m. 
 anxious, soUicitus, a, m. 
 anything, quid. 
 
 approach, adpropinquo, are, etc. 
 approve, comprobo or prob5, are, 
 
 avi, atus. 
 April, of April, Aprilis, e. 
 arise, coorior, in, ortus est. 
 arm, armo, are, avi, atus. 
 arrow, sagitta, ae, f. 
 as, in the place of, pro. 
 ascertain, cognosce, ere, ovi, itus. 
 ashamed, use pudet. 
 ask, rogo, are, avi, atus. 
 ask, question, quaero, ere, sivi, 
 
 situs, 
 assassinate, confodio, ere, odi, ossus. 
 assassination, caedes, is, f. 
 assign, atttibuo, ere, ui, iitus. 
 assist, iuvo, are, iuvi, iiitus. 
 associate, socius, i, m. 
 astounded, become astounded, 
 
 obstupesco, ere, ui. 
 Athens, Athenae, plur. f. 
 athlete, athleta, ae, m. 
 t 
 
42 
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 at last, tandem. 
 
 at least, at. 
 
 attachment, studium, i, «. 
 
 attack, impetus, us, m. 
 
 attack (of a town), oppugnatio, 
 
 5nis,yi 
 attain, adsequor, i, ciitus sum. 
 attempt, conor, aii, atus sum. 
 attempt, conatus, us, m. 
 attends, adiunctus est. 
 aware, be aware of, sentio, ire, si, 
 
 sus. 
 away, ab ; be away, absum. 
 
 baffle, eludo, ere, si, sus. 
 
 baggage, impedimenta, orum, n. 
 
 band, company, manus, lis,/. 
 
 bank, ripa, ae,/. 
 
 bare, apertus, a, m. 
 
 bark, cortex, corticis, m. and/) 
 
 battle, proelium, i, n. 
 
 bear, endure, fero, ferre, tuli, latus. 
 
 beautiful, pulcher, ra, rum. 
 
 before, ante. 
 
 began, coepi, coepisse. 
 
 beginning, initium, i, n. 
 
 believe, credo, ere, didi, itus. 
 
 belongs, est with gen. or pass. 
 
 adj. 
 besiege, oppiigno, are, avi, atus. 
 betray, indico, are, avi, atus. 
 between, inter, 
 blame, culpo, are, etc., and incus5, 
 
 are, etc. 
 boast, make a boast, glorior, ari, 
 
 atus sum. 
 body, corpus, oris, n. 
 booty, praeda, ae,/. 
 border, finis, is, m. 
 born, be born, nascot, i, natus sum. 
 
 both, adj.fWsAm, ae, o. 
 
 both . . . and, et . . . et. 
 
 brave, fortis, e. 
 
 bravery, virtus, litis,/. 
 
 bridge, pons, tis, m. 
 
 bring, adfero, erre, tuli, latus. 
 
 bring (grain), confero, etc. 
 
 bring, lead to, addiico, ere, xi, tus. 
 
 bring up, subveho, ere, exi, ectus. 
 
 broad, latus, a, m. 
 
 brother, frater, tris, m . 
 
 build (a bridge), facio. 
 
 building, aedificium, i, n. 
 
 burdensome, gravis, c. 
 
 business, negotium, i, n. 
 
 buy, emo, ere, emi, emptus. 
 
 Calends, Kalendae,^/?*?-./. 
 
 call, adpello, are, etc. ; dico, ere, 
 etc. ; nomino, are, etc. 
 
 calm, malacia, ae,/ 
 
 Cannae, at Cannae, Cannensis, e. 
 
 capital offense, caput, itis, n. 
 
 capture, capio, ere, cepi, captus. 
 
 care, ciira, £(e, f. See take. 
 
 carry out, complete, conficio, ere, 
 eci, ectus. 
 
 Carthage, Cartliago, inis, f. 
 
 case, cause, causa, ae, /. 
 
 case, in your case, tibi. 
 
 Cassius, with Cassius, Cassianus, 
 a, m. 
 
 catch (in wrong-doing), compre- 
 hendo, ere, di, sus. 
 
 catch sight of, conspicio, ere, exi, 
 ectus. 
 
 Catiline, Catilina, ae, m. 
 
 cavalry, eques, itis, m. ; (collect- 
 ively), equitatus, us, m. 
 
 cavalry, adj., equester, tris, tre. 
 
t 
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 43 
 
 cease, desisto, ere, stiti, stitflrus. 
 
 Celts, Celtae. 
 
 chance, opportunity, potestas, 
 atis, f. 
 
 chariot, esseda, ae, f. 
 
 charioteer, essedarius, i, m. 
 
 chief, chief one, princeps, ipis. 
 
 choose, deligo, ere, egi, ectus. 
 
 citizen, civis, is, m. 
 
 citizens, when addressed by a. 
 Roman, Qnirites. 
 
 city, urbs, is, f. 
 
 clear, clarus, a, m. 
 
 collapse, concido, ere, cidi, asurus. 
 
 command, impero, are, avi, atus. 
 
 commander, imperator, oris, m. 
 
 commence (battle), committo, ere, 
 misi, missus. 
 
 commit, committo. 
 
 complain, queror, i, estus sum. 
 
 complete, perficio, ere, eci, ectus. 
 
 complimentary, very complimen- 
 tary, optimus. 
 
 conceal, celo, are, avi, atus. 
 
 condemn, condemno, are, etc. 
 
 conduct, gero, gerere, gessi, gestus. 
 
 confess, confiteor, eri, essus sum. 
 
 confiscate, publico, are, etc. 
 
 conflagration, incendium, i, n. 
 
 conquer, vinco or devinco, ere, vici, 
 victus. 
 
 conscience, conscientia, ae, f. 
 
 consider, habeo, ere, ul, itus. . 
 
 conspiracy, coniuratio, onis, f. 
 
 conspirator, coniuratus, i, m. 
 
 conspire, coniuro, are, avi, atus. 
 
 construct, constitud, ere, ui, litus. 
 
 construct (a ship), instruo, ere, xi, 
 ctus. 
 
 consult, consuls, ere, ui, tus. 
 
 contempt, contemptio, onis,/". 
 
 contend, contendo, ere, di, tus, or 
 
 dimico, are, etc. 
 control, gubematio, ams,f. 
 control, administro, are, avi, atus. 
 convey, confero, erre, tulJ, latus. 
 Corinth, Corinthus, i, f. 
 council, consilium, i, n. 
 country, native land, patria, ae,y! 
 country (opposed to city), rus, 
 
 ruris, n. 
 course, cursus, us, m. 
 crime, scelus, eris, n. 
 cross, transeo, ire, ii, itus. 
 crush, opprimo, ere, essi, essus. 
 cure, sano, are, avi, atus. 
 custody, custodia, ae, f. 
 custom, mos, maris, m. ; a special 
 
 custom, consuetude, inis,/ 
 
 dagger, sica, ae. 
 
 damaged, adilictus, a, m. 
 
 danger, periculum, i, n. 
 
 dangerous, penculosus, a, m. 
 
 dare, audeo, ere, ausus sum. 
 
 daybreak, pnma lux. 
 
 dear, carus, a, m. 
 
 death, mors, tis,y; 
 
 deceit, dolus, i, m. 
 
 deceive, fallo, ere, fefelli, falsus. 
 
 decision, iudicium, i, n. 
 
 decree, decerno, ere, crevJ, cretus. 
 
 deed, factum, i, n. 
 
 deep, altus, a, m. 
 
 defeat, supero, are, avi, atus. 
 
 defend, defendo, ere, di, sus. 
 
 defense, defensio, onis, f. 
 
 delay, mora, ae, f. 
 
 delay, moror, ari, atus sum. 
 
 delay, tr., demoror, ari, atus sum. 
 
 demand of, impero, are, avi, atus. 
 
44 
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 t 
 
 dense, densus, a, m. 
 
 deny, nego, are, avi, atus. 
 
 deprive, privo, are, avi, atus. 
 
 deputy, legatus, i, m- 
 
 deservedly, merito. 
 
 deserving, merltus, a, m. 
 
 desire, cupiditas, atis, / ; studium, 
 i, n. ; cupio, ere, ivi, itus. 
 
 despair, despero, are, avi, atus. 
 
 despise, despicio, ere, exi, ectus. 
 
 deter, deterred, ere, ui, itus. 
 
 dictator, dictator, oris, m. 
 
 die, morior, mori, mortuus sum. 
 
 differ, differo, erre, distuli, dilatus. 
 
 difficult, difficilis, e. 
 
 difficulty, difficultas, atis,/ 
 
 dignity, dignitas, atis,/ 
 
 diligence, diligentia, ae, / 
 
 disadvantage, be at z., disadvan- 
 tage, be surpassed, use passive 
 of supero. 
 
 disappoint, fallo, ere, fefelli, falsus. 
 
 disaster, calamitas, atis, / 
 
 discharge (a duty), praesto, are, 
 stiti, status. 
 
 discretion, consilium, J, n. 
 
 disgrace, flagitium, i, n. 
 
 dishonorable, turpis, c. 
 
 dislodge, moveo, ere, movi, motns. 
 
 dispatch, litterae, plur. f. 
 
 disregard, neglego, ere, exi, ectus. 
 
 distance, from a distance, procul. 
 
 distinguished, amplus, a, m. 
 
 ditch, fossa, ae,/ 
 
 do, ago, ere, egi, actus, or facio. 
 
 done, be done, fio, fieri, factum est. 
 
 doom, voco, are, avi, atus. 
 
 doubt, dubitatio, onis,/ 
 
 doubt, dubito, are, avi, atus. 
 
 doubt, there is no doubt, n5n dubium 
 est. 
 
 draw into, indiico, ere, xi, tus. 
 
 draw nearer, propius accedo, ere, 
 essi, surus. 
 
 draw up, instruo, ere, xi, tus. 
 
 drive away, propello, ere, puli, pul- 
 sus. 
 
 drive from, eicio, ere, eci, ectus, or 
 depello. 
 
 drive (into exile), eicio. 
 
 duty, obligation, officium, i, n. 
 
 duty of a consul, of&cium consu- 
 lare. 
 
 duty, task, munus, eris, «. 
 
 E 
 each one, quisque, quaeque, quid- 
 
 que. 
 eager, adpetens, tis. 
 eagle, aquila, ae,/ 
 easy, facilis, e ; very easy, per- 
 
 facilis. 
 effeminate, effemino, are, avi, atus. 
 elect, creo, are, avi, atus. 
 elect, consul-elect, consul designa- 
 
 tus. 
 embezzlement, peculatus, us, m. 
 empire, imperium, i, n. 
 end of, extremus, a, m. 
 endure, perfero or fero or patior, i, 
 
 passus sum. 
 enemy (personal), inimicus, i, m. 
 engaged with, congredior, i, essus 
 
 sum. 
 engine, tormentum, i, «. 
 ensue, exsisto, ere, stiti. 
 enter, ingredior, i, essus sum. 
 entrance, aditus, us, m. 
 escape, effuglo, ere, fiigi, itiirus. 
 especially, maxime. 
 estate, fundus, i, m. 
 esteem, diligo, ere, lexi, lectus. 
 
t 
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 4S 
 
 Europe, Europa, ae,/! 
 
 even (prepositive), etiam ; even 
 
 (postpositive), quidem ; even . . . 
 
 not, or not . . even, ne . . . 
 
 quidem. 
 examine, cognosco, ere, ovi, itus. 
 excel, praesto, are, stiti, atus [itus]. 
 excuse, excuso, are, avi, atus. 
 exempt, eximo, ere, emi, emptus. 
 exhort, cohortor, arl, atus sum. 
 exile, exsilium, i, n. 
 expect, exspecto, are, avi, atus. 
 expel, expello, ere, puli, pulsus, 
 expose to, in . . . obicio, ere, eci, 
 
 ectus. 
 extraordinary, egregius, a, m. 
 extravagance, luxuria, 3£,f. 
 eye, oculus, t, m. 
 
 faction, f actio, onis,/. 
 
 fail, deficio, ere, eci, ectus. 
 
 faithful, fidelis, e ; diligens. 
 
 family, f amilia, ae, f. 
 
 far, longe. 
 
 father, pater, tris, m. 
 
 father-in-law, socer, eri, m. 
 
 favor, faveo, ere, favi, fauturus. 
 
 favor, gratia, ae,/ 
 
 fear, timor, oris, m. ; metns, us, m. 
 
 fear, verb, vereor, eri, itus sum, or 
 
 timeo, ere, ui, or pertimesco, ere, 
 
 pertimui. 
 February, of February, Febru- 
 
 arius, £t, m. 
 few, pauci, ae, a. 
 field, ager, agri, m. 
 fight, pugno, are, etc. 
 find, find out, comperio, ire, eri, 
 
 ertus. 
 fire, ignis, is, m. 
 
 first, primus, a, m. 
 
 fish, piscis, is, m. 
 
 fit person, aptus, i, m. 
 
 flee, fugio, ere, fugi, fugitiirus. 
 
 fleet, classis, is,/ 
 
 flight, fuga, ae,/ 
 
 follow, subsequor, i, cutus sum. 
 
 follow (a plan), ijtor, i, iisus sum. 
 
 follow up, consector, ari, atus 
 sum. 
 
 follower, socius, i, m.; your fol- 
 lowers, tui. 
 
 folly, dementia, ae,/ 
 
 fond, studiosus, a, m. 
 
 foot, pes, pedis, m. 
 
 forbid, veto, are, ui, itus. 
 
 forced march, magnum iter. 
 
 forces, copiae, //«r,/ 
 
 ford, vadum, i, n. 
 
 forget, obli^scor, i, litus sum. 
 
 form (a line of battle), instruo, ere, 
 xi, ctus. 
 
 form (a plan), ineo, ire, ii, itus. 
 
 former, pristinus, a, m. 
 
 fortification, miinitio, onis,/ 
 
 fortify, miinio, ire, ivi, itus. 
 
 fortune. See good fortune. 
 
 forum, forum, i, n. 
 
 found, condo, ere, didi, ditus ; fundo, 
 are, etc. 
 
 fountain, fons, tis, m. 
 
 free, libero, are, avi, atus. 
 
 freely, easily, facile. 
 
 freeman, liber, i, m. 
 
 frequent, creber, ra, rum. 
 
 fresh (water), dulcis, e. 
 
 freshness, viriditas, atis,/ 
 
 friend, amicus, i, m. 
 
 friendship, amicitia, ae,/ 
 
 full, plenus, a, m. 
 
 fury, impetus, us, m. 
 
46 
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 t 
 
 6 
 
 gain a request, impetro, are, etc. 
 gather, bring together, cogo, ere, 
 
 egi, actus, 
 gather, come together, convenio, 
 
 ire, vehl, tus. 
 get possession of, potior, iri, itus 
 
 sum. 
 give, do, dare, dedi, datus. 
 Glabrio, Glabrio, onis, m. 
 gladly, libenter. 
 glance at one another, inter se 
 
 adspiciunt. 
 god, deus, i, m. 
 go from, exeo, ire, ii, iturus. 
 going on, geritur, geri, gestum est. 
 gold, aurum, i, n. 
 good fortune, fortuna, ae, f. 
 good-will, benevolentia, ae, / 
 go out of, egredior, i, essus sum. 
 grain, frumentum, i, n. 
 grandfather, avus, i, m. 
 grandson, nepos, otis, m. 
 grant, give up to, concedo, ere, essi, 
 
 cessus. 
 grateful, gratus, a, m. 
 great (in excellence), summus ; (in 
 
 size), magnus. 
 greatly, vehementer. 
 great man, summus vir. 
 greedy, avidus, a, m. 
 grief, dolor or maeror, oris, m . 
 grieve at, doleo, ere, u5, iturus. 
 grievously, graviter. 
 ground, cause, causa, ae, /. 
 guilt, scelus, eris, n. 
 
 habit, consuitudo, inis, /. 
 hand, manus, us, /. 
 hang over, impendeo, ere. 
 
 happen, accido, ere, cidi. 
 harm, detrimentum, i, n. 
 harm, noceo, ere, ui, iturus. 
 hasten, contends, ere, di, tus, or 
 
 maturo, are, etc. 
 hate, odi, odisse. 
 hatred, odium, i, ;z. 
 have, have (something done), euro, 
 
 are, avi, atus. 
 hear, audio, ire, ivi, itus. 
 heartily, vehementer. 
 height of, summus, <i, m. 
 help, auzilium, i, n. 
 here, Mc. 
 
 hesitate, dubito, are, avi, aturus. 
 hide, delitesco, ere, litui. 
 high, altus, a, m. 
 
 hill, tumulus, i, m. ; or coUis, is, m. 
 hinder, impedio. Ire, ivi, itus. 
 hold, teneo, ere, ui, tentus. 
 hold (a council), habeo, ire, ui, itus. 
 hold out, sustineo, ere, ui, tentus. 
 hope, spes, ei, /. ; spero, are, etc. 
 hostage, obses, idis, m. and/, 
 hover, versor, ari, atus sum. 
 how (in what manner), quomodo. 
 how (to what degree), quam. 
 how long, quo usque ; quamdiii. 
 how much, quantus. 
 human, humanus, a, m. 
 hunger, fames, is, /■ 
 hunt, venor, ari, atus sum. 
 hurl, conicio, ere, eci, ectus. 
 hurry, contends, ere, di, tus. 
 
 Ides, idus, uum, J>lur. f. 
 ignorance, through ignorance of, 
 
 imperitus, a, m. 
 image, imago, inis, f. 
 immortal, immortalis, e. 
 
VOCABULARY 
 
 47 
 
 impede, impedio, ire, m, itus. 
 
 importance, it is of importance, 
 refert. 
 
 imprudence, imprudentia, &t,f. 
 
 imputation, fama, ae,y". 
 
 incur, suscipio, ere, cepi, ceptas. 
 
 indebted, be indebted, debeo, ere, 
 ui, itus. 
 
 indeed, quidem or vero. 
 
 infantry, pedes, itis, m. ; (collect- 
 ively), peditatus, iis, m. 
 
 inflict upon, infero, ferre, tuli, latus. 
 
 influence, have influence, valeo, 
 ere, ui, itunis. 
 
 influence, power, auctoritas, atis, f. 
 
 inquire, requJro, ere, sivi, situs. 
 
 institution, institutum, i, n. 
 
 insult, contumelia, ae, f. 
 
 insurrection, tumultus, us, tn. 
 
 interest, it interests me, or is my 
 interest, interest. 
 
 interior, interior. 
 
 island, insula, ae, /. 
 
 Italy, Italia, ae, /. 
 
 J 
 
 January, of January, lanuarius, 
 
 a, m. 
 Jove, luppiter, lovis, m. 
 joy, laetitia, ae, f. 
 July, of J uly, lulius, a, m. 
 jump, salio, ire, ui, saltutus. 
 
 Kalends. See Calends. 
 
 keep, prohibeo, ere, ui, itus ; teneo, 
 
 ere, ui, tentus. 
 kill, occido, ere, cidi, cisus ; inter- 
 
 ficio, ere, etc. 
 kindness, beneficium, i, «. 
 knight, eques, itis, m. 
 
 labor, labor, oris, m. 
 
 Laeca, Laeca, ae, m. 
 
 lame, claudus, a, m. 
 
 language, lingua, as,f. 
 
 large, ingens, tis. 
 
 last, proximus, a, m. 
 
 last, at last, tandem. 
 
 lasting, perpetuus, a, m. 
 
 law, lex, legis, f. 
 
 lay waste, vasto, are, a^, atus. 
 
 lead across, traduco, ere, duxi, 
 
 ductus, 
 lead against, duco adversus. 
 lead away, deduco. 
 lead from, educo. 
 lead in, induco. 
 leadership, principatus, us, m. 
 learn, cognosco, ere, ovi, itus. 
 least, at least, at. 
 leave, relinquo, ere, liqui, ictus, 
 leave a ship, ex navi egredior, i, 
 
 essus sum. 
 left, reliquus, a, m. 
 leniency, lenitas, atis, /. 
 letter, litterae, plur. f. 
 lieutenant, legatus, i, m. 
 life, vita, ae, f. 
 light, lux, cis, f. 
 light-armed, of light armor, levis ' 
 
 armaturae. 
 like, sitnilis, e. 
 line of battle, acles, ei, /. 
 listen, audio, ire, ivi, itus. 
 little, paulum. 
 live, vivo, ere, vixi, victus. 
 location, locus, i, m. ; (in plur.), 
 
 loca, n. 
 long, longus, a, m. 
 long ago, iam pridem, iam dudum. 
 long time, difl. 
 
48 
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 t 
 
 look out for, prospicio, ere, spexi, 
 
 ectus. 
 look upon, conspicio, etc. 
 lose, amitto, ere, misi, missus, 
 lose (time), dimitto, etc. 
 low, humilis, e. 
 
 M 
 maddened, demens, tis. 
 madness, amentia or dementia, ae,yi 
 make (war) upon, infero, ferre, tuli, 
 
 latas. 
 manage, administro, are, etc. 
 maniple, manipulus, i, m. 
 Manlius, of Manlius, Manlianus, 
 
 ct, m. 
 March, of March, Martius, a, m. 
 march, iter, itineris, n. 
 march, make a march, iter facio. 
 Mars, Mars, tis, tn. 
 masses, multitud5, inis, f. 
 material, materia, ae, f. 
 matter, res, ei, /. 
 mean, dat. of reflex, pron. with 
 
 volo, velle, volui. 
 means, method, ratio, onis, f. 
 means, substance, res, ei, /. 
 meanwhile, interim, 
 mediator, deprecator, oris, m. 
 meet, assemble, convenio, ire, veni, 
 
 rentus. 
 meet (death), oppeto, ere, ivi,. itus. 
 mention, commemoro, are, etc. 
 merely, modo. 
 message, nuntius, i, m. 
 middle, medius, a, m. 
 mile, mille passuum. 
 military, mllitaris, c. 
 Milo, Milo, onis, m. 
 minae, minae, arum, plur. f. 
 misfortune, casus, lis, m. 
 
 mistaken, be mistaken, erro, are, 
 
 avi, atus. 
 monster, monstrum, i, n. 
 month, mensis, is, m. 
 more (in comparison), magis. 
 mountain, mons, tis, m. 
 much, multum ; very much, plu- 
 
 rimum. 
 
 N 
 name, n5men, inis, n. 
 naval, navalis, e. 
 near, ad ; adv., prope. 
 near by, iiixta. 
 nearest, prozimus. 
 nearly, fere. 
 
 need, opus, indecl. n. ; iisus, us, m. 
 need, verb, egeo or indigeo, ere, ui. 
 neighbor, finitimus, i, m. 
 never, numquam. 
 night, nox, tis,/. 
 no, in no way, nihil, 
 no act, nihil, 
 no (adj.), nijllus, a, m. 
 noble, nobilis, e. 
 noise, strepitus, Zs, m. 
 Nones, Nonae, plur. f. 
 no one {subst.), nemo. 
 November, of November, Novem- 
 
 bris, e. 
 number, numerus, i, m. 
 
 
 
 oak, robnr, oris, n. 
 
 oath, take an oath, iiiro, are, etc. 
 
 obtain a request, impetro, are, etc. 
 
 October, of October, Octobris, e. 
 
 oiBce, magistratus, us, m. 
 
 often, saepe. 
 
 old, vetus, eris. 
 
 old age, senectus, tutis,/ 
 
 old man, senex, is. 
 
t 
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 49 
 
 once, at once, statim. 
 one (of two), alter, a, um. 
 open out, laxo, are, avi, atus. 
 opinion, sententia, ae, f. 
 opinion, have an opinion, sentio, 
 
 ire, sens!, sus. 
 opportunity, facultas, atis, /. 
 order, iubeo, ere, iussi, sus, with 
 
 infin., or impero, are, with subj. 
 other, alius, a, ud. 
 outside of, extra with ace. 
 overtake. See reach. 
 
 pace, passus, iis, m. 
 
 party, pars, tis, / 
 
 patience, patientia, ae, f. 
 
 pay, persolvo, ere, vi, solutus. 
 
 peace, pax, cis, /. 
 
 penalty, poena, ae, f. 
 
 people (the masses), multitudd, 
 
 inis, yi 
 perform (a duty), fungor, i, functus 
 
 sum. 
 perilous, periculosus, a, m. 
 perish, intereo, ire, ii, iturus. 
 perpetual, perpetuus, a, m. 
 persist in, maneo or permaneo, ere, 
 
 mansi, mansurus. 
 persuade, persuaded, ere, si, sus. 
 philosopher, philosophus, i, m. 
 Phocion, Phocion, onis, ni. 
 pillage, vexatio, onis,/. 
 pitch (camp), pono, ere, sui, situs, 
 pity, misericordia. ae,/! 
 pity, verb, miseret, ere, uit, or miae- 
 
 reor, eri. 
 place around, circumdo, are, dedi, 
 
 datus. 
 place before, antepono, ere, sm, 
 
 situs. 
 
 plan, consilium, i, n. 
 
 pleases, it pleases, placet, ere, uit. 
 
 pleasing, iucundus, a, m. 
 
 pleasure, voluptas, atis,/ 
 
 plot, consilium, i, n. 
 
 plot against, insidior, an, atus sum. 
 
 plunder, praeda, ae,/ 
 
 plundering, direptio, onis,/ 
 
 Pompey, Pompeius, i, m. 
 
 port, portus, iis, m. 
 
 possessions, their possessions, sua, 
 plur. n. 
 
 power (military or imperial), impe- 
 rium, i, n. 
 
 power of conscience, vis conscien- 
 tiae. 
 
 power (royal), legnum, i, n. 
 
 powerful, is powerful, potest. 
 
 praise, laus, dis,/ 
 
 pray (used parenthetically), tan- 
 dem. 
 
 prefer, antepon5, ere, sui, situs. 
 
 preparation, comparatio, onis,/ 
 
 present, be present, adsum. 
 
 present, dono, are, avi, atus. 
 
 prevent, prohibeo, ere, ui, itus. 
 
 previous, superior. 
 
 private, privatus, a, m. 
 
 proceed, continue, pergo, ere, rexl, 
 rectus. 
 
 promise, poUiceor, eri, itus sum. 
 
 property, goods, bona, plur. n. 
 
 proscribed, proscriptus, i, m. 
 
 protect, tueor, eri, tutus sum. 
 
 provide, provideo, ere, vidi, visus. 
 
 province, provincia, ae,/ 
 
 punish, piinio, ire, ivi, itus. 
 
 punish (with death), macto, are, 
 avi, atus. 
 
 punishment, supplicium, i, n. 
 
 purpose, sententia, ae,/ 
 
so 
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 pursue, persequor, I, cutus sum. 
 push on, contends, ere, di, tus. 
 put to death, interficio, ere, eci, 
 ectus. 
 
 Q 
 
 quaestor, quaestor, oris, m. 
 quell, sedo, are, avi, atus. 
 quickly, celeriter. 
 quiet, tranqutUitas, Has,/. 
 quite a number, complures, plur. 
 m. 
 
 R 
 
 rashness, temeritas, atis,/. 
 
 rate, at any rate, certe. 
 
 rate, estimate, existimo, are, avi, 
 
 atus. 
 rather, potius. 
 
 ravage, vasto, are, avi, atus. 
 reach, come to, ad . . . pervenio, ire, 
 
 veni, venturus. 
 read, lego, ere, legi, lectus. 
 ready, paratus, a, m. 
 rear (gate), decumana. 
 receive) recipio, ere, epi, eptus. 
 receive (harm), capio, ere, cepi, 
 
 captus. 
 recollection, recordatio, onis,_/ 
 reference, with reference to, de. 
 refrain, tempero, are, etc., with 
 
 dat. ai reflex, fron. 
 regard, duco, ere, duxi, ductus, 
 regard, in regard to, de. 
 region, regio, onis, f. 
 reject, repudio, are, avi, atus. 
 rejoice, laetor, ari, atus sum. 
 relief, subsidium, i, n. 
 remain, remaneo, ere, si, siirus. 
 remember, memini, perfect; or 
 
 reminiscor. 
 remove, depello, ere, uli, sus. 
 renew, redintegro, are, avi, atus. 
 
 repair, reficio, ere, eci, ectus. 
 repent, paehitet, ere, uit. 
 reproach , contumolia or invidia, ae,/! 
 reputation, opinio, onis,/. 
 request. See obtain. 
 residence, domicilium, i, «. 
 resign, abdico, are, etc., with reflex. 
 
 pron. 
 resist, resisto, ere, stiti. 
 response, responsum, i, «. 
 rest, adj., reliquus, a, m. 
 rest, quiet, quies, etis,/. 
 restrain, retineo, ere, ui, tentus. 
 retain, retineo, ere, ui, tentus. 
 retard, tardo, are, avi, atus. 
 return, give back, reddo, ere, did!, 
 
 ditus. 
 return, go back, redeo, ire, ii, itu- 
 
 rus; reverter, i, reversus sum; 
 
 or recipio, with reflex, pron. 
 return, in return for, pro. 
 reveal, inlustro, are, avi, atus. 
 reward, praemiis adficio, ere, eci, 
 
 ectus. 
 right, ius, iuris, «. 
 right of way, iter, itineris, n. 
 river, flumen, inis, n. 
 road, via, ae, / ; as a route, iter, 
 
 itineris, n. 
 rock, saxum, i, n. 
 rod, virga, ae,yi 
 roilt, pello, ere, pepnli, pulsus, 
 royal power, regnum, i, n. 
 run, curro, ere, cucurri, cursurus. 
 run (a risk), faci5, ere, eci, f actus. 
 
 sacrifice, immolo, are, avi, atus. 
 safety, saliis, utis,/. 
 sail, navigo, are, avi, atus. 
 sake, for the sake of, causa. 
 
t 
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 51 
 
 salute, saluto, are, avi, atus. 
 satisfy, satisfacio, ere, eci, facturus. 
 save, servo or conserve, are, etc. 
 scarcely, vix. 
 scourge, pestis, is,_/". 
 secure, adsequor, i, cStus sum. 
 seek, peto, ere, ivl or ii, itus. 
 seize, capio, ere, cepi, captus. 
 seize (a town), oppugno or occupo, 
 
 are, etc. 
 select, deligo, ere, egi, ectus. 
 self-control, temperantia, ae,yi 
 sell, vendo, ere, didi, ditus. 
 senate-house, ciiria, ae,/i 
 send, mitto, ere, misi, missus, 
 send ahead, praemitto, etc. 
 send for, arcesso, ere, sivi, situs, 
 separate, secemo, ere, crevi, cretus. 
 September, of September, Sep- 
 " tembrls, c. 
 seriously, graviter. 
 serve (as a slave), servio, ire, ivi 
 
 or ii, iturus. 
 serve, treat well, earn pay from, 
 
 de . . . mereor, eri, itus sum. 
 services, opera, ae, sing.f. 
 servile, servilis, e. 
 servitude, servitudo, inis,/. 
 set, appoint, dico, ere, dixi, dictus. 
 set fire to, incendo, ere, di, sus. 
 severe, gravis, c. 
 sharply, acriter. 
 shield, scutum, i, n. 
 ship, navis, is,/ 
 shore, litus, oris, n. 
 shout, clamor, oris, m. 
 show, ostendo, ere, di, tus. 
 sight, adspectus, iis, m. 
 signal, signum, i, n. 
 silent, be silent, taceo, ere, ni, itus. 
 silver, argenteus, a, m. 
 
 sink (a sliip), deprimo, ere, essi, 
 
 essus. 
 sister, soror, oris,/ 
 skillful, peritus, a, m. 
 slaughter, trucido, are, avi, atus. 
 slave, servus, i, m. 
 slavery, servituS, litis,/, 
 slender, eziguus, a, m. 
 sling, funda, ae,/ 
 so, accordingly, thus, such, and as 
 
 antecedent to that, ita ; in such 
 
 a manner, sic ; to such a degree, 
 
 tarn, 
 some one, quidam. 
 soothsayer, haruspex, icis, m. 
 sorrow, luctus, iis, m. 
 space, spatium, i, n. 
 spare, parco, ere, peperci, parsiirus. 
 speak, loquor, i, ciitus sum. 
 speech, oratio, onis,/ 
 speed, celeritas, atis,/ 
 spring, orior, iri, ortus sum. 
 squadron, turma, ae,/ 
 stand (a wave), excipio, ere, epi, 
 
 eptus. 
 start, proflciscor, 1, fectus sum. 
 state (a case), dico, ere, dixi, dictus. 
 state, an organized body of citizens, 
 
 civitas, atis,/ 
 state, the government, res publica. 
 station, constituo, ere, ui, tus. 
 stature, statura, ae,/ 
 still, even now, etiam nunc, 
 stone, saxum, i, n. 
 stop, prohibeo, ere, ui, itus. 
 storm, tempestas, atis,/ 
 stormy season, hiems, is,/ 
 strange, mirabilis, e. 
 strength, vis, vis,/; useplur. 
 strike (fear) into, inicio, ere, eci, 
 
 ectus. 
 
52 
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 t 
 
 struggle, laboro, are, avi, atus. 
 study, studium, i, n. 
 subject, subicio, ere, ieci, ieotus. 
 succeed, succedo, ere, essi, cessu- 
 
 rus. 
 successful, fortunatus, a, m. 
 successfully, feliciter. 
 suddenly, subito. 
 sufficient, satis, 
 suitable, idoneus, a, m. 
 summit of, summus, a, m. 
 supplies (collectively), commeatus, 
 
 us, m. 
 supply of grain, res friimentaria. 
 suppress, comprimo, ere, essi, 
 
 essus. 
 surpass, praecedo, ere, essi, essus. 
 surrender, deditio, mas,f. 
 surrender, reflex, pron. with dedo, 
 
 ere, di^, ditus. 
 surround (by stealth), circumvenio, 
 
 ire, veni, ventus. 
 surround, put around, circumdo, 
 
 are, dedi, atus. 
 swiftness, celeritas, atis,/! 
 sword, gladius, i, 'm. 
 sympathize with, cum . . . sentio, 
 
 ire, si, sus. 
 
 take (a town), expugno, are, etc. 
 take (life), 'eripio, ere, ripui, reptus. 
 take (time), sumo, ere, psi, ptus. 
 take an oath, iuro, are, avi, atus. 
 take away, carry off, destroy, au- 
 
 fero, ferre, abstuli, ablatus. 
 take care, video, ere, vidi, visus, 
 
 or ciiro, are, etc. 
 take from, eripio, ere, ripui, reptus. 
 take, lead, diico or ediico, ere, xi, 
 
 ctus. 
 
 take on board, tollo, ere, sustuli, 
 
 sublatus. 
 take place, fio, fieri, factum est. 
 take, seize, capio, ere, cepi, captus. 
 ta:lk, loquor, i, lociitus sum. 
 teach, doceo, ere, ui, tus. 
 territory, finis, is, m. 
 think, have an opinion, sentio, ire, 
 
 sensi, sus. 
 threaten, minitor, ari, atus sum. 
 threats of violence, vis et minae. 
 through, per. 
 
 throw, proicio, ere, ieci, ectus. 
 thwart, obsisto, ere, stiti. 
 time, space of time, spatium, 
 
 i, n. 
 to-morrow, eras, 
 too little, parum. 
 towards, (motion) towards, ad; 
 
 (feeling) towards, erga or in. 
 tower, turris, is, f. 
 town, oppidum, i, n. 
 trader, mercator, oris, m. 
 train, exerceo, ere, ui, itus. 
 treachery, perfidia, ae, / 
 treason, proditio, onis, f. 
 tributary, vectigalis, c. 
 triumph, triumphus, i, m. 
 trumpet, tuba, ae, yi 
 turn, in turn, vicissem. 
 tyrant, tyrannus, i, m. 
 
 U 
 
 under, sub. 
 
 undergo, subeo, ire, ii, itus. 
 undertaking, conatum, i, «. 
 unknown, incognitus, a, m. 
 unpunished, impunitus, a, m. 
 unwillingly, invitus, tx, m. 
 use, usus, us, m. 
 useless, iniitilis, e. 
 
VOCABULARY 
 
 S3 
 
 valor, viitus, utis,y: 
 vantage-ground, locus, i, m, 
 very easy, perfacills, e. 
 vessel, nayis, is, / 
 vice, vitium, i, n. 
 victory, victoria, ae, f. 
 view, adspectus, us, m. 
 village, -vdcus, i, m. 
 visit, adeo, ire, ii, itus. 
 
 W 
 
 wait, wait for, exspecto, are, etc. 
 wakefulness, vigiliae, plur.f. 
 warning, give warning, praecipio, 
 
 ere, cepi, eptus. 
 warship, navis longa. 
 watch, vigils, are, avi, atus. 
 watchfulness, diligentia, ae, /. 
 way, manner, modus, i, m. 
 w.eapon, telum, i, n. 
 weather, tempestas, atis, f. 
 weight, pondus, oris, n. 
 well, be well, valeo, ere, ui, iturus. 
 wheel, rota, ae, f. 
 whole, wholly, totus, a, m. 
 why, quid or cur. 
 wicked, improbus, a, m. 
 
 wickedness, noxia, ae, /. 
 
 will, good-will, gratia, ae, or volun- 
 tas, atis, /. 
 
 win over, adduco, ere, xi, ctus. 
 
 winter quarters, hiberna, hiberna- 
 cula, plur. n. 
 
 wisdom, consilium, i, n. 
 
 wise, sapiens, entis. 
 
 vrish, volo, velle, volui. 
 
 wish, voluntas, atis,/. 
 
 withdraw, discedo, ere, essi, essurus. 
 
 vrithdraw, turn back, reflex, pron. 
 with recipio, ere, epi, eptus. 
 
 within, intra. 
 
 without, sine. 
 
 without a share, adj., expers, tis. 
 
 woods, silva, ae, /. 
 
 wounded, vulneratus, a, m. 
 
 wretched, a wretch, miser, a, m. 
 
 write, scribo, ere, ipsi, tus. 
 
 year, annus, i, m. 
 yesterday, heri. 
 
 yield, concedo, ere, cessi, cessus. 
 yoke, iugum, i, n. 
 youth, the youth (collectively), in- 
 ventus, utis, /. 
 
ANNOUNCEMENTS 
 
LATIN TEXT-BOOKS 
 
 Allen and Greenough's New Latin Grammar jSi.20 
 
 Allen and Greenough's Shorter Latin Grammar 95 
 
 Allen and Greenough's New Caesar, with vocabulary 1.25 
 
 Allen and Greenough's New Cicero, with vocabulary 1.40 
 
 Allen and Greenough's Ovid, with vocabulary 1.50 
 
 Allen and Greenough's Sallust's Catiline. (Revised by Greenough 
 
 and Daniell) 90 
 
 Allen and Greenough's Cicero de Senectute 50 
 
 Allen's (F. D.) Remnants of Early Latin 75 
 
 Allen's (W. F.) Germania and Agricola of Tacitus i.oo 
 
 Allen's (W. F.) Introduction to Latin Composition 90 
 
 Collar's Gate to Caesar 40 
 
 Collar's New Gradatim 50 
 
 Collar's Practical Latin Composition i.oo 
 
 Collar's Via Latina 75 
 
 Collar and Daniell's First Latin Book i.oo 
 
 Collar and Daniell's Beginner's Latin Book i.oo 
 
 Collar and Daniell's First Year Latin i.oo 
 
 Teachers' Manual to accompany First Year Latin 15 
 
 College Series of Latin Authors. (See circulars for details.) 
 
 Crowell's Selections from the Latin Poets 1.40 
 
 Crowell and Richardson's Bender's Roman Literature i.oo 
 
 D'Ooge's Easy Latin for Sight Reading 40 
 
 Ferguson's Questions on Caesar and Xenoph'on 1.12 
 
 Gepp and Haigh's Latin-English Dictionary 1.30 
 
 Ginn & Company's Classical Atlas cloth, ^2.00; boards 1.25 
 
 Gleason's Gate to Vergil 45 
 
 Greenough, D'Ooge; and Daniell's Second Year Latin 1.25 
 
 Greenough and Kittredge's New Virgil : Aeneid, I-VI, with 
 
 vocabulary 1.50 
 
 Greenough and Kittredge's Bucolics and Aeneid, I-VI, with 
 
 vocabulary 1.60 
 
 Gudeman's Dialogus de Oratoribus 2.75 
 
 Hale and Buck's Latin Grammar i.oo 
 
 Latin and Greek School Classics. (See circulars for details.) 
 
 Lord's Roman Pronunciation of Latin 35 
 
 Moulton's Preparatory Latin Composition ,1.00 
 
 Part I. Based on Caesar and Cicero with Supplementary 
 
 Sight Tests 80 
 
 Part II. A Systematic Drill in Syntax 25 
 
 Post's Latin at Sight 80 
 
 Stickney's Cicero de Natura Deorum 1.40 
 
 Terence's Adelphoe, Phormio, Heauton Timorumenos. i vol i.oo 
 
 Thacher's Madvig's Latin Grammar 2.25 
 
 White's Latin-English Lexicon i.oo 
 
 White's English-Latin Lexicon 1.50 
 
 White's Latin-English and English-Latin Lexicon 2.25 
 
 GINN & COMPANY Publishers 
 
 Boston New York Chicago London 
 
 San Francisco Atlanta Dallas Columbus 
 
Text»Books tor Higher Schools 
 
 By WILLIAM C. COLLAR, Head-Master of Roxbury Latin School, 
 
 Boston, and M. GRANT DANIELL, recently Principal 
 
 of Chauncy-Hall School, Boston. 
 
 Collar and Daniell's First Year Latin. i2mo. Cloth. Illustrated. 
 xiv-|- 311 pages. For introduction, gi.oo. 
 
 Teacher's Manual to accompany First Year Latin, izmo. Paper. 43 pages. 
 Price, 15 cents. 
 
 Collar and Daniell's First Latin Book. 286 pages. Illustrated. For 
 introduction, jfi.oo. 
 
 Collar and Daniell's Beginner's Latin Book. 283 pages. For intro- 
 duction, ^I.OO. 
 
 Latine Reddenda. The English- Latin exercises from " The Beginner's Latin Book." 
 With Glossarium Grammaticum, 41 pages. For introduction, 20 cents. 
 With Glossarium Grammaticum and English-Latin Vocabulary. 58 pages. For 
 introduction, 30 cents. 
 
 Collar and Daniell's Beginner's Greek Composition. Based mainly 
 upon Xenophon's Anabasis, Book I. 201 pages. Illustrated. For intro- 
 duction, 90 cents. 
 
 By WILLIAM C. COLLAR. 
 
 Collar's Via Latina. A new Latin Reader. 203 pages. For intro- 
 duction, 75 cents. 
 
 Collar's New Gradatim. Revised. 189 pages. For introduction, 
 
 50 cents. 
 
 Collar's Practical Latin Composition. 268 pages. Forintroduction,;?i.oo. 
 
 Collar's Gate to Caesar. 141 pages. For introduction, 40 cents. 
 
 Caesar, Gallic War. Book II. Edited, with Notes and a Vocabulary. 
 96 pages. For introduction, 35 cents. Latin and Greek School Classics. 
 
 Vergil's Aeneid. Book VII. Issued both with and without translation. 
 Illustrated. For introduction, 45 cents. Latin and Greek School Classics. 
 
 Collar's Shorter Eysenbach. Eysenbach's Practical German Grammar. 
 Revised and largely rewritten, with notes to the exercises and vocabularies. 
 Revised by Clara S. Curtis. 242 pages. For introduction, jSi.oo. 
 
 Collar's German Lessons. Eysenbach's Practical German Grammar. 
 Revised and largely rewritten, with Notes, Selections for Reading, and 
 Vocabularies. 360 pages. For introduction, ^i.2q. 
 
 Collar's English into German. The English Exercises from Collar's 
 Eysenbach's German Lessons. 5 1 pages. For introduction, 25 cents. 
 
 GINN & COMPANY Publishers 
 
 Boston New York Chicago San Francisco 
 
 Atlanta Dallas Columbus London